mpam.-  ^^ 


UC-NRLF 


on  FIT   OF 
Villiam  A.   SeLchell 


M 


(xRAMMAR 


OF 


THE  HAWAIIAN  LANdUAUE 


BY    L.    ANDREAVS 


ho:n^olitlu: 


PRINTED  AT  THE  MISSION    PRESS. 


1854. 


I     t    c^t  c/t/  '•    - 


/tc, 


CONTENTS. 


Grammar,  Definition,  -  -  -  Sec.    1  — 3 

PART   1,  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Part  1,  Orthography,  -  -  -  "4 

Hawaiian  Alphabet,  -  -  -  "6 

Division  of  Letters,    -  -  -  -  "8  — 10 

VOWELS. 


Of  the  Vowel  Sounds, 

- 

(< 

II 

HAWAHAN  CONSONANTS. 

Of  the  Consonant  Sounds, 

- 

t* 

13 

FOREIGN  CONSONANTS. 

Of  the  Sounds  of  Foreign  Consonants, 

- 

<( 

14 

DIPHTHONGS. 

Of  Diphthongs,          ^             .             _ 

- 

« 

15—18 

Of  Syllables, 

- 

(( 

19—23 

Of  Words,    ...             - 

> 

« 

24—26 

Formation  of  Words, 

- 

(C 

27—36 

Peculiarities  in  the  Use  of  Words, 

- 

(< 

37—40 

Of  Accents — General  Law,    - 

. 

cc 

41—45 

Letters  Dropped,        -             -             - 

- 

(C 

46 

Letters  Inserted,         .             -             - 

- 

« 

48 

PART  2,  ETYMOLOGY. 

Etymology  Definition, 

- 

« 

52 

Of  the   O  Emphatic, 

- 

« 

53 

Its  Place  in  the  Sentence — Rules, 

- 

it 

54 

Of  the  Articles  Generally, 

- 

« 

55—58 

Definite  articles  ka  and  ke,     - 

- 

<( 

59 

Where  they  are  Used, 

- 

{( 

60—61 

Semidefinite  Articles, 

- 

(( 

63—65 

Indefinite  Articles,      -             -             - 

- 

t( 

66 

Plural  Article, 

- 

(< 

67 

SIMPLE  PREPOSITIONS. 

Of  the  Simple  Prepositions,    - 

. 

et 

68 

Their  Use  and  Signification, 

- 

t( 

69—75 

iviJe24J215 


ti  CONTENTS. 

NOUNS. 

Of  Nouns,                -             -             .  -  Sec.    76 

Nouns  Proper  and  Common,               .  .  <«       77 — 73 

Abstnict.  niid  dmcrete,         -             -  -  "       79 

Syllables  forming  a  Class,     -              -■  -  "       80 

PERSON. 

Of  Person,                 -              -              -  -  "82^ 

Definition,  three  Persons,     -             -  -  «       82 

NUMBER. 

Of  Number,             .             -             .  .  "       83 

Nouns  have  three  numbers,  -              -^  -  '•       83 — 85 

Signs  of  Dual  and  Plural,      -             -  -  «       86—94 

GENDER. 

Of  Gender,               ...  "       95 

No  Neuter  Gender,                -              -  »  »<       96 

Specific  Words  for  Genders,              -  -  "97 

DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

Of  the  Declension  of  Nouns,             -  -  '-98 

Case — Definition  of  Case,      -             -  -  "98 

Number  of  Cases,       -           -             -  -  "99 

Paradigm  of  Common  Nouns,             -  -  "     100' 

Paradigm  of  a  Name  of  a  Pface,       -  -  '•     101 

Nouns  made  Plural  by  Mau  and  Poe,  -  "     102 — 103 

Paradigm  of  a  Name  of  a  Person,  -  "     104 

Remarks  on  the  Paradigms,                -  -  '•'     105 

ADJECTIVES. 

Of  Adjectives,           -             -             -  -  "106 

Adjective  Definition,              _             .  -  '«     106 

Qualify  Nouns  variously        -              -  -  "      107 

Place  of  Adjectives  in  the  sentence,  -  "108 

Division  of  Adjectives,          -             -  -  "109 

Observations  on  Adjectives,               -  -  "110 

Of  He  and  L^a  before  Adjectives,      -  -  "111 

Nouns  turned  into  Adjectives,            .  -  "     112 

Adjectives  used  as  Nouns,                  -  -  "113 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

Tferee  Degrees  of  Comparison,           -  -  "114 

Comparative  Sub-divided,     -             -  -  "114 

Numeral  Adjectives,          -                 -  -  *'     115 

Observation  on  Numeral  Adjectives,  -  "116 


CONTENTS. 


iU 


PRONOUNS. 

Pronoun — Definition  and  Use,  -  -  Sec. 

Classes — Person  and  j\umber,  .  .  a 

Personal  Pronouns,  -  -  _  << 

Orthogrophy  of  the  First  Person,        -  -  « 

Paradigm  of  Fust  Person.      -  -  -  << 

Remarks  on  the  Paradigm,    -  -  -  '< 

Remarks  on  the  Dual,  of  First  Person,  -  '* 

Remarks  on  the  First  Person  Plural,  -  " 

Second  Person  Singular,  -  -  •" 

Declension  of  Second  Person,  -  -  ^' 

Examples,  ____'< 

Third  Person  Singular,  -  -  _  " 

Two  different  Words,  -  .  .  •' 

Orthography  of  Third  Person,  -  -  " 

Paradigm  Third  Person   Singular,     -  -  " 

Remarks  on  Third  Person  Singular,  -  " 

Third  Person  Dual,  -  -  -  '' 

Third  Person  Plural,  .  .  .  ^' 

The  Pronoun  Hai,  _  _  _  '< 

Pronouns  Modifying  Verbs,  -  -  " 

Pronouns  with  the  Idea  of  Verbs,      -  -  " 

Prefix  Pronouns,      -  -  -  -  *' 

Two  classes — First  Class,      -  -  -  " 

Second  Class,  ____<« 

Examples — Remarks,  _  -  _  << 

Relative  Pronouns,  _  _  _  << 

Interrogative  Pronouns,         _  -  -  '< 

Ezamples  and  Paradigm,       .  -  -  " 

Interrogatives  Aha  and  Hea,  -  -  " 

COMPOUND  PREPOSITIONS. 

Declinable — Examples,  -  -  -  '• 

ADVERBS. 

Adverbs  of  Three  Classes      .  -  -  " 

Second  Class  Declined — Examples,    -  -  " 

CONJUNCTIONS. 
Definitions  and  Use, 

INTERJECTIONS. 

Definition — Examples.  _  -  - 

VERBS. 

Definition.     Not  Necessary  to  an  Idea,  -  " 

No  Verb  of  Existence.  -  -  -  ' 


117 

119—120 

121—122 

123 

124 

125—126 

127—128 

129—130 

131 

132 

133—135 

136 

137 

138 

139 

140 

141 

142 

143 

146 

147 

149 

150— -151 

152 

153 

154 

156 

157—158 

159—160 


161—164 


165 
165 


166 
167 

168 

170 


.IT  CONTENTS. 

How  Existence,  Possessing,  Etc..  are  Expressed,  Sec.  171 

No  Auxiliary  Verbs,               -             -             -  "171 

No  Variation  of  Verb  itself,                -             -  "     172 

Person— Number,                  .             ,             .  "     174—176 

Double  First  Persons,  Dual  and  Plural,          t  <'  178 

MOOD. 

Definition  and  Number  of  Moods,     -            -  "  179—180 

TENSE. 

Definition,                -             -             -             -  «181 

Root  of  a  Verb,       -             -             ^             -  ''182 

INDICATIVE   MODE,   PRETERITE  TENSES. 

Five  Forms,  Examples,         ,             .,             ,  ^'  183—188 

Present  Tense,  Examples,     -             -             '  <'  189 

Future  Tense,  Two  Forms,  Remarks,            -  ^'  190 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD, 

Definition,  Use,  Remarks,                  -             -  '*  191—192 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Definition,  Use,  Preterite  Four  Forms,            -  «'  193^197 

Present  Subjunctive,  Examples,         -^             -  "198 

Future  Subjunctive,  Examples,          ^             ,  «  199—201 

INFINITIVE  MOOD, 

Infinitive  Forms,  Examples,               _             »  «  203 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present,  Preterite,  Gerund,           -             -  "  204 — 266 

Synopsis  of  the  F  rsi  Conjunction,    -             '  "  207 — 208 

OF  CONJUGATION, 

Definition,  Remarks,  etc.,     .             -             ,  <'  209 — 210 

Examples,  ....««  211-^228 

COMPOUND  VERBS, 

Definition,  Examples,           .             ,             ,  «  230 — 231 

Anomalous  Verb  Loaa,         -             -             -  "  232 

VERBAL  DIRECTIVES. 

Explanation,             .             .             .             -  «  233 

What  the  Directives  are,       -             -             -  «  234 

Paradigm  with  Directives,     -              -              -  "  235 — 238 

The  Syllable  La,     -             -             -             -  "  239—240 

Further  Remarks,     --..<'  241 

The  Syllable  Ai,  Examples,              -             -  "  242 


INTRODUCTION. 


§  1.  Language,  in  all  parts  of  the  earth,  is  the  princi- 
pal medium  of  communication  between  men.  It  is  employ- 
ed only  by  rational  beings,  or  such  as  have  the  faculty  of 
speech;  that  is,  of  uttering  articulate  sounds. 

§  2,  Language  is  the  medium  of  communicating  ideas 
in  two  ways  :  1st,  by  the  use  of  the  voice  in  the  utterance 
of  articulate  sounds  termed  words  ;  2nd,  by  characters 
representing  articulate  sounds.  The  former  is  addressed 
to  the  ear,  the  latter  to  the  eye. 

§  3.  Languages,  like  the  people  of  the  earth,  are  divi- 
ded into  great  families.  These  again,  owing  to  some  lo- 
cal or  other  circumstances,  are  divided  into  Dialects. 

§  4.  A  dialect  is  a  branch  of  some  more  general  lang- 
uge.  A  dialect  is  formed  by  leaving  off  from  the  forms  of 
the  general  language,  or  by  adding  something  new  to  them. 
The  pronunciation  may  to  some  extent  be  altered  etc. 
These  changes  may  be  produced  by  time,  accident,  cul- 
ture or  neglect. 

§  5.  Most  if  not  all  the  dialects  of  Polynesia  appear  to 
have  had  the  same  origin,  which,  in  all  probability,  was 
the  Malayan.  As  the  Islands  of  the  great  Pacific  Ocean, 
constituting  Polynesia,  are  many  and  far  separated,  it  is 
reasonable  to  suppose  that  their  languages  must  vary  from 
each  other  ;   and  this  is  found  to  be  a  fact. 

§  6.  Every  language  has  certain  great  fundamental 
principles  upon  which  it  is  constructed.  These  principles 
differing  from  each  other,  constitute  their  peculiarity. 
Hence,  every  language  in  its  etymology  and  syntax  must 
be  regulated  by  its  own  laws  :  though  sorne  general  prin- 
ciples may  run  through  the  whole. 


II  JNTRODUCTION. 

§  7.  The  laws  and  usages  of  a  language  reduced  to  a 
system,  or  the  principles  of  its  construction  drawn  out  to 
the  eye,  constitute  its  grammar. 

§  8.  Grammars  may  be  general  or  particular  as  they 
treat  of  the  principles  of  some  one  of  the  family  of  lang- 
uages, or  of  the  language  of  a  particular  country  in  a  gen- 
eral manner  ;  or  they  may  take  up  some  particular  dialect 
of  a  language  and  may  elucidate  its  principles  more  mi- 
nutely than  could  be  done  in  a  general  grammar. 

§  9.  The  object  of  the  following  work  is  merely  to  draw 
out  with  some  particularity  the  leading  principles  of  the 
Hawaiian  dialect.  By  Hawaiian  dialect  is  meant  the  gen- 
eral language  of  the  collective  group  of  islands  so  named 
by  the  natives  themselves  from  the  name  of  their  largest 
•island. 

§  10.  A  general  grammar  of  all  the  Polynesian  lang- 
uages is  a  disideratum.  But  probably  such  a  grammar  is 
yet  to  be  written ;  for  it  is  not  known  that  such  a  work 
has  yet  been  seriously  attempted. 

§  11.  If  however  such  a  work  is  meditated,  it  should 
not  be  delayed,  for  some  of  the  more  important  materials 
are  passing  away,  viz  :  the  present  race,  who  only  can  be 
familiar  with  the  pure  language  of  the  natives  of  Polynesia. 
The  language  of  the  present  generation  is  already  mixing 
with  foreign  idioms  and  introducing  foreign  words. 

§  12.  The  Hawaiian  Dialect  w^as  reduced  to  writing 
■t)y  the  Missionaries  of  the  A.  B.  C.  F.  M.,  and  the  first 
:book  was  printed  in  January,  1822.  Since  that  time  the 
works  printed  for  the  use  of  Hawaiians  in  their  own  lang- 
iiage  amounted  to  about  6,415  continuous  pages,  of  duo- 
decimo size,  besides  the  Bible,  Hymn  books,  etc.,  etc.; 
•which  amount  was  printed  previous  to  1843,  since  when 
there  has  been  no  accurate  estimate  made. — See  Dibhle*s 
History  of  Hmuaiian  Islands. 

§  13.  It  was  the  object  of  those  wdio  first  reduced  the 
language  to  writing:  first,  to  ascertain  what  sounds  there 
were  in  the  language  ;  and  secondly,  to  express  these 
j5ounds  by  the  fewest  characters.  The  characters  used 
are  the  Roman  ;  and  the  sound  given  to  the  vowels  are 
rthose  of  the  languages  of  Southern  continental  Europe 
irather  than  those  of  the  Enirlish. 


fNTRoniicTia\.  rrr 

§  14.  The  materials  for  the  following  grammar  have 
heen  taken  almost  entirely  from  native  manuscripts  or 
from  documents  printed  from  native  manuscripts.  That 
is,  every  example  cited  to  illustrate  any  principle  has 
been  copied  from  a  manuscript  written  by  a  native  or 
from  a  printed  page  originally  written  by  a  native.  It  is 
possible  that  some  of  the  works  written  by  the  missiona- 
ries might  be  of  equal  authority  ;  but  as  so  much  has 
been  written  by  the  natives  themselves,  it  was  thought 
best  to  appeal  to  them  for  authority  in  every  case.  If 
anything  shall  be  inserted  contrary  to  the  above  statement, 
it  will  be  mentioned.  It  was,  therefore,  impossible  to 
quote  the  authorities ;  that  is,  the  names  of  the  writers, 
except  in  this  general  way. 

§  15.  After  all,  there  will  probably  appear  principles 
in  the  language  which  have  been  entirely  overlooked,  or 
mistaken  in  the  developement.  If  so,  future  editions  or 
future  laborers  must  be  looked  to  for  corrections  or  for 
the  supply  of  deficiencies. 


GRAMMAR 


HAWAIIAN  LANGUAGE.^ 


§  1.  Grammar  is  a  written  account  of  the  principles 
used  in  writing  or  speaking  a  language. 

§  2.  A  Hawaiian  Grammar  is  an  explanation  of  the 
rules  and  principles  used  by  Hawaiians  in  speaking  and 
writing  their  language. 

§  3.  Grammatical  Treatises  are  usually  divided  into 
several  parts,  viz.  Orthography,  Etymology,  Syntax  and 
Prosody.  Orthography  treats  of  letters  and  their  forma- 
tion into  words.  Etymology  treats  of  words  and  their 
changes  in  relation  to  each  other.  Syntax  teaches  the 
rules  whereby  words  are  formed  into  sentences.  Pros- 
ody will  hardly  be  included  in  this  Grammar. 

Note. —  It  is  taken  for  granted,  in  this  work,  that  the  reader  un- 
derstands the  principles  of  general  Grammar;  hence  many  defini- 
tions are  omitted. 

Part  I.  — OF  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

§  4.  The  first  principles  of  a  language  are  its  sounds. 
These  sounds  are  represented  by  arbitrary  characters 
called  Letters. 

§  5.  The  letters  of  pure  Hawaiian  words  are  twelve; 
but  as  other  sounds  have  been  admitted  from  foreign  lan- 
guages, other  letters  have  been  admitted  to  represent 
them. 


w 


OF    ORTHOGRAPlir. 


§  6.  The  arrangement  of  these  letters  in  the  Alpha- 
bet as  they  now  stand  in  primary  school  books  and  vo- 
eabularies  is  as  follows:  — 


A  a^ 

1       Pronou 

iced 

as 

a  in  art,  after,  6lc. 

E  e  I 

a  long  in  hate,  mate,  &.c. 

I    i 

^     Vowels 

ee  in  see  or  «  in  fatigue. 

O  0 

0  long  as  in  note. 

U  u^ 

00  in  boot. 

H  h 

Aspirate  as  in 

Englisti 

i  He  vowel  sound  as  above. 

K  k 

Ke 

L    1 

La 

M  m 

>     Consonants 

Mu 

N  n 

Nu 

P    i> 

Pi 

W  w^ 

We 

B  b' 

Bi 

D  d 

Di 

F  f 

Fa 

Gg 

Ga  mostly  hard. 

Jj    ) 

^     Foreign 

Letters, 

Je    but  Uttle  used. 

Rr 

Ro 

S  s 

Sa 

T  t 

Ti 

V  V 

V 

Z  z^ 

Z 

§  8.  The  letters  of  the  Hawaiian  Alphabet,  as  ^^j 
stand  above,  and  appear  to  the  eye,  are  divided  into  three 
classes,  viz. 

1.  Vowels. 

2.  Consonants,  used  in  pure  Hawaiian  words. 

3.  Foreign  Consonants.  These  last  are  introduced 
along  with  foreign  words. 

§  9.  It  is  of  importance  both  to  write  and  pronounce 
the  foreign  consonr.nts  as  they  are  written  and  pronoun- 
ced in  English,  ncU  oniy  for  the  sake  of  adding  variety  to 
the  sounds  of  the  language,  but  for  identifying  the  words 
so  introduced.  Thus  Rula  (Ruth)  the  naaie  of  a  womjin, 
in  pure  H;avaiian  letters  v>'()uld  be  L'uka  (^Luke)  a  m^n's 
n^me.  iSV/m  (Sarah)  would  be  Kala\  Rama  (rum)  would 
be  lAma  a  torch.  The  natives  greatly  prefer  that  we 
should  pronounce  our  woids  when  we  use  them  as  we  pro- 


V>T-     TMK     \()A\i;i/ 


)l 


fiOTince  them,  especially  as  so  many  are  now  anxious  to 
acquire  English. 

§  10.  In  printed  books,  the  letters  of  the  alphabet 
have  been  used  as  in  ihe  English  and  other  European  lan- 
guages, in  numbering  the  chapters  of  the  Bible — the 
chapters  and  sections  of  law  books,  &.C.;  but  awkwardly, 
as  it  was  necessary  to  introduce  two  letters  more,  viz.  C 
and  X,  which  are  not  wanted  for  any  other  purpose 

OF  THE  VOWELS. 
§  11.  The  sounds  of  the  Vowels,  as  given  in  the  al- 
phabet are  almost  unifoi-m.  Thus  a  has  the  sound  of  «  in 
€dms,  father,  &,c.  Slight  exceptions  may  be  found;  Ex- 
ception Istj  in  such  words  as  n(;rt/iO,  maivaho,  Oa/iu,  molown, 
&c.  where  the  sounds  resensble  thos€  of  the  Scotch  «,  but 
not  so  broad. 

Ex.  2.  In  some  words  where  a  is  succeeded  by  k  or  p 
accented,  the  a  has  a  sound  similar  to  a  short  English  u 
thus  make  is  pronounced  something  like  miikky,  perhaps 
not  so  short.  Maiimali  like  mulUjm%dlij\  napenape  like 
napympy. 

Ex.  3.  The  o  is  sometimes  shortened  beyond  what  it 
would  appear  from  the  alphabet.  Thus,  Hawaiians  most- 
ly say  mahōpe,  a  few  tnahope  as  if  written  mahoppy,  Sec. 

The  Vowel  sounds,  however,  as  given  in  the  alphabet 
are  almost  universal. 

§  12.  The  sounds  of  the  vowels  as  pronounced  in  Eno- 
lish  would  not  answer  the  purpose  of  pronunciation  in 
Hawaiian  without  a  great  sacrifice  of  simplicity.    Thus, 

1st.  /in  Hawaiian  has  the  sound  of  cc  in  English;  but 
the  class  of  words  is  very  numerous  where  two  iPs  come 
together;  thus,  pii  to  ascend,  in  an  English  dress  would 
be  peeee;  hii,  to  hold  in  the  arms,  would  be  hreee;  iiilii, 
small,  would  be  leeeeleeee. 

2nd.  The  letter  w  in  Hawaiian  sounds  like  oo  in  coo  in 
English.  Hence  ku  to  stand,  would  be  koo;  and  kuu  to 
let  go,  would  be  koooo;  uku  to  pay,  would  be  ookoo;  and 
uuku  little,  would  be  ooookoo,  &c.  Much  of  this  has  been 
avoided  by  the  orthography  of  the  vowels  which  was 
I  opted. 


ac 


12  OF    THE    CONSONANTS. 

OF  THE  HAWAIIAN  CONSONANTS. 

§  13.  The  consonants  are  sounded  mostly  as  they  are 
in  English.     Thus, 

1st.  The  letter  A  is  a  simple  breathing  or  aspirate  as 
hale,  hemo. 

2nd.  The  letter  k  has  some  variety  in  its  pronunciation. 
The  people  of  the  Island  of  Hawaii  formerly  had  a  sound 
now  represented  by  the  letter  k  which  sound  was  a  gut- 
tural, or  rather  perhaps,  the  sound  was  formed  at  the  root 
of  the  tongue.  The  people  of  Kauai,  on  the  other  hand, 
had  a  sound  of  the  same  signification,  but  pronounced  il 
near  the  tip  of  the  tongue  resemblins  the  sound  of  t. 
Since  the  conquest  by  Kamehameha  I.,  and  the  conse- 
quent mixing  up  of  the  people  of  the  different  islands; 
this  letter  has  all  the  intermediate  sounds  from  a  gutter- 
al  to  a  dental;  that  is,  from  the  distinct  k  sound  to  that 
of  the  /.  And  the  people  appear  to  perceive  no  differ- 
ence. It  is  an  anomoly  that  a  people  so  nice  in  distin- 
guishing vowel  sounds  as  the  Hawaiians  are,  should  be  so 
inapt  in  perceiving  the  difference  of  consonant  sounds.  It 
should  be  observed,  that  the  A"  sound  greatly  predominates 
over  that  of  the  /. 

3rd.  The  letter  /  is  a  liquid,  and  is  often  inter- 
chanoable  with  r;  not  the  rolling  French  r,  but  the  smooth 
?'  of  the  Americans.  A  few  persons  assimilate  it  some- 
limes  with  ?i,  as  lanahu,  nanahu,  Lanai,  Nanai;  this,  how- 
ever, is  rare.  The  word  Ililo,  name  of  a  district  on  Ha- 
waii, is  sometimes  pronounced  as  if  written  Hilo,  Hiro  or 
Hido;  and  as  before  remarked,  the  natives  seem  not  to 
perceive  any  difference. 

4th.  71/ has  but  one  sound,  moku,  moo;  it  is  a  liquid. 

.5th.  A"  is  a  liquid  also,  and  has  but  one  sound,  except 
as  it  may  be  occasionally  heard  for  /.      [See  under  /  ] 

6th.  P  is  a  labial,  and  has  but  one  sound,  aspue,  pio. 

7th.  rr,  as  a  consonant,  has  but  one  sound,  as  wa,  xve- 
hi,  <Slc.,  but  is  frequently  represented  by  the  diphthong 
ue;  as,  naueue  is  often  written  natuewe;  and  so  of  most  of 
the  diphthongs  formed  by  u  and  another  vowel. 

Note, —  The  letter  w.  in  many  cnw.'s  could  Ix?  spared,  as  o  itu  \a 


OF    THE    CONSONANTS.  13 

pronounced  Wke  owau.  Some  Hawaiians  write  o-^/cea  one  of  the  an- 
cient gods  ;  others  write  o  IVakea;  tlie  pronunciation  being  the 
same. 

OF  FOREIGN  CONSONANTS. 

§  14  fi  is  a  labial,  and  Hawaiians  are  inclined  to  give 
it  the  soft  sound  of  jd,  as  baka^  paka. 

D  has  the  same  sound  as  in  English,  but  Hawaiians  of- 
ten run  it  into  the  k  or  t  sounds.    [See  §  13,  3rd  and  5th.] 

F  this  letter  was  not  introduced,  as  at  the  Society  Is- 
lands for  a  Digamma  or  aspirate;  but  to  represent  the  re- 
al English  semi-vowel  sounds;  as  fiku,  a  fig.  The  na- 
tives often  run  it  into  thejt?  sound. 

G  has  but  one  hard  sound,  as  gola,  gold;  Hawaiians  ea- 
sily run  it  into  the  k  or  /  sounds.  In  pronouncing  the 
proper  name  of  t tie  country  Belgium.  Haw,  Belegiuma,  the 
g  is  soft. 

/has  lately  been  introduced  to  spell  the  foreign  word 
jure,  jury. 

R  has  the  smooth  soft  sound  and  hence  easily  assimila- 
ted with  /.  The  strong  rolling  r  cannot  be  pronounced 
by  a  Hawaiian. 

S  has  been  introduced  as  a  sibilant,  for  the  Hawaiians 
naturally  have  none.  Hawaiians  begin  to  use  the  sound 
in  such  words  as  Sabati,  Sabbath;  soj)a,  soap,  &.c.,  but  fre- 
quently run  it  into  the  k  sound. 

T  is  easily  to  be  pronounced  by  some,  more  difficult 
by  others.     It  has  but  one  sound. 

Fis  not  often  clearly  sounded  by  Hawaiians,  they  run 
it  into  the  sound  odv. 

Z  is  used  only  in  a  few  words  introduced  from  the 
Greek  or  Hebrew,  as,  Z'lona^  Zion;   Zizania,  cockle. 

Note. —  The  foregoing  foreign  letters  are  never  used  except  in 
writing  words  introduced  from  foreign  languages. 

OF  DIPHTHONGS. 

§  15.  A  Diphthong  is  the  compound  sound  of  two  vow- 
els united  in  one. 

§  16,  It  is  doubtful  whether  in  a  Hawaiian's  ear  two 
vowels  are  ever  so  united  as  to  form  what,  in  European 


14 


OF    THE    DIPTHONGS. 


languages,  is  termed  a  diphthong;  that  is,  the  coalition  of 
two  vowels  into  one  sound.  Still,  in  a  grammatical  treat- 
ise the  theory  may  be  safely  adopted. 

§  17.  It  is  clear,  however,  "hat  the  langunge  has  no 
improper  diphthongs;  as  both  vowels,  as  pronounced  by 
Hawaiians,  are  always  heard. 

§18.  The  fallowing,  considered  in  theory,  as  diph- 
thongs, are  set  in  contrast  with  other  words  of  the  same 
orthography,  but  which  consist  of  separate  syllables  and 
constitute  words  of  different  significations  from  the  other. 

a-a  roots  of  a  plant  Or  tree, 

a-e,  to  assent, 

a-i,  food,  V.  to  eat, 

a-o,  a  cloud, 

a-u,  to  swim, 

e-a,  to  rise  up, 

e-e,  to  enter  as  a  canoe, 

e-i,  eia,  offering  to  another, 

e-o,  becoming  anothers, 

e-u,  to  rise  up, 

i-a,  pron.  sign  of  accusative, 

i-e,  a  kind  of  kapa  or  cloth, 

i-i,  to  be  in  difficulty, 

i-o,  muscle,  lean  flesh, 

l-u,  disagreeable, 

o-a,  a  split  board, 

o-e,  long,  as  the  neck, 

o-i,  eatable  kalo, 

o-o,  ripe,  mature,  as  food, 

o-u,  pron.  of  thee,  thine 

u-a,  a  kind  of  kapa, 

u-e,  to  shake,  move, 

u-i,  to  question,  ask, 

H-o,  to  spread,  as  vines, 

u-u,  elastic, 

Note. —  Protracted  investigations,  in  company  with  intelligent 
Hawaiians,  would  doubtless,  modify  some  of  these  remarks. 

OF  SYLLABLES. 

§  19.  A  syllable,  in  Hawaiian,  may  consist  of  a  single 
vowel,  or  a  consonant  united  with  a  vowel,  or  at  most,  of 
a  consonant  and  two  vowels;  never  of  more  than  one 
consonaiU  in  a  syllabic. 


a-a  a  dwarf. 

a-e,  to  go  on  board  a  canoe. 

a-i,  the  neck. 

a-o,  to  teach,  reprove. 

a-u,  pron.  of  me,  mine. 

e-a,  dust  raised  by  the  wind. 

e-e,  the  armpit. 

e-i,  to  speak. 

€-0,  answering  to  a  call. 

e-u,  one  in  grief. 

ia,  a  fish. 

i-e,  an  angry  man. 

i-i,  mouldy  food. 

i-o,  there,  at  a  distance. 

i-u,  in   hiu  ia,  the  tail  of  a  fislu 

o-a,  rafter  of  a  house. 

o-e,  to  prick,  probe. 

o-i,  a  lame  person. 

o-o,  an  instrument  to  dig  with. 

o-u,  pron.  of  me,  mine. 

u-a,  rain. 

u-e,  angry,  provoked. 

u-i,  a  youth,  young  man. 

u-o,  the  sound  of  a  bell. 

u-u,  to  stammer. 


OF   SVLLABLES.  15 

§  20.  In  Hawaiian,  every  syllable  ends  with  a  vowel 
sound;  and  no  syllable  can  have  more  than  three  letters; 
generally,  not  more  than  two;  and  a  vast  many  syllable» 
consist  of  single  letters  — vowels. 

§  21.  No  adult  Hawaiian  uneducated  can  easily  pro- 
nounce, and  never  without  special  eifort,  will  attempt  to 
pronounce,  two  consonants  together  in  the  same  syllable. 
The  only  word  that  has  been  printed  in  Hawaiian  books 
with  two  consonants  standing  together,  is  Kristo^  Christ. 

§  22.  It  will  appear  obvious,  from  the  foregoing  sec- 
tions, why  the  names  of  the  letters,  as  they  sZand  in  the 
alphabet  are  somewhat  varied  from  the  English  names* 
The  names  of  the  letters  must  terminate  wiih  a  vowel. 

§  23.  As  every  syllable  must  end  wi(h  a  vowel  sounds 
and  as  two  consonants  cannot  be  sounded  together  with- 
out a  vowel,  and  as  whole  w®rds  and  even  sentences 
may  be  made  up  of  vowels,  it  is  clear  that  the  vowel 
sounds  must  greatly  predominate  over  the  consonant 
sounds;  thus,  oiaio^  truth;  aoao,  side;  e  i  ae  oe  ia  ia,  speak 
thou  to  him  there;  e  ae  an  ia  oe,  I  will  consent  to  you;  and 
many  phrases,  if  not  sentences,  may  be  made  up  entirely 
of  vowel  sounds.  The  language,  therefore,  must  appear 
monotonous  to  one  unacquainted  with  its  force. 

OF  WORDS. 

§  24.  A  word  is  an  articulate  sound,  or  union  of 
sounds  that  expresses  some  idea.  A  word  may  be  simple, 
that  is,  expressing  but  one  idea,  or  it  may  be  a  union  of 
what  was  originally  two  or  more  words  and  convey  more 
ideas  ihan  one. 

§  25.  In  Hawaiian,  each  of  the  vowels  constitutes  one 
or  more  distinct  words.  Still,  a  greater  number  of  words 
is  formed  by  the  union  of  a  conronant  and  a  single  vowel; 
as,  ha,  ka,  li,  me,  no,  pu,  wa. 

§  26.  Any  word  that  cannot  be  redncpd  fa  any  sim- 
pler Word,  and  is  one  ufx-n  ul  c'  f  tl(  ;  syllables  may  be 
added  to  modify  the  sense,  is  termed,  a  Root. 

§  27.  A  great  majority  of  radical  words,  or  those 
from  which  others  are  formed,  consist  of  two  syllables.    In 


16 


OF    WORDS. 


this  respect  the  Hawaiian  resembles  several  of  the  an- 
cient languages  as  the  Hebrew,  Syriac,  Arabic,  &c.,  thus 

po-no,  good.  ha-na,  work.  ho-nu,  deep. 

i-no,  bad.  hu-a,  fruit.  he-mo,  to  loosen. 

lo-a,  long.  ka-pa,  cloth.  ho-pu,  to  catch. 

po-ko,  short.  i-a,  fish.  le-le,  to  fl}',  dec, 

§  28.  There  are  also  many  words  formed  by  doubling  the 
first  syllable  of  the  root.  This  generally  gives  frequency 
or  strength  to  the  idea  contained  in  the  root;   thus, 

a,  to  burn,  a-a,  to  burn  hotly 

u-mi,  to  choke,  u-u-mi,  to  choke. 

po-i,  to  cover,  po-po  i,  to  cover  up. 

ni-ni,  to  pour,  ni-ni-ni,  to  pour  into. 

ku-li,  to  kneel,  ku-ku-li,  to  kneel. 

no-i,  to  ask,  no-po-i,  to  ask,  beg. 

ku-i,  to  report,  ku-ku-i,  to  spread  a  report. 

lo-hi,  to  linger,  lo  lo-hi,  to  be  slow. 

pe-hi,  to  pelt,  pe-pe-hi,  to  kill,  &-c. 

§  29.  Others  are  formed  by  doubling  the  second  sylla- 
ble of  the  root;  thus, 

na-ki,  to  bind,  na-ki-ki,  to  bind  tightly. 

ma-kai,  to  look,  ma-kai-kai,  to  examine  a  thing. 

na-ue,  to  trennble,  na-ue-ue,  to  shake. 

na-ha,  to  break,  na-ha-ha,  to  break  to  pieces. 

ha-ma,  to  open,  harna'tna,  to  open  wide,  &.c. 

§  30.  Others  by  prefixing  some  other  syllable  to  add 
force  or  intensity;  thus, 

ka-he-a,  to  call. 
ka-hu-li,  to  overturn. 
pa-ne-c,  to  push  along, 
na-ha-e,  to  break.  [ter. 

ka-pi-li,  to  fit  timbers  as  a  carpen- 
ha-ni-ni  to  pour  out. 
ha-a-we,  a  burden. 
hai-lu-ku,  to  slaughter. 
hau-o-li,  to  rejoice. 
au-he-e,  to  flee. 
ka-wi-li,  to  twist,  mix  up. 
ka-hi-nu,  to  anoint. 
ki-pe-hi,  to  throw  stones  at. 
ku'tii-hi,  to  stand  sideways. 
na-ho-lo,  to  run  along. 
pa-kc-lo,  to  go  beyond,  &c. 


^e-a,  to  call, 

^u-K,  to  turn, 

ne-e,  to  shove, 

ha-e,  to  break, 

jpi-ii,  to  fit, 

ni-ni,  to  pour, 

a-we,  a  burden, 

lu-ku,  to  slaughter, 

o-K,  to  sing, 

^e-e,  to  flee, 

wi-li,  to  twist, 

hi-nu,  ointment, 

pe-hi,  to  pelt, 

ni-hi,  to  turn  sideways, 

ho-lo,  to  run, 

ke-lit,  to  exceed. 


OV    WOKDS.  17 

Note. —  All  tlit.'se  prefixes  have  a  iiieaiiiii.:  of  llieir  own  vvlieii 
they  stand  as  separate  words,  but  those  meanings  seem  to  have  no 
effect  on  the  compound  word,  and  yet  the  original  meaning  of  the 
root  is  nndoubtedly  modified  by  them^  and  so  of  the  doubled  sylla- 
bles of  the  fore^oiiig  section. 

§31.     Another   i.ml   very  numerous   clnss  of  words  is 

formed  by  repeating  botb  syllables  or  (he  whole  word; 
thus, 

pa-la,  to  paint,  dauh,  pa-la-pa-la.  to  write. 

ha-nu),  ointment,  ha-mo-ba-mo.  to  rub  \\]{.\i  oinlmenl. 

la-we,  to  cirry,  ia-we-la-we,  to  carry  frequently. 

he-lu,  to  count,  he-lu-he-lu,  to  read. 

he-ma,  the  left  han<i,  he-ma-he-ma.  awkwardly. 

o-lu,  to  please,  o-lii-o-lu,  pleasant,  agreeable. 

pu-lu,  wet,  jJU-lu-pu^lu,  very  wet.  &.c. 

§  32.  Again,  these  words  with  the  root,  or  bothsylla- 
•bles  doubled  may  have  those  same  prefixes  or  others  as 
ihose  in  §  30;  thus, 

hii-a,  to  grow,  increase,         ma-  hu-a-hu-a,  to  grow  large. 

i-no,  bad,  evil,  m(L-i-no4-no,  ai^iiction,  sufleriflg. 

Ifi-ma,  a  torch,  hght,  ma-la-nta-la-ma,  a  ligiit. 

he-ma-he-ma,  awkward,         pa-he-nui-he-ma,  awkward  inopeech. 

wa-li-ica-U,  weak,  na-ica-li-wa-li,  want  of  stresigth. 

§  33.  Other  w^ords,  from  one  syllable  to  any  number 
«lay  be  prefixed  by  Iwo  which  has  a  causative  meaning; 
thus, 

e-mi,  to  diminish,  hoo-e-mi,  to  cause  to  diminish. 

li-ke-li-ke,  -just  alike,  hoo-U-ke-U-ke,  to  cause  to  resemble, 

pa-i,  to  strike,  hoe-pa-i,  to  cause  to  strike,  punish. 

ma-la-ma-la-ma,  tight,  heo-ma-ht-ma-la-ma,  to  give  iigiit. 

po-ko-le,  short,  hoo-po-ko-le,    to  make  short,  <t,c. 

§  34.  Other  words  are  formed  by  suffixing  the  sylla- 
ble 7ia  a  'Contraction  of  the  word  ana  equivalent  to  the 
English  participial  termination  ing;  thus, 

mo-e-7ia,  a  mat.  for  mo-e-a-na,  a  lying  down. 

hi-ki-na,.  the  east,  for  hi-ki-a-na,  the  coming  [of  the  sun..] 

tvai-ho-na,  a  treasury,        for  wai-lw-a-na,  a  laying  aside. 

hu-i-na,  an  angle,  sum,      for  Im-i-a-na,  a  ui^iting. 

ha-ki-na,  a  broken  piece,  for  ha-ki-a-na,  a  breaking. 

mo-ku-na,  a  dividing  line, -for  mo-ku-a-na,  a  breaking  off. 

haa-mi-na,  a  gift,  for  haa-wl-a-na.  a  giving,  ttc 

"§35.     Another  cluss   of'w«>rdN    is  formed  by   siiflixing 


18  or  uouns. 

ttJL"  p;l,^sive  termiiiafion  of  verbs  ia.  These  «ords  nre 
mostly,  it"  not  alwnys,  the  preter  });irt!ciple  ci"  some  verb, 
though  often  used  as  nouns  or  adjectives.     Thus, 

ni-)iau-ia,  the  ihiiii;-  a-sked  tor,  iVoin  ui-nan  to  ask. 

i-ke-icf,  thai,  which  is  ktiown,  from  i-ke,  to  kiion'. 

hochko-uf,  that  which  is  bronchi  to  pass,     from  hoo-ko,  to  cause. 
pa-i-ia,  printed,  from  pa-i,  to  print,  vtc. 

§  36.  Respecting  many  words  that  are  compaunded,  it 
is  not  yet  settled  fully  in  practice  whether  they  should 
be  written  and  printed  as  one  word  or  separately.  Bolh 
in  printing-  and  writing  among  the  natives  we  have  the 
following  among  many  others. 

kuhihewa,  to  think  erro:ieou^-.lv,  or  kuhi  hewa. 

lapinvule,    foolish,  or  Uipu  wale, 

kupaa,  to  stand  fast,  or  kii  pact, 

hapawalu,  the  name  of  hi/rcents,  or  hapa  tcalu. 

koomnnawanui,  to  j)ersevere,  or  hoomanawa  nui. 

iuka,  towards  the  motuitaiM.  or  i  uka. 

alaloa,  main  road,  or  tda  loa. 

kahumoku,  mate  of  a  ship,  or  kahu  moku. 

lunaauhau,  a  tax  gatherer.  or  luna  auhau. 

aiihikaxm,  ai^enerai,  or  alihl  kaua. 

manaoio,  belief,  faith,  or  manao  io. 

ahaolelo,  a  council,  or  aha  olelo. 

mahiai,  to  till  the  ground,  or  niahi  aL 

])aipalapala,  printer,  or  pai  palapala. 

Note. — The  above  words  have  [>een  written  and  printed  by  na- 
tives and  foreigners  in  both  forms.  But  there  is  an  increasin^j;  dis- 
position to  write  and  print  this  class  of  words  in  one  word  rather 
than  separate  then).  It  was  at  first  a  dilficuit  thing  for  Hawaiians 
to  learn  to  divide  words  properly:  that  is,  to  separate  the  words'in 
a  sentence  from  each  other.  It  was  very  common  for  them  to 
unite  the  article  with  the  noun  as  one  word,  and  so  the  adjective 
with  the  substantive. 

§  37.  It  is  a  peculiar  trait  of  the  Hawaiian  language 
that  a  majority  of  words  can  be  used  as  the  writer  or 
speaker  needs  either  as  nouns,  adjectives,  verbs  or  ad- 
verbs; not  so  much  by  altering  their  forms  as  by  chang- 
ing their  place  in  the  sentence  and  connecting  them  with 
their  adjuncts.    Thus,  lake  the  common  word  alalia, 

As  a  I'cib,  ke  aloha  aku  neiau  i  kuu  hoalauna,  I  love  \uv  friend. 


OK     \VO|{I)S.  It* 

As  n  noif/).  li<'  (iloJni  K<»Ma  i  kmiji  li<);)l;{iiii;i.  ho  ii;i«l  /orr  Un  <ii^ 
)ri(.n(l. 

vi.v  (fM  nd}rcli>'f  If  -.sin  I'h^hn  im  i;»  i  l\f>i.n  iit.;il:<iiii;i .  '"•  i-:  ni'')f  <^<i 
a  lorin!^  vU\v{  in  his  iVii'ii'!. 

.'f.s  ff«  (ffti'erh.  \f^\)n  i'}i>k(i  yr  l;i  kcla  i;i  w,  lliiit  jxrs.iii  ^rcaTt-d 
5 1  i  1 1 1  \v  i  I  h  j^  rien  d>h  iju 

Even  (ho  i)C!i><mir'i  j)ir>nfMiM  c«  1.  livay  Im-  Msfn)  ji;.  u  vcrl»:  llms, 
«fpot  ka  iivcfj  papult  ic  o  md'otf  ?  u  ho  hi'^^  a  stiMW  hat  arnon.'^  your 

Alls.  Oirati  aku  la  n\y  hoi  mi,  o»rou:  likTally.  I  U-.d  <o  hi»n  Ti 
J  hat  is,  I  said  to  him,  I  had. 

J  3o.  From  \\w  fewness  of  the  loiters  and  syllables  in 
the  Iani2u^iire,  it  must  necessarily  be  tlust  muuy  words  of 
the  same  letters  must  have  diiierent  signincations;  and 
-so  it  is,  hut  it  is  «;reatly  remedied  in  Howaiian  as  in  other 
langua«es,  by  different  tones,  accents,  v^r  pronnnciation, 
some  of  whicii  were  shown  in  §  18,  making  in  fact  a  nilfer- 
€nt  word  to  the  car,  though  not  to  the  eye.  The  enun- 
ciation of  some  of  these  tones  and  ;::ccents  ?ire  exceeding- 
ly difficult  for  an  adult  foreigner  ever  to  obtain. 

§.  39.  As  might  be  expected,  where  the  letters  arc  >o 
few,  and  their  combinations  into  syllables  and  words  so 
regular,  the  language,  to  foreign  ears  is  very  monoton- 
ous. The  guttural  sounds  are  frequent,  for  many  vowel 
sounds  come  together  which  do  not  form  diphthongs. 

^  40.  In  Hawaiian  there  is  a  j^'reat  want  of  generic 
terms,  as  is  the  case  with  all  uncultivated  languages. 
No  people  have  use  for  generic  terms  until  they  begin  to 
reason;  and  the  language  shows  that  the  Hawaiians  have 
never  been  a  reasoning  peojile.  They  have  been  better 
warriors  and  poets,  than  philosophers  and  statesmen. 
Their  language,  however,  richly  abounds  in  specific  names 
and  epithets. 

OF  ACCENTS. 

§  41.  The  general  law  of  the  language  is,  that  the  ac- 
cent should  fall  upon  the  })enult,  that  is,  the  last  syllable 
but  one  in  a  woi-d.  The  exceptions  to  this  rule  are  some- 
what numerous,  but  will  occasion  no  great  difficulty  to 
the  learner,  a  few  lemarks  only  will  be  made  on  accf  nr. 


JNJoTE. — 111  countiiii^    two  (Josely    wiilten  foolscap    pages,  inett*. 

\vere  found  117  dittereiil  words  of  more  than  one  syllable;  as  fol- 
lows, 

Of  words  of  two  syllables  aeeenttd  ctn  the  penult,  49 

—  —     of  two  sUliiblr.s  accented  on  f he  nltiina,  ^? 

—  —  of  three  syllables  accented  on  the  pectdt,  40 
i —  .^^  of  three  syllables  at'cesited  on  tiie  ante  penult,  4 
Of  wciirds  of  three  syil-i'dps  accented  oii  the  ultima,  '2 

—  —  —  four  syl!a})les  accented  oh  the  penult,  1' 
— ■     — 5     — ••     two   sviiabies  accented  equuUy  on  both 

syllables,  [i.  e.  spondees.]  4 

§  42.  Mariy  persons,  on  arriving  at  the  Islands,  trea( 
the  language  as  though  the  words  were  accented  on  the 
last  syllable,  which  is  a  great  mistake;  comparatively  tew 
of  the  words  are  so  accented.  Capt.  Cook  very  natural- 
ly used  English  orthography  in  spelling  the  names  of 
j)laces  and  of  persons  at  the  islands,  and  this  favors  the 
appearance  of  the  accent  on  the  last  syllable;  thus  Woa- 
hoo,  Owhyhee,  for  Oihu,   Hawaii. 

<^  43.     Some  words  of  die  same  letters  and  syllables  by 
change  t)f  accent,  change  the  meaning  of  the  word;     thus. 
ma-ln-md,  a  month.        in}- la-ma,  take  heed,  take  care. 
ka-n'}-ka,  a  man.  k}-na-ka,  men  in  general,  people. 

u-ka,  a  shadow.  a-k^,  but,  a  conjunction. 

§  44.  Accent  is  frequently  thrown  forward  mostly  by 
the  insertion  of  the  euphonic  syllable  la. 

1st.  After  the  vel'bal  directive  (■kir,  as,  I  oku  au 
ia  ia,  1  said  to  him;  if  the  particle  la  follow  r?ku  the  ac^ 
cent  is  thrown  on  to  the  laat  syllable  and  it  becoms  ak//; 
thus  1  ūku  la  aU  ia  ia.  The  theory  is  that  la  when  used, 
is  united  with  akii  and  thus  to  keep  the  pronunciation  on 
the  penult,  the  accent  must  be  thrown  forward. 

2nd.  The  same  observations  aj;ply  to  the  verbal 
directive  Iho;  thus,  w^aiho  ?ho  oia  i  ka  nkana,  he  laid- 
down  the  load;  if  the  la  be  used,  the  accent  is  thus,  wai- 
ho  ihr)  la  oia  i  ka  ukana. 

3rd.  The  same  applies  to  nouns  and  pronouns, 
where  /a  makes  a  part  of  the  demonstrative  adjective 
pfonoun,  ait — la;   thus,  ke  pac  mai  nci  ka  moku,  the.  ship 


01"     UCllNfs.  2f 

pomes  to  anclioi'.      Ko  p:ie   mai  iw]  an  mofv  '  h,  tfiut  shij) 
comes  to  anchor. 

4th.  The  particle  he  before  a  word  with  /,/  jii'for  it,  lias 
the  same  etlect;  thus,  he  —  la',  me  /ic  hiilii  h.'pa,  like  wool; 
with  la  the  accent  is  tlirown  Ibrvrard,  as  nie  he  hulu  hipri  la. 

5th.   When    an    adjective    follows  a    noUn    having    the 
demonstrative  adjective   pronoun  [see   3rd  J  iia  —  /o,   the 
last  syllable  of  the  adjective  before  la   takes   the    accent; 
thus,   no  ka  uuku  o  ka  poe  kanaka  k.'u,  for  the  fewness  of 
the  spies;   no  ka  uuku  o  ua  poe  kanaka  ki//  la. 

It  may  be  observed  that  some  writers  and  some  speak- 
ers use  the  particle  la  much  more  than  others,  and  hence 
the  accent  is  varied  more  by  some  than  others. 

§  45.  As  the  Hawaiian  books  have  been  printed  al- 
most entirely  for  the  use  of  Hawaiians;  it  has  not  been 
thought  necessary  to  use  any  marks  lor  accents,  but  if 
they  should  be  used  by  tho.-?e  who  wish  to  acquire  the 
language,  it  would  be  very  convenient  iur  ^uv.li  to  have 
certain  classes  of  worda  accented. 

OF  LETTERS  DROPPED. 

§  46.  Hawaiians  are  fond  of  abbreviation*^,  particular- 
ly the  initials  of  proper  names.  Many,  however,  do  not 
Understand  the  meaning  of  M-.  in  English,  '''hey  often 
Write  it  Ml,  sometimes  Mik;  if  the  proper  name  begin 
with  k  or  a  voivcL  They  not  unfrequently  prefix  it  to  the 
proper  name;  as  Mikelaka,  for  l\īr.  Clark,  jMikanalu,  for 
Mr.  Andrews. 

§  47.  In  writing,  a  vowel  is  frequently  dropped  fi-om 
the  beginning  of  a  word  when  the  preceeding  one  termi- 
nated with  the  same  letter;   thun, 

naHii,  the  chieis,  lor  na  alii. 

i  kona  hele  arta'kii,  on  his  f^owvj,  forth,  for  /  kona  hele  ana  aku, 

oia  kana  i  hana'i,     that  is  what  he  did,  for  oia  kana  i  hana  at. 

In  pronouncing,  one  of  the  vowels  very  nearly  coales- 
ces with  the  other. 

The  prefix  pronouns,  and  indeed  all  the  pronouns  of  the 
first  person  drop  a  letter  in  the  same  way.  Thus  o'u,  a'u, 
of  me,  mine;    ko*u,  ka'u,  my;   no'n,  na'u,  for  me.      Hut  al! 


22  OF  T.KTTnR^  ivsKirrrT). 

lhe«e  ciises  nre    marked  oi-    should  be  by  an   nphostropbc 
{is  ill  the  ;dK)ve  examples. 

OF  LETTERS  INSERTED. 

§  43.  Letters  are  someuhnt  frequentl}'  inserted  in  the 
middle  ofn  word;  niest.  if  not  all,  Bppai-enily  for  tiie  sake 
of  euphony;  thus,  pouhia,  for  jjauia;  fnakdvl/a,  for  ma- 
kauia;    aulndl/iia,  for  auhuliia. 

Some  of  these  no  (!oii!>t  are  mere  \  ulixmisnis;  as.  lokiJii  fov  lo'iJd. 

§  49.  It  will  appear  from  the  foregoino-  that  spelliri.i; 
the  lan;^uage  and  |)r()nouncing  it  (exeept  the  nice  shacies , 
peculiar  to  native  intonation)  are  not  diflicull.  h!aving 
become  familial-  with  tlie  vowel  sounds,  and  witli  (he  gen- 
rral  rule  of  aeeent  as  slated  in  §  6,  and  §  41 — tht;  whole 
can  ea."sily  be  leai'ned. 

'^  50.  There  are  no  unsounded  or  useless  letters, 
if  we  except  ihe  letter  to  in  a  i'vw  cases.  See  >S  13,  7(h, 
and  Note. 

^  b] .  The  use  ofCajiital.s  and  pauses  in  writing  so 
generally  follows  the  custom  (,>f  English  rules,  thiit  a  de- 
tail is  not  thought  necessary. 


Part  II.— of  ETYMOLOGY. 

§  52.  Eiymology  is  that  part  of  gramnuir  which  treats 
of  words,— their  diiferent  classes— theii-  use — tlieir  rela- 
tions to  each  other  and  the  external  changes  they  under- 
go, if  anj-,  in  order  to  fit  them  into  sentences  so  as  to  ex- 
press clearly  the  ideas  of  the  speaker  or  vvi-iter.  'i'hese 
words,  divided  iiilo  different  classes,  will  be  considered 
s<epurately  a,s  they  arise.  The  difierent  classes  of  words 
ij>ed  in  a  language,  are  termed  Parts  of  Speech.  'J'he 
parts  of  speech  will  be  found  to  dilfer  from  those  of  the 
cultivateil  languages  of  Europe,  and  some  will  be  i'ownd  for 
v'hirJi  (here  are  no  names.  To  these,  names  niust  Ijc 
given  according  to  their  oHJce,  or  relation  to  other 
«orils. 


ni'    VVi  \  YV  (»'.  ^ 


OK  'I'iir:  ()  i:mi'ii.\'1'k 


1^  53.  The  0  em|)h;itic  is  uscA  helore  nouns  proper 
jind  comou  aiul  pronouns,  in  all  the  numbers,  singular, 
dual  and  plural.  Tliere  is  no  [)art  of  speech  corrcspond- 
inoj  to  it  in  the  Kuropean  lani;uages.  It  is  a  distinct  p«rt 
ot" speech  tVom  the  u  as  a  noun  or  veib  or  conjuncfioii 
or  any  other  pa*  t  of  speech.  In  translalinjj;,  it  has  no 
word  into  which  it  cati  be  traiislated.  It  is,  however,  of 
great  use  in  Hawaiian  for  the  two  purposes  v{c7anh(isis  h\h\ 
euphonjj.  It  generally  stands  iuiinediately  before  the 
word  denoting  the  subject,  or  in  Knglish,  the  Nominative 
case.     To  this  there  are  some  exce[)tions. 

A  few  examples  will  be  given  of  the  maimer  in  which 
it  is  used;  but  neither  (lie  emphasis  nor  euphony  can  ap- 
pear in  detached  sentences. 

NoTK. — For  the  Rule  respecting  its  use  see  Syntax. 

§  54.     1st.  The  o  emphatic  is  prefixed  to  pro[)er  names 
of  persons,  places  or  individual  things;   thus, 
Holo  aku  la  o  Lono,  Lono  sailed  away, 

ola  ae  la  o  Aikake,  Aikake  was  saved, 

a  ike  ae  la  o  Papa  ia  ia.  and  when  Papa  saw  liini. 

o  Mokuohai  ka  iiioa  o  ia  kaua,  Mokuoliai  was  the  name  of  that  battle, 
make  o  Kahekili  ma  Oalni,        Kaliekiii  died  at  Oalui. 
alaila,  inalu  o  Maui,  then,  Maui  will  be  in  peace. 

2nd.  The  o  empathic  stands  before  common  nouns. 
Here  the  article  stands  between  the  o  emphatic  and  the 
noun;    thus, 

aka,  o  ka  ne.i  o  ka  auvvria,  but  the  great  part  (^f  the  canoe  fleet, 

o  ka  hiku  keia  o  ka  iiolo  ana,  this  was  the  seventh  time  of  his  sail- 

o  ka  mnlu,  the  [)eace  [state  of  peace.]  [ini^. 
o  ka  haipule  ka  mea  kui  ka  moku.  piety  is  what  establishes  a  land. 
0  na'lii  aia,  he  ilihune,  ungodly  chiefs  are  f)oor. 

o  iia  aina  ia'u  [)onoi,  the  land  r(>ally  mine, 

o  kekahi  poe  haole,  certain   foreigners. 

3rd.  The  o  emphatic  stands  before  personal  pronouns. 
Generally  there  is  no  word  between  the  o  emphatic  and 
the  pronoun. 

o  wail  no  kou  alii,  1  am  your  chief. 

o  oe  no  ka'n  i  kii  mai  nei.  you  arc  the  i>ers()n  Ī  came  fur. 

upela  nuuia  i  luina  "i,  and  so  also  he  diil. 


'24.  I'F    THE    ARTlCLll'S. 

<o  nluii  \m  liele,  o  wau  ke  iioho,  you  two  go,  I  stay. 

o  laua  no  iia  niea  iiui,  they  two  vv^re  the  principle  persons. 

>o  niakoii  ka  poe  niaJiliini,  we  are  strangers. 

o  kakoii  pu  kekahs,  ive  also  are  a  part. 

lO  wai  ko  kiiia  Jiica  I  hewa?  wlio  of  the  two  was  wrong? 

NoTK. —  The  o  oi"  the  third  person  singular  ia  of  tlie  pronoun,  and 
tlie  0  of  tlie  intcrrog-itive  ivai  aye  in  printing  generally  united,  but 
iin  theory  arc  separate. 

4th.  The  o  eiiipiiatic  is  separated  from  its  noun,  when 
h  has  a  j)rerix  [adjective]  pronoun  before  it;   thus, 

>o  kun  kaikaiiia,  iny  )oijng<cr  brother. 

■0  ko'u  make  'kamalii  no  keia,  this  is  my  <lying  in  youth. 

o  kou  aina  ia,  that  is  thy  land. 

<o  kona  hie  no  ia  i  ka  |)a]e,        that  was  his  leaf)ing  the  precipieie. 

o  ko  makou  hale  k«  hiolo,        it  was  our  house  that  fell. 

The  prefix  pronouns  in  general  take  th-e  place  of  the 
article.  The  o  belongs  to  kaikaina,  make,  aina,  lele  and 
Jiale. 

5th.  Other  qualifying  words  may  somtimes  come  iii  and 
separate  the  o  emphatic  fr-oui  the  noun  to  which  it  belongs; 
thus, 

o  ko  Hawaii  en^mi  laui  ia,         that  is  Hawaii's  great  enemy. 
o  ko  laila  poe  a'.ii,  the  chiefs  of  that  place. 

<o  keia  mau  mea  ka'u  <e  imi,        these  are  the  things  I  seek. 

Note. —  The  ^  emphatic  is  not  always  used.  ?n  many  oases  it 
is  used  where  neither  eni[)hasif3  nor  euphony  is  very  apparent. 

OF  THE  ARTICLES. 

§  55  The  Hawaiian  language  has  seven  words  which 
:stand  before  common  nouns  to  express  some  modification, 
■or  have  some  inlluence  on  their  meaning:  and  hence  may 
he  termed  Articles.  Proj)er  names,  as  such,  do  not  take 
rartieles;  unless  they  become  amalgamated  with  them^  and 
ihen  they  lose  their  di'Stinctive  meaning  as,  AV/abumanu, 
lit,  ///.e  bird  mantle,  i;^f/meha'meha,  ilie  desolate,  Aamana- 
wa  /Ac  time,  Kaiiuwā'],  the  watercourse,  JTrkapa,  the  cloth. 

§  56.  The  proper  name  Akua,  used  for  the  true  God, 
retain*  the  article  a«  it  was  formerly  not  a  proper  name, 
ibut  a  common  one.  The  word  Lord  meaning  Jehovah  ia 
Ktiglish  still  takes  the  article,  because  Joj'merly  it  was 
noit  a  j)roper  jiame. 


OF  TfTE  V  nViri  i>.  25 

§  57.  It  must  not  he  underslood  thf<t  article  mu?t  cor- 
respond to  article  in  ti'unslatiniif  Irom  one  languii^e  to 
another.  Articles  are  oiten  used  in  Hawaiian  where  they 
must  be  left  out  in  translating  into  English  or  other  lan- 
guages, and  vice  verso,;  the-  idiom  of  the  two  languages 
must  be  taken  into  the  account.  ^^ 

■  §  58.  The  words  used  rs  Articles  are  ka,  ke,  he,  wahi^ 
kahiy  kekahi  and  na.  They  may  be  divided  into  three 
jC  I  asses,  viz. 

1st.     Definite,  as  ka,  ke. 

2d.  Stmi-defijiiif:,  that  is,  definite,  iis  to  a  class  of  sub- 
jects, but  indifijiite  as  to  individuals;  as  ivahi^  kahi,  keka- 
hi, and  perhaps  hookc:hi. 

3d.  Indefinite,  as  he.  Na  is  used  as  a  plural  article, 
.a,nd  more  or  less  as  a  plural  article  for  all  the  others. 

OF  THE  DEFINITE  ARTICLES  ka  and  ke. 

§  59.  Ka  and  ke  are  the  same  Article  as  far  as  the 
meaning  is  concerned,  and  answer  to  the  English  Defi- 
nite Article  the,  where  the  idioms  of  the  two  language» 
will  allow.  They  take  the  different  forms  ka  and  ke  in 
order  to  adapt  themselves  to  the  fiist  letter  of  the  ibl'ow- 
ing  noun  or  word  that  comes  between  them  and  the  noun; 
as  ka  h-d]e,  ^^e  house;  ke  kino,  the  body.  To  say  ka  kino, 
ka  koko.  &:c.,  creates  a  hiatus  not  pleasant  to  the  ear  of 
a  Hawaiian;   hence  the  change  oi'  a  into  e. 

§  60,  The  following  rules  and  examples  will  show 
where  the  two  articles  ka  and  ke  are  to  be  used. 

1st.  Nouns  whose  first  letter  is  a  have  both  ka  and  ke 
for  articles;  that  is,  some  nouns  beginning  with  a,  take  ka 
and  some  take  ke.  '  This  can  be  learned  only  by  practice. 
Very  few  nouns  take  both;  unless  the  word  has  a  radi- 
cally difl'erent  meaning,  in  which  case  it  is  really  a  ditler 
ent  word;  thus,  kaaho,  the  name  of  sticks  used  in  thatch- 
ing; ke  aho,  the  breath,  &.c.  Probably  nioie  nouns  be- 
o;inning  with  a  take  ka  for  their  article  than  take  Ar;   as, 

ka  awa,  tlic  plant  iiwo.  Ac  aiii.  the  fire. 

Ac  awa,  the  liarl»nr.  I.a  aina,  the  Ian. I. 

ka  apu.  the  cup.  Ac  auo,  the  loini . 

ka  aa,  the  buniuiL;  lin  f,,i  ;iio,   Ific  .l.-l-ioi 

1 


26  Of    THE    AKTIC1.ES. 

ke  ala,  the  road.  ke  a<>,  the  dawn, 

ka  ai,  //le  food.  ka  aaliu,  //jc  gatniciit. 

ka  ae,  //te  consent.  fca  auao,  the  side. 

2cl.  Nouns  beginning  with  the  letter  e  have  ka  for  the 
article;   as, 

fea  elm,  fAe  pain.  ka  elelu,  the  cockroach. 

jfca  elele,  the  messenger.  ka  elemakule,  the  old  man. 

ka  eke,  the  hag.  ka  eho,  the  stone  idol. 

Exceptions  ;  ke  ea  the  life,  ?Ag  breath;  as  on  the  national  escutch- 
eon, ua  mau  ke  ea  o  ka  aina  i  ka  pono,  the  breath  of  the  land  is 
continued  by  righteousness.  Emi,  a  sctthng  down,  has  both  forms 
ka  emi  and  ke  enii.     The  latter  form  is  seldom  found. 

3d.  Nouns  beginning  with  the  letter  i  have  ku  for  their 
article;   as, 

ka  ili,  the  skm.  ka  ilio.  the  dog. 

ka  ike,  the  knowledge.  ka  ilo,  the  worm. 

ka  ino,  the  evil.  ka  ipu,  the  cup. 

ka  inoa,  the  name.  ka  imu,  the  oven. 

4th.    Some  nouns  beginning  with  o  take  ka,  others  take 

ke  for  their  article.  The  same  remarks  apply  to  o  that 
applied  to  a;   as, 

ka  ohu,  the  fog.  A;e  ola,  /Vie  life,  escape, 

ka  opu,  </ie  belly.  ke  one,  f/^e  sand. 

ka  olelo,  ^Afi  word.  Ae  oho,  the  hair. 

/ea  olioli,  the  joy.  fee  o,  i/ie  sharp  instrument. 

5th.  Nouns  whose  first  letter  is  u  take  ka  for  their  arti- 
cle;  as, 

ka  uku,  the  reward,  ka  uila,  the  lightning. 

ka  uwe,  the  crying,  *  ka  uhane,  the  soul. 

ka  ua,  the  rain,  fert  ukana,  f/;e  baggage. 

ka  umu,  Me  oven,  ka  upena,  the  fish  net. 

6th.  Nouns  beginning  with  any  of  the  Hawaiian  Con- 
sonants, except  k,  as  a  general  rule  take  ka  for  the  arti- 
cle;  as, 

ka  hale,  the  house.  ka  niho,  the  tooth. 

ka  la,  the  sun,  the  day.  fea  papa,  i/te  board. 

ka  maka,  Me  face.  ka  wai,  //le  water. 

Exceptions  ;  these  refer  mostly  to  the  letter  }) ;  thus, 

ke  pio,  the  prisoner.  ke  poi,  the  cover. 

ke  pihe,  the  button.  ke  pa,  //le  plate. 

he  poo,  //ie  head.  ke  pai,  i//e  striking,  punishment. 


i'i'   i'lfK  AKTh'i.r:s.  27 

ke  poliiio,  kc  pelii, 

ki'  pioloke,  lltc  c.vcitcinciit.       ke  piilii,  Ihe  smoking. 

ke  palaie,  ke  pao,  the  aicli,  cavern. 

There  are  a  few  words  heuinning  vviilj  m  which  take  ke ;  thus, 
ke  mele,  the  song.  The  word  not,  a  request,  has  both  ka  and  ke ; 
as  ka  noi,  the  request ;  ke  nol,  the  re(}ue.st. 

7th.     All  nouns  whose  first  letter  is  k,  take  kc  for  their 
article.     To  this  no  exception  is  known;   thus, 
ke  kahu,  the  nurse.  ke  koko,  the  blood. 

ke  keko,  the  dwarf.  ke  kuniu,  the  foundation. 

ke  kino,  the  body,  jK^rson.  ke  kai,  the  sea. 

ke  kaa,  the  wheel.  ke  kuhi,  the  drop. 

§  61.  1st.  Nouns  whose  first  letter  is  a  foreign  consonant, 
(such  nouns,  of  course  are  foreign  words,)  take  ka  or  ke  oi- 
both,  as  the  natives  succeed  in  assimilating  the  pronunci- 
ation to  the  k  sound,  or  to  that  of  some  of  the  other  Ha- 
waiian consonants;  thus  to  the  words  berena,  bread,  buke, 
book,  a  native  would  prefix  the  article  ka  not  ke;  because, 
even  if  he  should  pronounce  it  as  \[  \vy\tiQi~i  p'lrena,  puke^ 
still,  the  article  would  naturally  be  ka.  See  §  14,  B. 
Nouns  begianing  with  /;  therefore  take  ka. 

2d.  Nouns  beginning  with  d,  generally  take  kc,  be- 
cause they  pronounce  it  more  like  /r,  as  in  dia,  daht. 
See  §  14, 'D. 

3d.     Nouns  beginning  with/ take  ha,  as  ka  fiku,  the  fig 

4th  Nouns  beginning  with  ir,  generally  take  ke,  be- 
cause it  is  easily  assimilated  with  k,  as  ke  gula,  the  gold. 
See  §  14,  G. 

5th.  Nouns  commencing  with  r,  take  ka,  as  ka  ropi, 
^Ae  thread;  the  sound  easily  riuis  into  the  /  sound.  See 
§  14,  R. 

6th.  Nouns  commencing  with  the  letter  s,  take  ke,  as 
ke  sopa,  the  soap;  pronounced  hy  common  natives  ke  ko- 
pa,  the  sibilant  turned  into  a  guttural.     See  §  14,  S. 

7th.  Nouns  commencing  with  /,  take  ke,  for  the  reason 
that  it  is  easily  run  into  the  k  sound.     See  §  14,  T. 

8.  Nouns  commencing  with  v,  lake  ka,  because  it  is 
easily  run  into  the  sound  of?/;,  as  ka  vinega,  t/ir  vinegar 


2b  i)i'  tP.F.  AtrncLrs. 

9th.  Nouns  beijjinning  with  r,  tuke  ke,  beciusxJ  they 
give  it  the  k  sound. 

§  62.  It  should  be  kept  in  mind  that  all  these  princi- 
ples are  not  fully  settled  in  practice.  Tliose  natives  who 
have  been  taught  to  pronounce  the  foreign  consonants  in 
a  good  degree  a^  foreigners  do,  would  instinctively  give 
the  article  ka  to  almost  all  the  foreign  words;  but  as  they 
are  generally  pronounced,  they  change  the  article  to  suit 
the  sound  of  the  first  letter  of  the  noun;  that  is,  as  their 
ears  catch  it.  [They  are  not  nice  about  consonants.]  It 
.is  to  be  hoped  that  the  organs  of  hearing  and  of  speech 
among  the  Hawaiians  may  improve,  and  efforts  should  be 
made  to  that  effect.  To  introduce  foreign  letters  and 
'still  pronounce  them  lil^e  those  they  ah"eady  have,  will 
add  nothing  to  the  ear,  while  it  perplexes  the  eye. 

OF  THE  SEMIDEFINiTE  ARTICLES. 

§  63.  These  articles  are  icahi,  kalii,  /cekahi  3ind  hookah) ; 
in  their  use,  they  are  generally  definite  as  they  relate  to 
classes  of  subjects  but  indefinite  as  to  individuals.  In  Eng- 
lish we  have  bat  i'<iw  words  wdiich  correspond  wdth  them. 

§  64.  īria/i/ sigiiifies  50??ze;  as,  icahi  raea,  some  thing. — 
The  radical  idea  of  lualii  seems  to  be  sotne,  :is  applied  to 
quantity;  a  /////<?,  in  opposition  to  a  great  quantity;   thus, 

Eia  ko'u  wahi  manao,  lit.  Hero  is  my  sojne  tliougiit,  an  idea  or 
Iwo,  a  few  oxorcssioii-;. 

IVahiii'i  iki,  some  liftlo  foot!,  or  little  foo(i. 

fVahi  laau,  some  tiinbor. 

Knn  loahi  hale,  my  something  of  a  house. 

E  kuai  i  wahi  ai  iki  na  kakou,  buy  some  little  food  for  us 

Wahi  is  freqilently  preceeded  by  he  the  indefinite  arti- 
cle; making  a  kind  of  compound  article,  as,  he  wahi  ma- 
nao  ko'u,  I  have  some  thought,  or  I  have  a  thought.  He 
moku,  he  wahi  kia  kahi,  a  ship,  a  some  thing  of  one  mast; 
or  a  ship,  a  one  masted  thing. 

Wahi  is  sometimes  preceeded  by  k:ui:,  as,  ua  hoopauia 
kmi  wahi  o  ke  kanawai,  some  part  of  the  la\v  is  abolished; 
i  ka  loaa  ana  o  kau  u'ahi^Lhi\<\,  on  receivin.'?  some  moi'iey. 
This  again  is  now  and  then  preceeded  by  the  definite  arti- 
cle J;e,  and  we  have   the  form  /ce  laiu  wahi,  a  three  fold  ar- 


Or  fiiK  ARTirr.l'.s,  29 

ficie  oi'.  ai'ticles  before  a  noun,  but  for  what  purpose  it  is 
(lilliciilt  to  say,  we  have  nothing  e<:{uivalcnt  in  English. 

fVahi  is  sometimes,  not  often,  proceeded  by  the  plural 
article  ??«;  as,  na  wahi  kanaka,  some  people. 

Wahi,  it  will  be  seen,  has  no  corresponding  word  in 
English;  hence,  in  niiiny  places,  though  good  in  Hawaiian 
it  has  no  meaning  in  English, 

§  65.  KatiIj  kekaiii  and  iiookaiii. —  1st.  Kahi  signi- 
fies one,  similar  to  the  English  article  an.  It  is  the  root 
of  the  other  two;  as  kekahi  is  only  kahi  with  the  article  ke; 
and  hookahi  is  also  kahi  with  the  verbal  causative  prefix. 
These  articles  have  all  the  same  idea  of  oneness  or  indi- 
viduality.    Of  the  use  oHcahi, 

llolo  vvixlo  lakou  a  loaa  k^Jii  aina. 

They  sailed  without  objert  and  f'oLtnd  a  certain  land. 

E  nioe  kahi  papa  i  ka  po. 

Let  one  division  sleep  at  nii^ht. 

E  ala  kahi  papa  e  kiai. 

tjCt  one  division  ho  awake  to  watch. 

Malaila  me  kahi  moku  kia  kahi  unka. 

« 

Tiiere  with  a  suiali  one  ni.ssU'l  ;-ihip. 

Eia  na  inoa  o  kahi  niau  uu  a  o  lakou. 

Here  are  the  names  of  certain  persons  of  theai. 

Kahi  kumiij  a  reason,  one  reason,  some  reason. 

Kahi  kumn,  a  teacher  one  teacher. 

Eia  kahi  hevva  hou  o  keia  vva,  Here  is  a  new  evil  of  this  ap(c. 

NoTK.  —  Kahi,  kekahi,  nnd  hookahi  nic  hcve  spoken  of  as  arti- 
cles and  as  such  arc  prefixed  to  nouns,  hut  thev  arc  found  in  other 
positions  and  used  a^  other  parts  of  speech. 

2nd.  Of  kei^aht.— This  article  is  used  more  frequent- 
ly than  kahi,  the  article  ke  prefixed  gives  it  more  indivitl- 
iiality.  As  an  article,  it  signifies  a,  an,  one,  another,  some 
one  of,  a  certain  one,  &c.;  it  stands  before  the  dual  or  })lu- 
ral;  the  nouns  to  which  it  bcloni's  beino;  reiuitu-cd  dual  or 
plural  by  prefixing  mau  ov  poe;    thus, 

I  kekahi  vva,  upon  a  certain  tmje. 

Kekahi  wahinc,  a  certain  woman,  a  woman. 

0  kelwJii  poe  noonoo,     0[  tJioae  thinking  j)erst)ns. 

1  ke  kaua  ana  o  keka'ii  aina  in(>  kekahi  aina. 
\n   Ihe  flighting  of  our  land  with  anoiticr  land. 


30  *  UF  Tiii:  AU'i'icLES. 

Pae  wale  aku  kekahi.ū'mn,     Went  ashore  on  a  ccrtaiii  laiul. 

Ua  ikeia  kekaki  niokii  jiuikai  lilo. 

A  vessel  was  seen  tar  oil'  at  sea. 

Ka  ill  ana  o  kekahi  moku,     The  stranding  of  a  certain  ship. 

Kena  ae  la  na'lii  i  kekahi  niau  kanaka. 

The  chiefs  sent  tor  certain  men. 

Kekahi  when  followed  by  anotiier  kekahi  has  the  meaning  o[  one 
• — the  other  or  one  —  another;  as,  olelo  ae  la  kekahi  i  kekahi,  one 
spake  to  the  other.  But  in  such  cases  it  is  used  rather  us  an  adjec- 
tive pronoun. 

3rd.  Of  hookaiii. —  This  is  the  same  word  with  icahi, 
having  the  causative  prefix  koo,  causing  one,  and  is  gener- 
ally equivalent  in  meaning  to  one,  one  onbj,  o?ie  single  one; 
thus, 

Hookahi  kupuna,  one  only  ancestor,     i.  e.  the  same  ancestor. 

Hookahi  lahuikanaka  nianiua,  one  nation  before,  i.  e.  only  one. 

Hookahi  puaa,  hookahi  pauku  kakaki. 

One  hog  for  one  bit  of  iron  hoop. 

Noho  alii  o  Kaniehameha  ma  Oahu  i  hookahi  maknhiki. 

Kamehameha  reigned  one  year  at  Oahu. 

ttuipuia  keia  pae  aina,e  Kamehameha  i  hookahi  anpuni. 

These  islands  were  uiiited  by  Kamehameha  into  one  kingdom. 

Though  hookahi  appears  to  have  the  exclusive  idea  of  oneness, 
yet  it  may  often  be  rendered  by  a  or  an.  as  Well  as  one.  Hookahi 
is  also  used  as  an  adjective,  or  an  adjective  pronoun  and  then  its 
place  in  the  sentence  is  altered. 

4th.  Of  kau.— The  word  kmi  prefixed  to  some  words 
resembles  an  article  of  this  class;  as, 

kau  loahi  kaumaha,  some  little  weight. 

kau  v^ahi  mea  uuku,  some  very  small  thing. 

kau  kanaka  ole,  a  place  of  no  people. 

kau  pale,  a  dam,  partition. 

Note. —  The  meaning  of  this  word  is  not  very  apparent. 

§  66.  Of  the  indefinite  article  he. —  1st.  He  is  the 
Hawaiian  Indcjinite  article,  and  in  general,  answers  to  the 
English  article  a  or  an  in  meaning,  where  the  idiom  of  the 
language  will  admit  of  it.  As  an  article,  it  refers  to  only 
one  thing,  and  is  not  used  before  the  plural  unless  ?nnu 
or  poe  comes  between  it  and  the  noun;  bul  the  indefi- 
niteness  still  continues;  thus, 


OF    THi:    AKTKLE.S.  31 

he  olcio,  a  speech.  he  vvm,  a  si'usoii. 

he  alii,  a  cliief.  he  waa,  a  caiioc. 

he  kciki,  a  child.  he  huku,  a  lord. 

Ae  laau,    a  tree.  //e  af)u,  o  cii|). 

he  ia.  rt  flsli.  he  aU\,  a  fire. 

2nd.     He\s  used   befoi'c  the   £)?/«/  ;ind  7'//<?-o/ numbers, 
and  then  it  loses  its  quality  of  oneness.     See  §  66,   1st. 
Before  ?nau. 

Tie  mail  makahiki,  years,  a  few  years. 

he  tuau  hiuai,  Ixiskcts,   some   baske-ts,  a  few, 

he  mau  laau,  t^oiiie  trecfci,  pieces  of  limber. 

he  mau  puiiahcic,  bosom  friends. 

Before  poe. 

he  poe  keiki,  children,  a  company  of  children, 

he  poe  kiu,  a  noni|>any  of  spies. 

he  poe  kauwa,  .servants. 

he  poe  haujnana,  scholars. 

Note. — In  most  cases  of  this  kind,  poe  may  be  rendered  as  a 
noun  signifying  company;  as,  he  poe  keiJii  a  company  of  children. 
See  more  respecting  7nau  and  poe  hereafter. 

3rd.  Mau  und  poe  are  sometimes  [very  seldom]  used' 
together;   as, 

O  Keeaumoku  ka  i  hoouka  aku  i  ko  Kiwalao  man  poe  kaua. 
•It  was  Keeaumokn  that  made  an  attack  upon  Kiwalao's  several 
companies  [bands  of  soldiers.] 

4th.  He  is  used  before  numerals  in  all  cases  between 
ten  and  a  hundred;   as. 

He  unii,  he  iwakalua,  he  kanakolu  kumamalima  kanaka. 
Ten,  twenty,  thirty  five  men. 

5th     He  is  used  before  adjectives  and  then  they   have 
the  idea  of  verbals;   as, 
Eia  ae  na  malihini  he  nui  loa. 
Here  come  strangers  a  great  many. 

6th.  He  is  also  used  for  affirming  any  quality  as  be- 
longing to  a  substance;  as, 

He  lepo  ka  vvai,  the  water  is  muddy. 

§  67.  Of  the  plural  article  na.. — This  article  is 
used  both  definitely  and  indefinately.  When  indefinite, 
it  is  liitle  more  than  a  sign  of  the  plural  number;  or  per- 
haps better  thus;  na  answers  the  double  purpose  of  a 


32  OF    Tllli    ARTICLES. 

plural  yrticle  gxMiei'ail}^  and  also  cis  a  sign  of  the  j)Iuraf 
number;   thus, 

7?«  la,  the  days.  na  liolu!,  i/?e  stars. 

na  luoku,  the  islands.  na  iiimuii,  the  birds. 

na  manawa,  the  times.  na  wahi.  the  places. 

na  aina,  the  lands.  na  lupe,  ihe  kites 

The  following  arc  some  of  the  rules  showing  where  na 
IS  definiie 

1st.  Na  is  definite  when  it  stands  before  the  first  of  two 
nouns  in  regimen,  or  whew  the  last  one  is  in  some  oblique 
icase;    thus, 

Ua  kauia  na  liae  o  ka  ulu  mokii,  Uie  flags  ofi\\e  fieet  were  hoisted. 

Nrt  mca  0  Lono,  th£  things  o/'l.ono. 

A  me  na  mca  o  ka  moku,  and  ihe  things  of  the  ship. 

Ua  uhiia  na  mauna  &  Hawaii  i  ka  hau. 

The  mountains  of  Hawaii  were  covered  with  snow. 

2nd.    Na  is  definite  when  followed  by  art  adjective  iim- 
iting  th«  sense  to  the  things  mentioned;   as, 
Aole  i  kakauia  na  niea  kahiko. 
The  ancient  events  were  not  recorded. 
I  paiia'i  ma  na  palapala^^oo/e,  written  in  the  books  of 'oreigners. 

0  na  aina  e,  he  moku  wale  no,  the  other  lands  were  only  islands. 

3d.  Na  is  definite  when  followed  by  a  numeral  mark- 
ing a  particular  number;   as, 

1  na  la  ekolu,  within  the  three  days 

Lawe  mai  oia  i  «a  dala  elua,  he  brought  the  tivo  dollars, 

4th.  Na  is  rendered  definite  by  an  adverb  of  place  loi- 
iowing  and  limiting  the  sense;   as, 

Ike  ae  la  na  kanaka  mauka,  the  peojjje  inland  saw. 

O  ka  moku  a  me  na  mea  maluna  o  ke  kia. 

The  ship  and  the  things  on  the  mast. 

Makau  na  kanaka  oloko,  ths  people  7vithin  were  afraid. 

5th.  Na  is  definite  sometimes  when  followed  by  an  ex- 
planatory clause;  as, 

No  na  laau  hau  i  pal  mun  mai. 

On  account  oi'  Ifie  limbers  hill  of  iron  which  before  had  Jloaied 
Mshore. 

A  me  na  pukae  hamama  mai  ana.  nnd  llic  doors  bewigopcn  widr. 
Kctm  ae  la  i  na  kanaka,  lie  man  aihiie. 
lie  sent  lor  the  men,  they  were  thieves. 


()th.  When  an  address  is  made  to  n  numhor,  ?in  is  nsod 
definitely;  as, 

E  na  kanaka  a  me  na  'lii.  ye  ni(^n  and  yo.  chiefs. 

E  na  lianniana  o  ke  kulanni,     yo  scholars  <>}"  the  seminarv. 

E  na  kuinu  o  Hawaii,  ye  teachers  of  Hawaii. 

7th.      The  sense  of  the  passa^^c  (.»ften  re(|uir{,^s  na  to  he 
rendered  as  a  definite  article;   as, 
Ae  n)ai  la  na  alii,  the  chiefs  consented. 
Manao  ae  la  na  kanaka  ua  laweia  oia. 
T/ie  people  thoui!,ht  that  he  was  taken  away. 
Hookani  aku  la  na  kanaka,  [)enei,  the  peoj^le  cried  out,  thus. 

8th.  Na  as  an  article  is  very  often  used  indcjinitdy  or 
simply  to  mark  the  plural  number.  It  then  becomes  one 
of  the  signs  of  tlie  plural;    which  see  after  §  87. 

9th.  Na  is  sometimes  [but  seldom]  used  before  irahi; 
as,  lele  ae  la  na  waki  kanaka  iuka,  thefeiv  people  jumped 
ashore. 

10th.  Several  nouns  in  the  language  of  common  use 
never  take  any  article;  as,  kinohi,  tvahi,  urdess  kau  be 
its  article  and  others,  as  kahi,  a  place,  &c. 

11th.  The  articles  are  often  omitted  in  practice,  for  the 
reason  of  which,  see  Syntax. 

Note. — Some  of  the  foregoing  distinctions  are  of  no  great  prac- 
tical value.     The  structure  of  the  sentence  must  determine. 

OF  THE  SIMPLE  PREPOSITIONS. 

§  68.  The  following  syllables;  viz.  a,  o,  ka,  ko,  na, 
no,  i,  ma,  me,  e  and  mai  may  be  called  simplp  prepositions. 
They  are  used  in  declining  nouns,  pronouns,  compound 
prepositions  and  adverbs  of  place.  They  have  all  the 
uses  that  pre[)Ositions  have  in  ancient  or  modern  lan- 
guages, i.  e.  to  show  a  connection  and  relation  between 
other  words.  They  may  be  termed  Simple  Prepositions  in 
distinction  from  the  same  syllables  when  connected  either 
by  orthography  or  sense  with  other  words;  and  hence  de- 
nominated Compound  Prepositions.  The  following  are 
specimens  of  their  use, 

Ka  oihana  «  ke  kahuna,  the  office  oj  the  priest. 

Ka  leo  o  ke  alii,  the  voice  of  the  chief. 

Ka  ke  alii  kauoha,  the  king's  charge. 

Ko  iliuraii  poe  kaitaka.  Hawaii's  peo^ile. 


No  k»'  !\«jim!  kii  (ik'isi.  it  is  for  ilu;  Icaclirr  \n  ^[)e^k: 

Aō  kc  iJjolowa  0  kiUitikH. 

Jt^or  [on  aec»»!]Hi  oij  the  iiulnlence  ol  itieu. 

/koiia  lioliDHua  i««  Kotiiila.       on  his  living  o/  Kohain. 

E  i;o'  i!i  !j(  no  itku  i  ke  aiiju:)!!,  to  tia  .sfer  the  kintdc  ni. 

Hojo  HKii  ia  m'.i  ka  waa.  iie  sailed  by  [means  of]  canoe. 

iJana  pn  Ifikou.riJf.  ifj;  they  worked  tn2;ether  with  him. 

ICipakiiia'o  la  t  r;»'!»!,  he  nas  forced  away  hy  the  chiefV;; 

Hf)i  nmi  la  ia  rnai  Kawijihae  iiiai,  he  ielurhed /'yo?w  Kawaihae. 

As  these  pr^noi^itioMS  will  be  more  particularly  spoken  of 
in  connection  witii  the  declension  of  nouns  and  pronouns, 
the  followins:  general  remarks  only  will  be  inserted  here. 

^69.  1st.  The  simple .  ptepvs'fliohs  serve  to  connect 
words  of  phrases  with  ench  other  and  show  the  relations 
0Ī' posses-s-ion.  dvhj,  obligutio7i,  cause,  itumner,  i?istfim,enf  and 
place.  •'■'    ■'■'  ■     •••' 

2nd.  They  also  serve  the  purposeof  declining  nouns,  and 
particularly  pronouns;  many  of  the  ideas  of  which  in  Eng- 
lish are  expressed  by  the  verb  to  he,  and  other  auxiliary 
verbs. 

3rd.  A  and  o;  ka  and  ko\  nd  and  r?o  bear  a  close  re- 
semblance to  each  oth»r.  That  is,  all  that  cla,*:S  of  rela- 
tions that  would  require  a  to  be  used,  would  also  require 
hi  and  na^  (provided  the  sense  required  their  use,)  and 
not  ko  and  no.  So  also  that  class  of  relations  expressed 
by  0,  w^ould  also  take  ko  and  no,  and  not  ka  and  na',  thus, 
ka  hale  a  ke  alii,  the  hoiise  o/the  chief;  to  say,  ka  hale  a 
ke  a'ii,  would  be  imgrammatical.  So  also  ill  throwing 
the  phrase  into  a  possessive  form,  it  must  be  ko  ke  alii 
hale,  the  chief's  house,  not  ka  ke  alii  hale.  Again,  ka  hale 
no  ke  alii,  the  house /of  the  chief;   not  na  ke  alii,  &.c. 

The  same  applies  to  the  relations  expressed  by  «;  thus, 

Ka  palapala  d  ke  kumu,    the  writing  o/'lhe  teacher,     not  o. 

Ka  ke  kumu  palapala,      the  feacher^s  writing,  not  ko. 

Ka  palapala  na  ke  kumu,  the  writing/or  the  teachisr,  not  no. 

Otherwise,  in  some  cases,  it  would  not  only  be  ungram- 
matical,  but  the  meaning  would  be  changed;  thus  the  fol- 
lowing forms  are  all  correct, 

Ka  vvahine  a  ke  kane,     (he  wife  of  the  husband. 

Ka  ke  kane  vvahine,         the  husband's  wife. 

He  wahine  na  ke  kane,  a  wifeybr  the  husband. 
jBiK-the  0,  kn  and  nn  must  not  be  used   in   this  '^rinse,  for 


OF    Till::    FKhPO*,rnONS.  35 

tlie  meaning  will  bo  difiwrent;  thus,  ka  vvfihine  o  ke  kane, 
would  mean  a  maid  servant,  or  a  concubine,  and  not  a 
wife.  So  in  the  prefix  [)rononiis  kawd  keiki,  mefins  his  or 
her  own  child;  kuivd  keiki,  a  foster  child,  a  servant  boy,  &.c. 
IVoTE. —  This  o  pieposiiioij  must  not  be  confouncled  wjtii  the  o 
emplntic,  spoken  of  heff)re.  Its  position  in  the  sentence  will  gen- 
erally serve  to  distingnisli  it. 

§  70.  /as  a  preposition  (before  a  prononn  and  name 
of  a  person,  ia)  expresses,  1st.  The  relations  of  a/,  tojor^ 
in,  bf/,  on,  in  respect  oJ\  on  account  of\   as, 

/  keia  man  la,  in  tliese  days,  at  this  time, 

Hele  oia  i  ke  kilo  uala.   he  went  to  the  polatoe  prophet, 

Halawai  lakou  %  ka  hale  kaia,   they  met  Wi[at]  the  school  liouse. 

/  ka  poe  aia,  by  the  company  of  the  wicked. 

Ina  i  ko  kiiu;i  waenn.   '\{  on  onr  grouiid. 

No  ka  pilikia  i  ka  ua,    for  the  difficulty  on  account  o/ the  rain. 

2nd.     /stands  between  an  active  verb  and  the  word 

governed    b}^    the    verb.     It    seems    to    be    the    medium 

tlirough  which  the  action  of  the  verb  passes  to  the  object. 

In  this  sense  it  has  no  meaning  in  English;   that  i-i,  \vg 

have  no  word  that  corresponds  with  it;   thus, 

'■  * 

Kalai  oia  i  ka  vyaa,   he  hewed  out       the  CHMoe. 

Alako  ae  ia  i  ka  pauka  wahie. 

He  dragged       the  piei'e  of  fire  wood. 

Kuku  ae  la  ka  waltine  i  ke  kapa.   the  woiiian  beat       tlie  kapa. 

3d.     li  serves  to  ex{)ress   the   figent   after   a   neuter  or 
intransitive  verb;    ;is, 
Make  lakon  l  ka  pololi. 
They  died  through  [by  mcrins  of  j  hunger. 
Holo  ka  moku  i  ka  n)akani,   the  s^hip  aailo  by  ths  wind. 
Ua  pan  ka  hale  i  ke  a  hi,  the;  house  v.'as  destroyed  by  firo. 

§  71.  Ma  signifies  ai,  in,  by,  ihrough,  to,  as  a  mains  of^ 
after.     The  following  are  specimens  of  its  use, 

He  noho  ana  kona  ma  Kaawalna, 
■   He  had  a  residence  al  Kaawalita. 
A  noho  oia  nio,  keia  ao,  while  he  lived  in  this  world. 
E  hoolaha  ac  ma  keia  pae  aina,  to  spread  through  these  islands. 
Ke  hoouna  akti  nei  an  ma  kou  aina,  I  send  to  your  land. 
Ua  oleloia  ma  na  kaao,  it  was  said  accurfing  lo  the  legend.s. 
Ua  hele  ija'lii  ma  ko  lakou'  aoao. 
The  chiefs  walked  q/'lcr  their  own  way.'^. 
11  a  cha  loa  kekahi  fioe  i)ia  ia  loalea. 
S<vnie  vyerc  Ijadly  wounded  by  >nf.an!>  "/' tins  >pojl 


36  OF    TllK    PRKroSITl.NOS. 

Note. — Ma  is  sometimes  synonymous  with  i  ns  in  the  last  example. 
Uh  eha  h>a  kekahi  poe  i  keia  kaua. 
Some  were  badly  wounded  by  means  o/this  war  [figlit]. 

§  72.  Me  signifies  tvith,  accompanijing^  in  compajn/,  he- 
sides,  as,  so;  it  is  used  mostly  before  nouns  and  pro- 
nouns;  as, 

Halawai  ia  me  kekahi  kaisaka,   he  met  with  a  certain  man. 

Ua  like  pu  ke  kahuna  me  ke  alii,   like  the  priest  so  the  king. 

Me  ia  i  noho  ai,  pela  ia  i  make  ai.as  he  lived,  so  he  died. 

Hele  pu  me  ia  i  ka  halawai,  he  went  ivifh  him  to  the  meeting. 

§  73.  E  marks  the  agent  after  a  passive  verb  and  sig- 
nifies by;    thus, 

Nui  na  moku  i  aieia  e  I^iholiho. 

Many  vessels  ivere  run  in  debt  for  by  Liholiho. 

Ua  alohaia  oia  c  na  kanaka,   he  was  loved  by  the  i>eople. 

Owai  la  i  pepehiif/  e  Kamehameha? 

Who«'«.s  slainby  Kamehameha? 

§  74.  E  is  also  used  in  calling  attention  or  calling  up- 
on one,  in  making  an  address.  It  is  generally  equivalent 
to  0  in  English;  as, 

Auhea  oukou  e  na'Jii,  where  are  yon.  O  tye  chiefs! 

E  ka  lani,  e  ka  honua,    O  the  heavens,  O  the  earth! 

E  ko  Maui  mau  alii,    O  ye  Maui's  chiefs. 

§  75.  Mai  innpTes  motion  either  toivards  the  speaker  or 
from  some  given  point  towards  another.  It  signifies/rom, 
out  of,  Slc;   thus, 

Mai  kahi  i  moe  ai,  Jrom  the  place  where  he  lay. 
Mai  Hawaii  aku,  from  Hawaii  outward. 
Mai  Oahu  a  Kauai,  from  Oahu  to  Kauai 
Mai  ka  lani  mai,  from  heaven. 

Note. — When  motion  toward  one  is  expressed  by  mai  it  rs  gen- 
erally followed  by  another  mai  which  cannot  l)e  transhted. 

All  the  relations  expressed  by  the  foregoing  preposi- 
tions cannot  be  expressed  by  corresponding  words  in  En-- 
glish;  it  is  only  by  practice  and  considering  the  words 
in  relation  to  each  other,  that  full  satisfaction  concerning 
their  various  meanings  and  the  different  shades  of  idea 
can  be  obtained. 

The  reader  will  see  further  illustrations  of  these  prepo- 
sitions under  sections  entitled  Remarks  on  the  Paradigms 
of  Nutms  and  Pro?iouns 


OF    NOUNS.  37 

OF  NOUNS. 

^  IC).  Nouns  in  Hawniian  ex})res.s  tlic  iiamt's  ol' per- 
sons, quali'ies  and  things.  Tnoy  may  b(;  divided  into 
Proper  and  Common. 

§  77.  A  proper  noun  is  the  name  of  an  individual,  ei(h~ 
er  person  or  thing,  where  there  is  supposed  to  l)e  hut  one 
of  the  kind;  as,  Hawaii,  A/nerika,  Ferani,  Lihuliho,  Juiuiti. 

Proper  nouns,  ordinarily,  have  no  article.  But  many 
proper  names,  particularly  of  persons,  are  formed  in  Ha- 
waiian by  prefixing  the  articles  kn,  ke  or  na,  but  in  such 
cases  the  articles  unite  and  become  component  parts  of 
the  noun  and  thus  lose   their  signification   of  articles;   as, 

/ra])if)lani,  tke  lieavenly  [aisoner. 

/C'ekipi,  the  rebel. 

A^alieuia,  the  left  hand. 

Kekai.  the  sea. 

Aaivvi,  the  bone.s. 

Artpualmu,  the  hau  blo.'^soms. 

§  78.  Common  nouns  are  such  as  express  the  names 
of  classes  of  objects;  hence  the  same  name  applies  to 
many  individuals   in  a  body;    thus, 

Aina,  land,    if»,  fish,    lau,  leaf. 
Lnau,  tree,    manti,  bird,    iwi,  bone. 
Aloa,  fowl,    keiki,  cliiKl,    hoku,  star. 

Every  common  noun,  with  a  few  exceptions,  is  suppos- 
eil  to  have  some  kind  of  an  article  or  some  equivalent;  un- 
less some  grammatical  reason  exists  why  it  should  be 
dropped.  The  reasons  may  be,  the  structure  of  the  sen- 
tence— a  change  in  the  ordinary  meaning  of  the  words — 
a  change  in  their  location  or  some  idiomatic  or  j>rover- 
bial  expressions.     For  these,  see  Syntax. 

§  79.  The  Hawaiians  have  also  abstract  and  concrete 
nouns.  The  r/As/n/c/ express  the  pure  name  of  a  quality 
without  reference  to  any  particular  thing;   as, 

Ka  oiaio,  the  truth,     ka  pono,  the  justice,  goodness. 
Ke  kaumaha,  the  weight,  sorrow,   ka  ino,  the  badness. 

l!\\e  concrete  includes  the  quality  and  substance  in  one 
word;   as, 

Elcinakulc.  an  old  man,  luwaliino,  an  old  woman,  halau.  a  long 
house,  oopa,  a  lame  i)erson,  &c. 


3^  OF  ri;u SON. 

NoTi:. — M.iny  nouns  are  used  either  in  t!ie  concrete  or  abstract 
HCiise  according  as  tliey  aro  needed^  or  as  tlie  structure  of  the  sen- 
tence recjuires  but  without  any  [ecnhar  termiiiatien  or  form. 

§  80.     A  good  ntimber  of  nouns  are   formed  by  prefix- 
jug  some  sydlable  to  tho  radical  form;     thus, 
Ino.  bad,    y^oino,  i!l  faled,  uiifortunate. 
Maikai,  oood,  poryd\kn],  blessed,  fortunate. 
Main,  a  shade,   y/ictinalu,  an  uinbreHa. 

These  syllables  aro  such  as  mrt,  net,  po,  ka,  o,  and  per- 
haps others.  They  may  have  sometiiing  to  do  in  niakins; 
n^^stract  nouns;  but  further  investigations  are  necessary 
to  determine.     See  ^  32. 

^81.  Hawaiian  Nouns  have  Perso?i,  Number,  Gender 
and  Case. 

OF  PERSON. 

§  i:2.  1st.  Person  in  grammar  is  the  agent  in  an  action  or 
alfirmation.  Each  agent  must  eitlier  be  /,  thou,  he;  or 
plural  we,  yuu,  they  or  their  substitutes;  hence,  there  are 
considered  three  persons. 

2nd.  The  yz'rs/ person  speaks  of  himself  or  something 
he  is  doing;   as, 

Owau,  nei  ke  kahuna  e  noho  nei,   /  arn  the  priest  livirjg  here. 
Oivau  nei  ko  oukou  vvahi  kaikaina. 
I  who  am  your  younger  brother. 

These  forms  often  occur,  but  only  vvl)en  the  noun  is  in  apposi- 
tion with  some  pronoun  of  t.he  1st.  person. 

3rd.  The  second  person  denotes  the  hearer,  or  is  the  per- 
son s|Joken  to  and  is  supposed  to  be  j)resent;   as, 

Mai  hee  oe,  e  Umi,  i  ko'u  papa. 

Do  not  swiia,    Umi.  on  my  surf-board. 

Alah:i  oe,  e  ka  mdihiai,  siilutation  to  you.  the  stranger  or  lovo 
to  you,  the  stranger,  or  love  to  you  O  stranger. 

4th.  The  third  person  represents  the  per.'^on  or  thing 
epoken  of,  and  is  much  more  frequently  absent  than  pre- 
sent;  thus, 

Ilalawai  mai  la  luClii.  the  chiefs  assembled, 

IIolo  oia  i  ka  aina  kahiki,   he  sailed  to  a  foreign  country. 

Note. — The  use  of  tlie  first  person  of  nouns  is  not  so  frequent 
as  the  second  or  third;  lor  speakers  do  not  often  speak  of  thenj* 
pelves  bv  ua/j|e. 


(>F  .VuMi!i;n.  3J) 

^  83,  Numhci\  in  Hawaiian  nouns  I'd'crs  to  oiii'  object 
only,  or  to  tiro  only,  or  to  any  numln'r,  hiiger  tlmn  two  spo- 
ken of  together.  Hence,  like  must  of  the  orient.-J  hniiiUiiii;- 
es,  the  HiiwuiJLin  hm  three  nufrihers:  iha  sin^tilar,  the  ihni/ 
und  plural. 

1st.     The  singvl(&  refory  to  one  objert  only;  a?, 
Ka  Idau,  the  tree,    ka  neiie.  the  gortse,  A«  ncnanona.  ili»-  f>iit> 
2n(j.     The  cimd  spe-ks  o{ two  only;  as, 
Mau  keiki  eliti,  two  ciiildrcn,  iiu  kao  elud,  two  gDa's. 
NoTR. — The  dual   number  is  not  so   juarkcd  in  the   nouns  ;is  ut 
the  pioroiins.     In  the  nouns  it   i»  oft^n  used  hut  .«generally  in  (-on- 
neclion  with  some    pronoun  of  the  dual  nuinbert    br  in  connectiim 
With  soine  niimeial  a;|jectiVe  to  make  it  t'le.ir. 

3rd.  'Vhe  plural  number  speaks  of  any  number  r//;oi;^ 
two,  however  large;  as, 

Ka  pee  hoioliolona,  thb  beasts,  he  fil'au  ia,  some  fi.sh. 
j\d  ni)anU,  the  birds,     7ia  moa,  the  fouls. 

§  84.  Hawaiians  of'ten  use  the  singular  number  where 
Inore  than  one  is  ir.tended;  they  attat^h  a  collective  ided 
lo  words  jn  the  singulat'  form  in  many  Cases;  thus, 

The  word  kaiialia  (with  the  accf;nt  on  the  fir.^t  .syilabic)  is  often 
used  for  a  plural  or  synonyinous  with  na  kanaka;  or poe  kanaka;  as 
tne  na'lii  a  me  kanaka  with  the  fhifefs  and  the  people  (^^43.)  Pa- 
nmi  ka  apa  o  kahi,  lit.  ten  each  ihe piece  of  clnth  a[)itc(  =len  pi»  cc  s 
of  cloth  for  each.  T  hihi  na'lii  a  me  ka  makaainana.  tLat  the  chiefs: 
might  be  burdened  and  the  common  man.  No  Jia'lii  a  me  kanaka 
a  me  ka  wafiine  kekahi,  Ibr  the  chiefs  and  the  men  and  the  ivo- 
inan  ako.  O  ka  ilHihine  ka  h-ila,  \he  woman  has  the  oft'ence;  this 
Was  said  respecting  a  large  clasS  of  persons.  Tiic)=e  forms  are 
found,  biil  are  e.ltceplions  tb  the  rule. 

§  85.  Nouns  have  no  change  ih  their  terminations  of 
other  forms  l\y  which  the  sintjular,  dual,  or  |>liiral  num- 
bers are  distinguiehed  from  each  othei'.  Some  word.^ 
termed  signs  are  therefore  set  before  the  nouns  fir  this 
purpose.  These  are  either  the  paiticular  signs  used  in 
Such  cases,  or  a  pronoun  or  a  numeral  adjective. 

Note. — In  theory,  nouns  are  considered  shii^idar.  unless  render- 
ed dual  or  plural  by  a  syllable  coming  ()efore  the  imun,  which 
Syllable  may  be  termed  the  sign  of  the  dual  or  plural  numbers. 

§.  86.  The  sf!j??.s  of  the  dual  and  plvral  me  lut,  inau.  poe, 
pae,  and  pvn\   thus, 


40  OF  WM'nt-ns. 

ya  hunn  eliin.  the  tt*'<o  dovps. 

!\a  poe  luiiin,  the  sailors  {company  of  sailors.] 

]\Liu  keiki  elua,  tico  chiidinii. 

He  poe  koa,   soldiers  [cr>iii|)aiiy  of  soldiers.] 

Me  tnau  uaa,  some  CaiioeS. 

Ka  pae  mokii,  the  f^hips   [Ci>l!oction  of   ships.] 

jSa  no,  the.  clouds,   he  puu  |johaku,  a  hea|)  of  stones, 

§  8"?  When  mi  is  used,  it  excludes  the  article,  and 
liCnce  may  be  considered  a  plural  article.  Perhaps  it 
inay  have  the  double  oliice  of  an  urtide  and  a  sign  of  the 
dual  and  plural  number,  both  definite  and  indefinite.  See 
§  67,  8. 

§  83.  Na  is  u^ed  as  a  sign  of  the  plural  indefinitely 
large;   as, 

Na  manii  o  ka  lewR^  the  fowls  of  the  air. 

x^a  hoku  0  ka  lani.  the  stars  of  heaven. 

Na  stands  sometimes  also  before  a  dual,  when  the  con- 
struction of  the  sentence  is  such  that  it  is  difficult  to  use 
'man;   as,  na  hua  elua,  two  eggs» 

§  89.  When  the  other  signs  of  the  dual  and  plural  are 
used;  as,  mau,poe,  pde,  ixnd pan,  ihe -drt'icles  k(l,ke,  he,  imhif 
kahi,  and  kekahi,  may  be  prefixed;  except  that  ka  and  ke 
never  come  before  mau,  as  they  imply  unity,  but  the  sigr.s 
imply  plurality. 

§  90.  Man  is  a  sign  either  of  the  dual  or  plural.  As 
^  sign  of  the  plural,  it  does  not  apply  generally  to  a  great 
number.  As  originally  used  by  the  Hawaiians  them- 
selves, it  rarely  exceeded  a  dozen.  Lately  foreigners 
and  even  natives  apply  it  to  a  greater  number;  as, 

He  mau  aiiia  naauao,  enlightened  laiuls^ 

Me  wahi  mau  niea,  some  things. 

Kckahi  niati  moo,  those  lizards. 

NfofE.— The  original  idea  o(  mau  seems  to  he  that  of  repetition., 

O  kana  hanJi  ana  pela,  he  mea  mau  ia. 

His  doing  so,  is  a  conslant  thing;  i.  e.  constantly  repeated. 

§  91.  Poc  as  a  sign  of  the  plural  applies  to  any  num- 
t)er  indiefinitely  la^'se;  but  it  restricts  the  noun  to  the  set 
or  comprny  of  persons  or  things  spoken  of  to  the  exclu- 
•sion  of  all  others.  Thus,  V.\\.  poe  keiki  may  mean,  accord- 
•ing  to  th<^  sentence^  ///♦'  cliildiTn  before  spoken   of,  or  the 


OK    GENDLR.  41 

chll(hu'/i  in  (li^linclion  from  JUiults;    :is, 

Kh  poe  kainva.  ilic  servants,  Vn  poe  licwa.  ihc  irirkefl. 
Ka  poe  kmmi.  t!ie  learhers,  U»  pot  ailme,  the  fliicrcn. 
He  y^o/^  kill,  .spies,  ka  /K'f  luiia.  the  oversrera:. 

Poe  is  used  more  in  cnnneclioii  \\iih  [-ergons-  and  ani- 
rnate  objects  ihan  with  inanimate.  It  i-elers  mostly  to  llie 
various  otiices  and  conditions  ol"  men,  to<^etlier  with  class- 
es or  companies  ol"  animals;  but  in  English  must  often  be 
rendered  mereiy  as  designf^ting  a  plural.  Pot:  may  ofien 
be  rendered,  as  it  otlen  is,  as  a  noun;  thus, 

Ka  poe  ktiki  ihc  company  of  chilfiien.  in  which  c^ae  poe  be- 
comes a  noun  ami  kelki  an  adjectiA  e. 

§  92.  Pae  and  /nni  likc;;fK'  signifies  a  cluster  or  col- 
lection of  individual  things.  They  ;!re  used  very  much 
alike,  but  not  so  often,  and  ;ipply  nioi-e  gen^raliy  to  inan- 
imate things;    as, 

Ka  j)ae  aina  o  Hawaii,  llic  i;^/a>>f!s  of  Ijjiuaii. 

He  aina  pele  ke\a  pae  moku. 

Volcanic  lane!  is  tins  cl inter  of  islands. 

He  pun  |)ohakii.  a  pile  of  stones. 

Irie  puu  waliie,  a  heap  of  Jirc  wood. 

He  jmu  liaole. 

A  numher  of  foreigners,  in  the  next   line  it  is  ;*oe  haoJe. 

Kena  ae  la  ke  alii  e  lalan  ]  na  poe  haole  la. 

The  chief  sent  to  seize  those  foreigners.  SiC. 

§  93.     The  syllable  ma  following  the  name  of  a  person 
expresses  the  person's  name  and  those  with  him;   as, 
Noho  iho  o  Hoa|)i!i  ma,  H(iaj)ili  aiifl  his  ronipany  staid. 
Hoio  ae  la  o  Nahienaena  ma. 
Nalnenaena  and  her  company  sailed. 
Pae  nma  mai  o  Lono  nia. 
Capt.  Cooke  and  his  company  arrived  previously. 

§  94.  The  word  kanaka  without  an  article  and  with  a 
long  full  accent  on  the  first  syllable,  denotes  a  plural  of 
an  indefinite  number;   as, 

Ola  ka  laha  ana  o  kanaka  ma  Hawaii  nei. 

That  was  ihc  spreadinix  of  men  on  the  Hawaiian  islanrls.  i.  p.  the 
peopjinc:  oi  the  ishuuls. 

OF  GENDER. 

§  95.  In  general,  there  is  nothing  in  Hawaiian  tomnik 
the  genders  of  nouns,  except   the  words  kane    [male]  and 

G 


42  OF    GENDER. 

wahine  [fcniule].  But  this  designation  {kane  anci  wahine) 
extends  to  animals  as  well  as  men.  When  it  is  neci^.^sary 
to  mark  the  gender  these  words  are  added. 

§  96.  They  have  no  word  to  express  neuter  gender  or* 
to  give  the  idea  of  gender  to  any  nouns  that  are  neither 
7nale  or  female. 

The  following  is  a  specimen  of  the  use  of  genders. 

Makna,  parent,  snakuakaiie,  father,   mnkuavvahine,   mother. 

Keiki,  child,   keikikane,  son,   kaikatnahine,  daughter. 

Kupuiia,  grandparent,  kupunakane,  grandfather, 

Kupnnawaliine,  graiidniother. 

Kaikoeke,  rela.  hy  mar.,   kaikoekekane,  brother  in  law. 

Kaikoekevvahine,  sister  in  law. 

Bipi,  cow  or  bull,  bipikane,  ox  Or  bull,  bipiivajiine.  a  co^v. 

Kao,  goat,  kaokane,  he  goat,   kaowahine,  she  goat. 

Moa,  fowl,  moakane,  cock,  moawahine,  hen,  &c. 

§  97.  There  is  a  class  of  words  in  the  language  iVhich 
is  used  Sjnecifically  for  different  genders;   as, 

Elemakule,  an  old  man. 

Luwahine.  an  old  woman. 

Kumuliiu,  a  breeder  [female] 

Maiau,  an  expert,  ingenious  man. 

Loia,  an  expert,  ingenious  woman.  Sec. 

This  phrase  was  once  found,  o  makou  lioi,  0  nn  eteniakitle  kcint. 
a  me  na  elemakule  wahine,  which  literally  means,  we  also^  thr 
old  men  moles   and  the  old  men  females! 


OF  THE  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

§  98.  Case  is  a  change  of  termination  of  words  to  ex- 
press a  difference  of  relation  between  that  word  and  oth- 
ers. 

Nouns  are  not  decilined  in  Hawaiian  by  any  vjiriations 
of  their  terminations  as  in  European  languages.  They  are 
declined  by  prefixing  the  simple  prej)':sitions,  §  G9)  2,  and 
thus  moditying  the  idea  expressed  by  the  simple  noun.-^ 
These  modifications  (called  cases)  are  somewhat  numer- 
ous. 

§  90.  The  cases  are  ten  in  number,  made  by  j^refixing 
the  simi>ie  prepositions.  Tiiey  a|)[)ly  to  proper  and  com- 
mon nouns. 

It  is  j)roper  to  state  that  the  names  of  the  cases  are 
Hawaiian  terms  because  the  names  were    not  sufliciently 


l)ECLi:.\.si().\    (jf    NOUN'S. 


43 


numerous  in  any  foreign  lano:uage.  Aid  a  removai,  a 
change,  is  used  for  case.  Aui  kiwin,  foundation  case,  i.  e. 
nominative.  Aui  pili,  adhering  case.  ^?«' //i/,  so  called 
with  reference  to  the  aui  pili,  i.  e.  aui  pili  adhering,  aui- 
iki  adhering  a  little  [more]  than  aui  pili  from  iki  little. — 
Aui  paewa,  uneven  .case.  Ai.i  alo,  the  front  cuse  from  its 
relation  to  the  verb.  Auimoe,  lying  down  case,  it  often  re- 
fers to  rest  in  or  at  a  place.  Aui  hen,  the  calling  case.  Aui 
hele,  moving  case,  as  mni  impWes  motion.  Aui  hui,  union 
case,  (IS  me  signifies  with,  in  company.  Aui  ia  passive  case; 
ia  is  the  suffix  of  passive  verbs.  This  case  implies  the 
agent  after  a  passive  verb. 

§  100.  The  following  Paradigms  will  show  the  fore- 
mentioned  relations  with  the  prepositions  and  the  names 
of  the  cases.  The  names  of  Latin  cases  are  inserted 
where  they  correspond. 

•»  S1NGU1.AH. 

ka  hale,  the  house. 

o  ka  hale,  a  ka  hale,  of  the  house. 
ko  ka  hale,  ka  ka  hale,  the  houses\ 
no  ka  hale,  na  ka  hale,    for  the  house. 


Aui  kwmu,    Noui 

■^"'  P''^'      I  Gen 
Aui  iki,       5 

Aui  paewa,    Dat. 

Aui  alo,         Ace. 

Aui  moe, 

Aui  hea,        Voc. 

Aui  hele, 

Aui  hui,        Ahl. 

Aui  ia, 

Aui  kurftu,    Nom. 

Aui  iki,       5 

Aui  paewa,    Dat. 

Aui  alo.         Ace. 

Aui  moe, 

Aui  hea,        Voc. 

Aui  hele, 

Aui  hui,        Abl. 

Aui  ia, 


i  ka  hale, 
ma  ka  hale, 
e  ka  hale, 
mai  ka  hale, 
me  ka  hale, 
e  ka  hale, 

Plural. 
na  hale, 

o  na  hale,  a  na  hale, 
ko  na  hale,  ka  na  hale, 
no  na  hale,  na  na  hale,    for  the  houses. 
i  na  hale,  the  houses. 

ma  na  hale,  at  or  to  the  houses. 

e  na  hale,  O  the  houses. 

mai  na  hale,  from  the  houses. 

me  na  hale,  with  the  houses. 

e  na  hale,  by  the  houses. 


the  house. 
at  or  to  the  house. 
O  the  house. 
from  the  house. 
ivith  the  house. 
by  the  house. 

the  houses. 
of  the  houses, 
the  houses'. 


§  101,  Declension  of  a  Proper  name  of  a  place,  Hawaii. 
Only  in  the  Singular. 


Aui  Is  11  in u 

i\oru 

Aui  pili, 
Aui  iki, 

(leu. 

Aui  pjitHVii 

) 

Dat. 

Aai  alo. 

Ace. 

Aui   R»oe. 

Aui  Ilea. 

Voc. 

Aui  liclo. 

Aui  luii. 

.\!)l. 

Aui  iii. 

4-i  JJECr.F.N.-SlON    or    NOUNs. 

Hawaii.  Hawaii. 

o  Hawaii,  a  Hawiiil.  o/ Hawaii. 

ko  Hawiiii.  I,a  Huw.iii,  Hawaii's. 

no  Hawaii.  ii:i.  iiawaii,  for  Hawaii. 

i  Hawaii.  Hawaii. 

mu  Hawaii.  af.  or  to  Hawaii. 

e  Hawaii,  O  Hawaii. 

:)iai  Hawaii.  from  Hawaii. 

nie  Hawaii,  witk  Hawaii. 

e  Ffawaii,  with  or    bij    Hawaii. 

The  {bllowing  expressions  are  also  found  where  la  is  used 
before  the  names  of  places  where  i  or  no  is  generall}-  used; 
as, 
Ua  ahaolelo  na'iii  ia  Kauai. 
The  chiefs  held  a  council  respecting  Kauai. 
Hele  aliu  la  ia  e  kaua  i  kela  man  aupuni  ia  Hilo  a  me  Kau. 
He  went  to  make  war    upon  [against]  those  two   kingdoms   Hilo 
and  Kau. 

Wliat  is  uncommon  in  the  first  example  is  the  use  of  m 
before  Kauai  as  though  it  were  a  person,  /or  ma  Kauai 
would  have  referred  to  the  council  at  Kauai;  but  the 
meaning  of  the  passage  is  that  they  held  a  council  respec- 
ting the  condition  of  Kauai.  The  ordinary  form  is  ?io 
Kauai.  In  the  second  example  ia  Hilo,  Hilo  is  used  as 
the  name  of  a  peison,  and  not  a  place. 

§  102.  W  a  noim  is  made  plural  by  man,  either  the  ar- 
ticles kahi  or  kekahi  must  precede  mau\   as, 

Mail  Ho,  some  horses. 
Aui  kumu.     Nom.     kahi  or  kekahi  mau  lio,  the  horses. 

Aui  pili,     ^  p  G  kekahi  mau  lio,  a  kekahi  mau  lio,  of  the  horses. 

Aui  iki,      ^  ■      ko  kekahi  mau  lio,  ka  kekahi  mau  lio,  the  horses'. 

Aui  paewa,  Dat.  no  kekahi  mau  lio,  7ia  kekahi  mau  lio,/or  the  horses. 
Aui  alo,        Ace.     i  kekahi  mau  lio,  the  horses. 

ma  kekahi  mau  lio,  at  or  by  the  horses. 

e  kekahi  mau  lio,  O    horses. 

mai  kekahi  mau  lio.  from  the  horses. 

me  kekahi  mau  lio,  with  the  horses. 

e  kekahi  mau  lio,  by  the  horses. 

Example  of  a    noun  rendered  plural  by  poe. 

Ka  poe  keiki,  the  children. 
Nom.  ka  poe  keiki,  kekahi  poe  keiki,    the  children. 

o  ka  poe  keiki.  a  ka  poe  keiki,  cf  the  children. 

ko  ka  poe  keiki.  ka  kapoe  keiki,  the  childrens'. 


Aui  moc. 

Aui  hea, 

Voc. 

Aui  hele. 

Aui  hui, 

A  hi. 

Aui  ia, 

§  103. 

Exa 

Aui  kumu 

Noir 

Aui  pili. 
Aui  iki, 

1  (Jen. 

Aui  patnva, 

Dat 

A  111  alo, 

Arc 

Aui  iiioc. 

Aui  |jc;i, 

Voc 

Aui  lielo. 

Aui  liui. 

Ai.l. 

Aui  i;i. 

NoTK.— 

hi  III' 

di;ci,i:ns!o\  <)|-  N.)r\s.  45 

no  \\i\  poc  Lfiki,  nu  k,;»  poc  kciki.yfjv  liic  cliililruii. 
i  kii  poe  kcMki.        the  c!iil<lrfi).   /.»  llt<^  «•luldrcii. 
ma  ka  poe  keiki.     by.  tliroiigli    liic  ciiildrc:!. 
e  ka  pne  keiki,        ( )  children. 
jnal  ku  poc  kciki.   from  tiie  cliiMrrn. 
in?  k.-i  poe  Iveiki,     «.vitii  [\m  t-\\\\i\vi:i\. 
('  ka  |;op  keiki.        l)y  iiic  children. 
hi  many  Crises   where  poo    is  used,   it  may    b;^  rendered 
sini[)ly  as  a   plural,  as  above,  or    it  u\  ty  bj  trau.sl  ited    the  CJ:n^)uni/ 
oj,  according  to  the  sense  iA  t!ie  passage. 

Poe  ol'len  staiuls  tor  tlio  filuraj  and  the  noun  too:  as.  Penei  ka 
iJiuiao  o  kekahi  po:\  Tliis  is  t.io  opmi.).i  of  aoiii^.  [peopj;.] 

§   10 k     E.Kample  of  the  Proper  au'iie  oi' a  Person 

Aui  kuniu,     Noin.     I'aki,  I'aki. 

Aui  piii,       ?  r<  ,         o  Paki  a  Pak»,  o/l'aki, 

Aui  iki,        y  ■      ko  l*akf,  ka  Paki,  Fakis. 

Aui  pacwa,    Dat.       no  Paki,  7ia  Paki,  for  Paki. 

Aui  aio.  Ace.     ia  Paki,  Paki. 

Aui  nioe,  ma  Paki.  ma  o  Paki  la,  of,  bij  Paki, 

Aui  hea,  Voc.    e  Paki,  O  Paki. 

Aui  helc,  inai  Paki,  from  Paki. 

Aui  hui,  Abl.     we  Paki  with   Paki. 

Aui  ia,  e  I'aki,  6,y  Paki. 

Note. — Nouns  are  not  declined  wiiii  the  article  hookahi,  nor 
with  the  indeliiiite  article  he.  Tliey  are  used  only  in  t!ie  Aui  ku- 
mu. 

Remarks  on  the  foregoing  paradigms. 
§  105.  1st.  The ^4',:///j?/'?;'ij^  [Nominative  case]  has  frequent- 
ly an  0  before  \t  which  is  not  a  preposition,  but  the  o  em- 
phatic. It  is  generally  easy  to  distinguish  between  the 
two.  See  §  53,  54.  The  A>ti  kumu  is  always  tiie  snbject 
of  an  affirmation  or  proposition,  either  through  a  verb 
or  affirmative  particle. 

2nd.  In  the  Aui  p Hi  [Genitive  Case]  there  is  a  nice 
shade  of  distinction  between  the  meanings  of  the  relations 
expressed  by  a  and  o;  but  there  is  no  [)reposition  in  En- 
glish that  will  give  the  shade  of  dilference.  Phey  must 
both  be  expressed  in  English  by  the  preposition  o/;  and 
yet  they  are  so  distinct  in  a  Hawaiian's  mind  as  rarely  to 
be  exchangeil  the  one  for  the  other.  The  a  in  many 
cases  seems  to  express  a  little  nearer  relation  tliyii  o;   as, 


46  DECLEMSION    01-'    JNOUNfe. 

Ke  awiJimi  o  li.ivvaii. 

Tli(3  kiiidgijin  of  Hawaii;  o  not  a  in  this  case. 

Ka  paia  o  ka  hale,  the  side  q/"  the  house;   o  not  a. 

Ke  kninu  o  ko'u  noonoo,  the  reason  o/  ^ny  opinion,  o  not  rt. 

Ka  ptile  a  ka  poe  haipule,  the  prayer  of  the  pious,  a  not  o 

Ka  hana  a  ke  kiiniu,  the  labor  o/ the  teacher,  a  not  o 

Ke  kanoha  a  ke  alii,  the  charge  q/"  the  chief,  a  not  o,  &^.. 

3rd.  Only  the  most  s^eneral  rules  can  be  given  respec- 
ting the  use  of  the  a  and  o.  Thus,  whatever  relates  to  in- 
iitructioti,  learning,  to  work  and  to  food,  requires  a.  What- 
ever relaitps  to  one's  person,  his  residence,  his  clothing 
and  his  passions,  requires  o.  But  practice  will  soon  ren- 
der them  familial». 

Sometimes  a  double  o  is  used,  particularly  with  a  pro- 
noun; as,  ka  makem.ike  o  na  kanaka  o  o  nei,  the  desire 
of  the  people  ivJw  belong  here,  6r  the  people  of  hereabouts. 

4th.  The  Aui  iki  [Genitive  case]  ko  ka  hale,  &,c.  is, 
equivalent  to  the  English Possessivecase;  thus,  A:okahale, 
i\\e  house's,  that  which  is  o/ or  belongs  to  the  house.  Ko 
ke  kino,  the  body's  that  which  is  o/or  belongs  to  the  body  or 
person.  Ko  ke  alii  hale  the  chi-^f's  house,  equivalent  in 
meaning  to  ka  hale  o  ke  alii,  the  house  of  the  chief.  The 
■same  words  that  would  require  o  in  the  Aui  pili  would  re- 
quire ko  in  the  Aui  iki  and  not  /m;  as,  ka  ke  kumu  hana., 
the  teacher's  work;  ka  ke  keiki  wahine,  the  young  man's 
wife;  ka  ke  alii  kauoha,  the  chief's  charge.  The  ka  and 
ko  apply  to  Proper  names  and  to  names  of  places  and 
countries  to  express  the  people  of  those  places  or  coun- 
stries;  as,  Aole  i  like  na  pohaku  maanei  me  ko  na  AinapU' 
niole,  the  stones  here  are  not  like  those  of  the  Contiiients. 
Ua  like  na  helehelena  o  ko  Hawaii  nei  me  kona  moku  e  ae 
ma  keia  moana,  the  features  of  Ilaioaiians  are  Wke  the  peo- 
ple of  other  islands  in  this  ocean.  A  ike  aku  la  ko  Kailua 
\  na  wahine  haole,  and  when  the  people  of  Kailua  saw  the 
foreign  women,  lit.  when  Kailua's  saw,  &c.  Hoolike  ia 
(me  ka  na  haole  hana  ana,  he  imitated  the  foreigners''  doings.. 

5th.  The  Aui  iki  is  frequently  found  together  with 
most  of  the  other  simple  prepositions  to  express  posses- 
^sion  in  connection  with  them.  This  constitutes  a  kind  of 
double  genitive,  or  putting  most  of  the  other  cases  in  r-e- 
:i^imen  with  the  genitive;   as, 


i)F,c'i,i:Nsi()\s  oi'    \ni'\N.  4? 

ICo  ao  nci.  the  world  licir.  ihis  U(>rf((. 

Alii  kit.'nu,  kt!  iio  iici.  iiii>»  world. 

Ani  iki,  /»o  ke  ao  iiei.  ka  &c.  this  wnrld's  (^no<ls,  rvilK.  S,r.\ 

Aui  pili,  0  ko  ke  ao  nci,  a  ka  &-c.  o/'ilii.s  worM's. 

Aui  [)ae\va,  no  ko  kc  ao  iiei,  nu  iLc.  J'or  this  world's. 

Aui  alo,  i  ko  ke  ao  riei,  this  worhTs. 

Aui  moe,  ma  ka  ke  ao  uei,  through  hi)  mean:-!  of  \.\ih  >\(»rhrs. 

Aui  hen,  e  ko  ke  ao  nei,  O  this  \vol!(^^:. 

Aui  hele,  _         _         _         - 

Aui  hui,  me  ko  ke  ao  nei,  wiih  this  world's. 

Aui  ia,  P  Ao  ke  ao  uei,  by  th's  wnrhrs  [ii;t)ods,  pleasure  s,  A  .] 

So  also  with  a  name  of  a  place  or  country;   ns,  Maui. 
Maui,  ko  Maui,  the  people,  inhabiianls  of  Miwū. 
Aui  kmnu,     Maui,  Maui. 

Aui  ikis  ko  Maui,  ka  Sec.     Maui's  [people,  chiefs,  <te.| 

Aui  [)i'i.  o  ko  Maui,  a  eV:c.    o/' Maui's  fjROj;le,  &c.j 

Aui  paeWn,    no  ko  Maui,  na  Sic.  for  Maui's. 
Aui  alo,         i  ko  Maui,  /o  Maui's 

Aui  moe,       ma  0 /fo  Maui,         by  means  of  Main  fi. 
Aui  hea,         e  ko  Maui.  O  Maui's.  O  ye  people,  v.^e.  o/Maui. 

i'\ui  hcle,        niai  ko  Maui,  from   Maui's. 

Aui  huij         me  ko  Maui.  vilh  Maui's. 

Aui  ia,  e  Ao  Maui,  by  Maui's. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  Aui  f  Hi  uulI  Aui  iki  chaniic 
places  to  adapt  themselves  to  this  double  genitive  foim, 
which  is  very  common. 

Gth.  The  Aui  paeica  [Dative  case]  resembles  in  its 
meaning  the  Dative  case  in  Greek  and  Latin       It  is  used 

(a.)  At  the  commencement  of  captions  of  chapters  or  sec- 
tions; as,  ?io  ka  mooolelo,  o/ or  concerning  history;  no  ka 
nriake  ana  o  Lono,  of  or  concerning  the  death  of  Lono;  no  ka 
naaupo  a  nie  ka  wahahee.  about  ignorance  -anA  fJsehood. 
(b.)  0/or  concerning  a  person  or  plr;cc;  as  na  meu 
ana  i  lohe  ai  no  Pcle,  the  things  which  lie  heard  concerning 
Pele.  Make  kekahi  kannka  no  Wailukii,  there  ums  killed 
a  certain  raan  ofov  from  Wailuku. 

(c.)  (foY  belonging  to  as  property,  or  as  a  relation;  ns 
he  mau  hoahanau  ?io  ke  alii,  some  bretiiren  of  or  jm-fuininsi; 
to  the  chief.  0  ka  aina  no  na'Hi  wale  no,  ilie  land  was 
for  or  belonged  to  the  chiefs  only. 

("d.)  No — mai  or  aku  implies  that  the  thinij-  or  person 
belonged  somewhere  else  but  has  rcmo\  ed  from  one  place 


48  TiKCI.KMSiON    Ot'    NOtlXS. 

to  <inother;  ns,  no  Anierika  mai  ka  mii  o  iia  mo'ai,  frcM 
AiiHM'ir.a  [liils  wav]  tiie  most  of  ihe  ships.  'J'he  sanie  of 
coui'se  a|)j)l!es  to  iia\  as.  na  ke  akua  mui  keia  oihana,  /fom 
the  god  was  this  institution.  Xo  ka  lewa  mai  na  kanaka, 
from  the  skies  were  men.  Sometimes  the  mai  may  he 
(]ro{)pe(l;  as,  un  hanau  mai  na  Wakea  hiua  o  Papa,  [mai] 
they  were  born  [tuenl  fiom  Wakea  and  Pa{)a. 

(e  )  No  inipHes/^'r  in  the  sense  of  the  iisp  of\  as,  e  kuku- 
lu  i  man  heiau  no  na'kua,  build  some  temples /or  i.  e.  for 
the  vsc  of  the   i^ods. 

(f)  Na  as  a  general  rule  expresses  more  exclu- 
sive right — more  impei'ioiis  duty  or  obligation — and 
moi-e  undisputed  possession  than  either  no  or  I,o;  as,  na 
keia  kanaka  e  hoakaka,  it  belongs  to  this  man,  i.  e.  //  is 
the  oficc,  tlic  duty  of  this  man  to  explain.  Na  ka  luna  ka- 
nawai  e  hoomaopopo  aku,  it  is  for  i.  e.  it  is  ihe  office  of  the 
judge  to  enquire  into.  E  haawi  mua  ia  aku  na  keakua,  let 
it  fii'st  be  given  to  tlie  god,  i.  e.  let  it  first  be  devoted  to 
him  as  his.  Na  ke  kahuna  wale  no  ka  olelo,  it  is  the  busi- 
ness i.  e.  it  is  for  llie  prie.st  ordy  tosjieak. 

Note.— Tlio  7jo  of  the  ylui  poeica  i.«  d'.slincl  fnmi  the  no  afnim- 
ativp  and  ofHTmionly    w:^(h\  \\\  a  diifcrcr)t  j  art  of  the  sentence. 

The  paiiiriilar  incaiiiiius  oftiiei^e  preposition.s  will  nj)|.^ear  fur- 
iher  in  connection  with  t!ie  |«ronouiis.- 

6th.     The  i  of  the  Aiii  alo  [Accusitive  case]  is  used  for 
several  purposes  and  in  several  ways;   as, 
(a.)   A  preposition  of  lime  in,  vpon^  at  a  certain  time,  &.c. 

/  i;a  wa  kahiko.  in  ancient  time. 

A  i  kekahi  la  e  ae,  and  upon  a  c.erlain  other  day. 

A  i  ke  ahiahi  o  ka  la  eliia,ahd  in  the  evening  of  the  second  day. 

Elna  kanaka  i  nsake  i  na  kaiia  la, 

Two  men  were  kilkd  tt  that  battle,  i.  c.  in  the  time  ol'the  l»allle. 

(b.)     A  j)reposition  /o,  towards  or  at  a  place. 
Iloi  aku  o  Liholiho  i  Kona,  Lihnliho  r(>lurned  to  Kona. 
llalawai  hikou  I  Mahiki,  they  met  al  Alahiki. 

(c.)     As  an  agent  or  means  after  a  neuter  verb. 

Ona  ae  la  i  ka  nica  e  ona  ai. 

He  was  drunk  b}}  or  upon  the  lliinu  to  make  drunk. 

M.ike  lalvoii  /  ka  pololi,   di;'\  died  icith  hunger,   [hy  means  ol'j 


Ka  iiioi  he  akuiii  ke  aloliilohi  o  iia  iiiaka. 

I  thought  li(!  was  a  ^oil  bif  the  briglniic\s.s  of  hi^  eves. 

(cj)  /is  used  as  a  mediuno  of  -transfer  ofappo.si- 
ttiou,  niostl}'  after  passive  or  neuter  verbs;  also  with  ///o,  &^. 
,ihat  is,  tbe  /  implies  that  the  second  noun  becomes  \vha:t 
^he  ftrst  iti,  or  in  some  way  immediately  connected  with  it. 
Inthiscise  -the  article  before  the  nouii  into  wiiich  a 
ihing  is  chai?ged  or  becomes  is  omitied;  as, 

I  ole  e  liaaaia  [iia  iwi}  i  \\v",\  e  pana  iole, 

Tluit  jtbey  iBight  not  b;;  made  [the  bo'i'^^J  a  thi'm  to  shoot,  mice 
vvvitli. 

A  liaiiaia  i  inaki^ii  iawaiy. 
And  it  i?.'as  niai^o  a  fish  hook,  i.  e.  into,  Sic. 
Ivukuluig  kckahi  hale  i  inea  e  horiliioai  ia  ia  i  akuaaurnakua. 
A  cort'iia  house    was  built,  a  thing   to   cause  U'lm  io    become  a 
ftrtisly  god. 

(e  )  f  is  the  medium  by  wbich  thiS  action  of  an  active 
^I'.erb  is  -transfered  to  the  object.  In  this  sense  it  has  no 
si^ieaning  in  English.  Some  sentences  are  so  constructed 
.as  not:to  need  such  a  medium  but  these  will  be  noted  ehse 
\whe'e. 

MooiMia  aku  oia  i  ka  poc  kju,     he  sent  torward      the  spies. 

I^awe  iho  la   ia  i  ke  koi  lipi,         lie  took      the  axe. 

J'uhi  lakou  i  ka  Iw-le,  they  i^et  on  fire     the  liouse. 

(f )  There  are  several  other  senses  in  which  i  is  us^d 
{(ishides  of  rthe  foregoing)  and  perhaps  th^sre  should  be 
.finother  iCase,  Tbe  accusative  oj*  ghjective  in  ancient  or 
liflodero  languages  presuppos.es  an  active  verb  or  prcpo- 
;-sition;  but  .the  preposition  /  of  the  Hawaiian  does  not 
{Correspond  with  the  accusative  of  those  languages;  it  has 
a  far  more  extensive  agency.  M  was  judged  best,  however, 
do  make  but  one  case,  and  explain  iis  diiFerent  uses. 

Note. — The  i  of  the  aui  alo  becomes  ia  before  the  |)roper  isatne 

..of  a  person  and  before  a  |)rononn,  and  is  subject  to  all  the  varieties 

,of  nicanini^  tliat  i  is;  jty,  aloha  a*'  la  ua  kanaka irt  Kaniehanieha,  the 

people iloved   lianiehamiiha.      Ninui  o  Vanekouva  ia   Kalaniopuu, 

^Vancouver  enquired  after  Kalaninpuu. 

7th.     The  aui  mac.  most  ficMpienlly    signifies  at  a  jilacr: 
,iis,  w^<  ka  hale,    af  \\ie    houre.    implvini!;    rest    af   o\-  ii>    ;.' 

.7 


50  PIXLENSIONS    OF    NGIWS. 

place.  It  is  also  used  in  connection  with  motion  towards 
;i  place  and  thus  is  svnon vinous  with  /.  ;;s,  liolo  oiu  mu 
Hilo  he  S'lile.l  Id  IJiio;  biU  \\v,\o  oia  /  i\\\ō,  is  tht-  more 
common  for  no;   tluis, 

Ma  Oahu  aci  i  kukula  liiii.'s  ia'i  ka  liaJt-  u-mq. 

At  Oahu  here  was  first  itr.ih  tiic  houst-  of  woiīhip. 

V\\  aku  ]a  a  kaiui  mn  Waiuiea. 

He  went  up  and  ftni-iht  at  Waiitifa. 

Holo  oia  a  uaf  ma  Kawa.iliae 

Ho  sailed  arui  landed  at  Kawaih.'ii.-. 

Ml  ke  aio  o  Hotpiii   ma,  in  iVoiil  ol  linajiiU  atid  ui.s  ooii)i)aii\ . 

Ma  ke  kariifja  o  Kcopnolani. 

On  the  double  canoe  of  Keopuolani 

Ma  ke  kii  makamaka,  hi)  means  of  going  on  friendly  terms. 

Ma  also  sometimes  before  nouns,  and  often  before  pro- 
nouns signifies  by,  through^  by  riuans  oJ\  or  as  «n  agent  by 
whom    or  which    something   is  done.      It  then    generally 

takes  0  vvith  it  and  la  or  yuii  after;   as,  ma  o la  or  nei, 

by,  through  the  means  of,  &.c. 

8th.  The  aui  hea  [Vocative  case]  is  used  in  calling 
upon  or  addressing  another  or  others.  The  letter  e  marks 
this  case.  It  k  used  before  nouns  and  pronouns,  persons» 
and  things;  as, 

E  Naok;;.  anhoa  on,    Q  Naoka,  where  arc  you. 

E  ka  iin-a  liikivvawf.  i  ka  liai. 

O  rlioii  tiie  j>(;i>oii  quick  to  speak. 

E  na  kanaka  o  Hawaii  a  puni. 

O  ye  men  of  Hawaii  every  where. 

E  na  inakani.'dva  e.    O  friends. 

E  ka  latii.  .-3  ka  honua.  e  ka  mauiia,  e  iva  iiiDaua,  e  kair.i,  alulia 
oukoii. 

O  diou  heaven,  thou  fuiili,  thou  niotnitai!!,  t!iou  ocoaii,  thou 
protector,  farfnvell. 

Note. — 'I'fiis  car>e  ofiou  takos  anolher  e\  as,  e  ke  ahi  c,  O  chief. 

9th.  The  aul  hck  implies  motion  or  a  proceeding  from 
one  person  or  place;  lo  another.  Il  is  Jollowctl  by  anoth- 
«^r  mai.  The  preixisiiion  on  s(»iiirtinios  takes  the  )>lace 
r'A'  m"/,  but  in  that  case  mai,  aku,  (^r  ac  must  follow;  as, 
mai  Hawaii  mai,  from  Hawaii  here;  thus, 
Hele  mai  ia  mai  kona  hale  mai. 

He  ca'ue  from  his  house  [this  way.| 

Hoi  mai  oia  mai  ke  kaua  uiai.   he  returned  //•.o?>?  (he  lialtle. 

No  Maui  mai  oia  i  holo  mai  uci. 

From  Maui  lie  came  here,  this  implies  thai  he  htlon^cil  to  Mau. 


bJ'.CLKNSiONS    OF    NOLNS.  ol 

Som^'liinos  :in  a  is  put  between  tho  mai  and  the  noun; 
;is,  inni  a  Wukea  a  liiki  ia  nei>  from  the  time  oi'W'akea  un- 
til tlio  (ire,S!>t.f.  Mala  ia  a  hiki  i  keia  niatiavva,  from  him 
[liis  tiiuL'j  I')  tiio  j.'fesent  (ioie.  Islu^  a  Kuuiuljoiiua  a  liiki 
ta  \V"ak(M,  h-r,m.  [ttio  time  kV\\  KiJinuiiouuii  until  [the  tini<'. 
ol]  Wakca. 

lOth.  The  nn'i  km  [Ablativf^  Case]  refer-'^  to  some  person 
t>r  thing  accomi)anyinfi:,  eith<:r  vJ  rest  (n-  in  a  >tate  oi"  mo- 
tion;   as, 

Noho  |)u  ke  ;ihi  me  koiia  poc  k'-^iiaAa. 

'I'he  cliifJ"  dwelt  wifh    jai)ior.<jj  liis  |.>('<j|i!". 

Ilele  iiiai  o\a  me  kaiia  \»ii!>j)ie.   ico  Ciiau-  ^r/t//,  liis  \\\\v 

i)\v\()  \n\  inaua  «if  iVhiiiono. 

W' e  conversed  to<iv<l<er  iv'dh  Miiiiono. 

lialaw  i  oia  nic  kaiia  keiki  r/w  ka  \^aiiiiykr>, 

Slu;  iit(;t  ?<)ii/«  lior  Mm  loifli  tears. 

il/e  has  often  the  nteanin;.;  oJ"//i'.  //7,r',  iSjc.   }hus, 

]^le  he  mea  la  kii  puno,   Hke  a  iIki.u  apii;.'li(. 

3//'  ke  alio  o  ke  alii,  p<^'fa  ii«  kanaka 

uls  the  eliaracter  ol'lhe  cliiei".  «i  iho  p<H>pte. 

11th.  The  aiii  ia  is  cie^i^naied  by  the  letter  r,  ivifh  («r 
h>/,  implying  the  agent  olan  action  I'A'iv.r  a  |)assive  verb.  It 
8s  not  used  in  any  other  position  or  ihv  any  other  purpose; 

{IS, 

Ua  kiikuluia  ka  hale  eke  alii. 
The  house  was  built  by  the  chief.  ^ 

Na  dala  i  lioopolioi«  e  ka  poe  pnlii  baka^ 
The  mouev  .sunk  bij  those  smoking  tobaero. 
Ua  hoa|)oiiojrf  oukon  e  ka  poe  pono. 
Ye  are  approved  of  by  the  good. 

Ka  palapaia  i  paij«  e  ke  kahmia,  the  bonk  pr'utcd  by  the  priest. 
Ua  lioohiolota  e  ke  akiia  inaiia. 
It  was  overtlirowii  by  the  powernil  god. 
Ni  keiki  i  kau!aku«  e  ka    poe  naan[)o. 
Th(!  cliil.'Ircn  who  lOtre  made  ibois  of/.»//  tlie  ignoranl. 

OF  ADJECTtVKS, 

§  Iv'o.  Adjectives,  in  ['i;!N\  ;iiian,  nve  ^vovcls  used  in 
some  Way  to  cpialify  noun.s.  They  have  nothing  however 
like  gender,  number  or  case  conn.ected  with  them.  Ha- 
waiians  say;   thus, 


m 


AUJia  i  1  \'F.b. 


Wo  l;riiie  maihni.      a  good  1(01(111  s^  sv.nn,  ;i  i^orJ  n  iin. 

ff(;  waliiiie  muikai,  a  i^oof/  looh'ing  vvoirKin,  a  good  womUii- 

ile  hale  maikai^        a  goor/  house,  &.c. 

He  lio  maikai,  n  fine  looking  Iiors?,  &6. 

§   107.     Adjectives    tend    to    qii;i!iry    tlio    nifa^iiii»;     ol" 
fiouns  by  expressing, 

1st.     f^uaiitity;    as, 
He  nianavva  loifti.  a  lonp^  imic. 
\\ii\vapokoh''y',\slioif,^\)\icx'  [of'iiiu(>.[ 
lie  |)apa  niakulnkolti,  a  fliick  hoard. 

2nd.     Quality;    as, 

He  makani  oluoJu,  a  plcasani  hreezt:. 
Ka  la  inb,  t'le  stormy  (l;ty. 

3rd.     Number;    -as, 

Lehulchu  na  kanaka,  numerous  th^  poopi»'. 

Na  kanaka  itnii,  the  /e;i  /vj/'u. 

.    4{h.    Order;  as, 

Ka  mua  d  !ia  hale,   ihey/rcSi  lionse, 
ICii  /iiA-w  ni  ka  la^   the  seventh  day. 

There  at-e  rriany  more  divisionrj  of  adjectives  vVhiell 
hfefed  not  bb  mentioned. 

§  l(J8.  No  rdjectiveS  in  rfawalian,  except  numeral.tj, 
stand  immfcdiately  before  the  noun  to  tvhich'hey  beloiiii;  and 
which  they  qualifv  H"  an  adjective  j)reced(  s  a  nt)un,  nu- 
iliei^als  exce[)tE^(l,  some  other  words,  as  articles  ot  pro- 
nouns, generally  intervene. 

§  109.  Adjectives  may  be  dividc'd  into  three  classes^ 
tile  divisions  being  based  oil  their  position  in  i-elation  to 
the  noun. 

1st.  Subh  as  stand  imhibdiately  afkr  the  nouns  they 
qualify;    as, 

He  laau  kV6ki^,  a  tall  tree; 

He  kumu  kula,  a  school  teiichcr: 

Ka  loo  ikaika,  tlie  stn.ng  voice. 

Jui  huhu  i/iiaina  loa,  the  flcrce'st  iingci'; 

Kt!  kixuix  piiiepin^,   \\\e  frequent  War. 

Na  wahiiie  haol'e,  ilw  jortigft  women'. 

NoTi:. — The  largest  class  of  adjectives  aie  iised  a.s  above. 

2hd.     Such  as   stand  before  this  nouns  they   qualily;   as, 


ni    Al).ii;r'|-.  vr:S.  ;VJ 

h'l(t   lllllc   ivlll:l.   /our  S;'!io.)|   holISCS. 

Mitnnin'Jiio  Li  miikni.   tiiiilHtiidinOiis  llic  Uciu  fils. 

i\iiiii  k;i  haiiohaiio  <>  k<''lii.  glorlon'^  ilic  in;:|(s',y  nl' iIic  kir.g. 

I'Jiiita  la  ualia  ka  dI'Io  aii;i, 

Fire  i!  ly.-'  perluips  tha  dirfcassioii  l:i*tctl. 

NoTR. — It  may  be  a  {|iUFitinii  wholhrr  tkc  [jlnnsof:  wiili  nuincmn^ 
"o  jiikI  lUiiii  siioiild  Coiik;  into  t!iiS  class;  wncfhtT  tin  y  art-  not 
Verbs  fir  vuiliuh  rather  than  afljfc.tiV(  ?!.  Many  iinMicr.'il  inlj^ciivri) 
jiland  afttT  the  nonn,  providtul  tin;  ?;('nlrt:f;(*  is  ;<«>  (;(Mi.s1rii<-l((l  jis  in 
a'intit  of  it.  It  is  i)ra])(:r  to  say  cha  kale  hula,  or  lit  inuu  hair  ku- 
lu  dm. 

Si'cl.  Silch  as  shiiiu  brforr.  l:!C  iioiiii,  Init  wilh  an  afticle 
or  some  (ju.iliiVin<i  word;  m^, 

Iff' 11  mi  l;ik<  II,  rlnna  kaiu;,  oHnia  waliino, 

'I'hcy  \v(MO  ten,  five  nu-ii,  and  five  wcjnicn. 

Ife  nui  tvA  kanaka  i  iil.;».  vAnvij  \vfi<;  ilic  wwv.  I".st. 

Vd  nui  nii'lii  i  ainoa,   /n.'//My  fhiei's  at(;  uiih<»lit  ial>ii. 

OHHF.aVATlONS  ().\  ADJP.CTIVKS. 

§  1 1 0.  Isl.  a  djectivos  oiOrikr  d'tor.  st;in(!  In'furc  \\\v  nonn, 
niul  IhiHi  an  artich'  atiu  })i'e[>()S)ti()!i  genet',  liy  coim'  be- 
l\V(.'en  the  tuljective  atu!  Hie  noun;   m»i, 

Ī  ke  kaJu  o  ka  niakaiiiki. 

In  the  tkird  year,  lit.   in  tile  third  of  ihe  vvi\\\ 

1  ka   hikii  o  ka  la. 

On  the  seventh  day,  lit.   (in  the  screnl'i  of  lliC  diiv. 

Ka    rdaa  o  ka  hale. 

'VUe ^fir-<t  hon?e.  lit.   ihe.//^.-./  of  the  honse, 

n  ka  hiku  keia  o  ke  kciki. 

Tliis  is  the  sei'f&iith  child-,  lit.   the  ^rvenfh  of,  S:c. 

NoTK.-^TIiis  iei  a  pecniiariiy  in  Hawaiian  |)hraseol(!i;\ .  wvy  coni- 
Inon. 

2n(!.  Some  adjectives /b//^'/^'  their  noims  hnt  w  ilh  an 
(irticle  or  some  word  {)l"enxed  lo  the  adjcelivi^;    as, 

la  manrtwa,  nj;ik(>  iia  kanaka  he  mii  uuil^. 
At  that  time,  there  di(^d  j;eoplc  a  great  man};. 
Kii  ae  la  na  Wahine  he  'il  naha  lakcni. 
There  stood  \\\>  women  2'1  perhaps. 

3rd.  The  ConstruClion  of  some  .sentences  re(jiiires 
these  Chani^^e?  of  the    adjectives  as  to    their  ph.ces;    thus; 

Hele  mai  na  kanaka  he  nui  loa. 

There  cai.ie  men  a  great  rnanif.  \(  7iui  loa.  W(>re  placed  next 
to  kanaka  ami  In-  Nd't  ont,  the  nu^aninjf  wonid  l-.e.  hele  mai  na  kana- 
ka nui  l-ja.  ihert^  came  men  (A'rcri/  great  si/.e.  v.Vc. 


§>  1  l  i .  'l'lip  \\oi\ls//Ciin(h^o  beforLMvoi'ds  Dlhc^rwisp  ruljec' 
riv(\^,  \'(M-y  Apcjiipiilly  have  the  pcwer  (^f  illirnii.tic  n,  or 
ofgivinii;  the  iKlirrtive  ov  wurd  h(  r»re  wiiich  ihey  stand, 
the  pout^!'  ol'a  \cih, —  the  vcfb  to  be  of  otlier  idFirntJition; 
or  o['  pn\i][]\\ir^  out  ;ibs(d!!te!}'  the  qu;ilit\ ,  character  or 
coiuhfioa  <;{  t'se  thiiu:;  or  cii'cumstance  ineni'unied;    a.v, 

La  iiio   U  is  l.'p.d,  he  iao,  it  is  hiul. 

La  m-d\k;u.   it  ū  ,i;"f>!>d.  In:  amikai   it  is  <.••:)(>(!. 

Lkt  ol;u  his  is  I'.x'ixVj:,        /le  oia  k»j!;a.  he  ū  livijig. 

Lo  pokoje,  il:  u  ^Annl,  he  piA-.olc,  ii  is  shoii. 

L'li  loilii  ke  t-bu  long  is  The  road. 

lie  loihi  ko  nia,  *(»//;•  15  the  road. 

I  '(7  iikivi  ka  papa,  broad  ■«  tho  t);;ar(i. 

Jlei\ki:;i  ka  j-apsK  d/'O^f,' »5  t!io  board. 

^'a  |)a!aiiale!<)  ia,  he  ?".•■;  ia/.y, 

Jle  |;(|,<'!ii  kuiiaka  ia,     //e  is/.i  nmrdcrcr. 

(/■/  litihu  il,  he  is  jiMi-ry,  he  huhu  kons,  f-e  is  angry. 

NnTK  — 7'h(  :-■(,•  are  as  .«iror^.g;  a^:c|•t!Ol;S'.ti•  assevfaafions  as  dio  laii- 
gaago  is  ca[)HhJe  of.  nnc  indeed  as  .s'roag  as  tiiey  conid  be  in  anV 
Iuii|i;u;igr3. 

§  1  ri.  No'.in.s  are  often  tur'sed  into  adjectives  by  be- 
ing pbiced  iinn>edi^ite!y  alter  (^liei-  nouns,  in  whicii  ca.se, 
the  bist  noiiu  qt!;ibile?  the  first  as  an  aJJectivc;    as, 

He  kuiiiu  kuli(,  a  school  t-'^aoher. 

Ka  haie  poiutku,   ■      the  sloiic  house. 

lie  kaaakit  fyaiicnl.  a  rich  niaa. 

lie  tiuiitao  mnioka.  a  nt<jn''s  v,y,\\i'uyn. 

§  1  13.  N'aJiy  adjectives  are  used  as  nonns  bv  l-dung 
articles  bef  re  them;  as,    . 

\'\n  V,  u!t  aku  ka  naau/ni  i  ka  pat  naaupo. 

Ir  die  ig\iayant  uian  teaches  Ike  ignorant  nien. 

Ho  l(j;ie  ole  ke  kali,  ti.e  deaf  maa  hears  not. 

CO.\!  !\\  !  1 1  SO  N  Ōl"  A  i  ).l  MCT  i  V  \\^. 
§  HI.  Adjecl'ves  hav(!  thrt^e  de^ii-ees  of  coinpnrison  in 
C'Mjnnon  ir^e.  Vi'^.  the  Posifivc,  Comparative,  and  •Supcr/o' 
tioe  V\\{i  Conijxtratiir,  h(n\ever,  h;  .s  Ihiee  snialler  de- 
grees within  itself  very  distinct.  These  degrees  are  foini- 
ed  by  the  addition  of  (  ther  words;  as, 

l*r>sitive,  I'nkM,  slirnt. 

I  iN^ko  tki,  a  hide  short. 

^ 'i>in|);iriitive,       -.  P-ik'»  ;<e„  •    s'lerter, 

f  IN>ko  iki  ae,         shorlei  >iil!. 

Sii|icri;ili\-e.  Tul.t»  !(.;i.  sh<.rt»sl.    verv  shoil. 


or   A  n.i  rc'ii  \  I 


no 


(J!!iliil,tlnli   ;iio 


;!ii.'  i>  l.ct- 


IVoTR. — Sometimes  I'onoifio.  m;iy  he  nscd  |mi-  !'ol,(><ir 
Other   Ibrms  oi'  e\!)r!rrsin'.!;    'hi<-,"(\;s<' 
sucii  as  these; 

Oi  iiku  kohl  minma  n  k(  h. 

Tilis  .'rnes  fvrUUiril  \n'in\-i:  !it;i1.   i.   c.   till;;  (  \'-"c;|s  th; 

tcr  iliaii  I.'ki!. 

\Mi  k(!l;i,  iiuku  I<(m;!. 

T.iat  is  great,  this  is  lit;!;',  i.  c.  that  i-<  irz-c./Vr  t!i;iii  i!ii-i. 

OF  .\ijmi:r  \L  A  D.ii :',:'!' i\!:s. 

>^  '15.  .\i]i!!ei',il  Ailjeetives  ni  iv  'ne  divi.lcd  iht'.>  tiiree 
chisses;    the  Curdiivil,  Ordinil  jud  Disfribi/'ivc. 

1st.  The  C i.rdifi'il  numbc-s  are  ti!iinl)M's  uspu  in  c  )tiiit- 
ing,   as,  akaJii,  clua,  c.kidu,    &.c.     one,  two.  thi-<'e. 

2n'l.  The  Ordinnl  itum'w.rs  afe  iiuinheis  used  in  e\f)ress- 
ing  the  order  of  succession;  na,  ka  mua,  kalau,  ke  k<dti., 
S^c.  first,  second,  tinrd. 

3rd.  The  Ordinals  p.re  f.>rmed  hy  preiixini!' tlie  definite 
article  ka  or  ke  to  the  simple  (Jardin:d. 

4th.   The  Cardinal  Numbers.     The  OrJinid    Nunibei's. 

Kahi.   aknlii,  ftiie.  kii  ww.n. 

Liia,   ali;i.   clua,  two,  ka  ln;i. 

Kohl,  akolii,  ekohi,  tlircf.  ke  Imlii. 

four,  ka  iia. 

rive,  ka  limn, 

t;i.\,  !•  e  0!io. 

seven,  ka  hi!ai, 

ei,'.rht,  ka  \\;dn, 

nine,  ka  iwa. 

tv'n,  kii  1  mi, 

elfvon,  l;a  UinikiimamJiknin, 

twelve,  ka  nmikuniamalua. 

tliirtciii.  !vi!  liinikv.man.akolii, 

foiiiiccM,  ka  umi !>•'• 

Hhcrii.  k;i  ntni li;:i;! 


Ila.  aha.  eiia, 

Lima,  alima.  elima, 

Ono,  aono.  eoiio. 

Hiku,  al'.iki!.  ciiikv:, 

Wahi.  awalii.  rvvalu 

Iwa,  aiv»a,  tiwa, 

Umi, 

Umikuniar.iaka'ii, 

TJmikuma:iiaIua, 

Umikumamiikolii, 

Umiknmamaha. 

Umikumanuiiiina, 

Urnikumamaono. 

Umikumamaliikn, 

Umikiiinamawahi. 

Umiknmamaiwa, 

Iwiikaiiia. 


si.vKH'ii.  k;i  mm 

Sfventfen.  Iv:i  mni 

(^i^hlem.  ka  mni  

nineteen,  ka  umi  


(l!!0. 

hikii 
wain 
i  "•\  a , 


the  Hist, 

the  second. 

tlic  third. 

the  fourth. 

ihe  fiOh. 

tiie  sixth. 

t':e  scvenlli. 

!h<;  ti'.^lh. 

tfiO  ninth, 

the  tenth. 

the  I  Itfi. 

tlie  I'^th. 

tlie  !:)ii  . 

tlie   It!!. 

t'le   |.")th. 

il:e    K^lh. 

.      V.w   \~i\\\, 

.     t!ie   !>th. 

the  J9fh. 

the  :^()th. 


, twenty,   ka  iwakalua, 

Isvakahiaknmamakahi,  twenty  one,  k;i  ivvakahia —  knln,    the  2Ist 
Iwakalnakunamahia,  tkventy  two,      ka  iwakajna —  hia.     du;  •*'^Jn(i 


;56  OK  Ai).iECTivi:\s. 

'.Kaiiiilvolii.  thirly,  kc  k;Hiiilvi»Iii.  iIk-  oiiiia. 

Kiiiial<<)liikMiiiiini:ik:ilii,  thirlj'  one,  ke  kaii;ik(tJnkiini;miiikalii.tlu'  -S  I.Kt. 

3\aii!ik(»lukiiiiiiimaliKi,   tliirh'  two,  kc;  kaiiakolu  —. lua,  tin."  ;i-2ii.(|, 

Kaiiaiia,  forty,  ke  kaiiaha,  the  'Unh- 

Kaiialiakiitiiaiuakyld.  (uiiy  one,  ke  kanaliiiknin^aniakahi,  the  'J  1st 
Kaiiahakiiiuaiiia^iii..  lotty  two.  >kc  kaiiaha  -— -^ —  lua,  tiie  'l-2ii<,l. 
Kaiiahma^  (ifiy,    ke  kaiialiina.  the  50th, 

Kanahiiiaki,t!!!.ian);jk-ahi,     fifty  one,  .ke  kanahtna-- kalii,   the5isl. 

KaiiahiijakiiiiiaiJialiita.,  iM'iy  two,  ke  katialiina — ==— hia,  the  •j-iiK'j. 
KaiuKiiio,  -feixty,    ke  kaiiaoiio,  the  (iOlh.. 

J\aiiao;okiiina!nakahi.  ,^.ixtv  one,  ke  kanaoiiv»kii!>.iai!iakahi,  thctilst. 
Kaiiaonokuniaiuahuj.  ,si\tv  two,  ke  kaiiaoMf» — ^--|ua,  the  fv^nrl. 
Kaiiahikii.  .sev.<»iity,    ke-  kanahikii,  the  70tii., 

Kaiiahikiikiiiiiatiiakahi.  s>eveiity  orw^,  ke  kanahiku  —  kahi.  t!:(j7lst. 
K'atiHhikukiiiiiJjina'iiiu,  gt.'venty  tw(s,  ke  kaiiahiku  --=-  lua,  the  ~r2\\A. 
'Kaiiiiwah;*.,  euthtv,       ke  katiawahi,  the  8()th, 

^vanawali:ikiiiiii.-u«:§:kahi,  eii^hty  one,  ke  kaiiav\ahi  —  kahi,  tlve  Sisl.. 
Kaiiawahiknni;iiu;tijiia,  eighty  two.,  ke  kaiiawahi^-^^- hia.  the  8-2n(l. 
avaiiaivva,  ninety,     ke  kanaiwa,  the  ftOtii. 

KanaiwakiiMianiakahi,  ninety  ont%  ke  kanaiwa -=- kahi.,  tlw^^jlst., 
'Kanaiwakiuuiania^ita,  ninetry  two,  ke  kanaiwa — lua,  thef)-2nd. 
Maneri,  hundred,    ka  h«itcri,  the  li)Olh, 

{•'hia  haneiri.,  two  htinthed,    ka  iua  o  ka  haupri,       the  -idOth, 

'Ekohi  hantiti^  fhree  hundred,    ke  ko*iu  (►  ka  ha?iieri,    the  3()()th. 

"Tausaiii.  thiuifeant'L,    ke  tatjsani,  the'   I.OdOth, 

Ehia  tatisauL,  two  thouwand,    ka  hm  o  ka  tau*.ani,  the  •2.0()()th.. 

'Mihona,  million,    ka  :ni:!i(»na,  the  1 .00.'),()()()tli, 

5th.     TUe  Dis'tribiihve  arc  those  which  <i|)j)ortion  out  a 
fiitimber  1«  an  iiidividiiai.      They  nre  ihvmed    by  |)reiix'r.g 
?the  sylhdite  /xf  'io  l!ie  j-iuiple  curdiiaal  niimbe<j's:    thiiS; 
pakahi,  one  by  o'le,,  o'le  apiece,     |)aunii  hy  l<'ns,   ten  each, 
-palua,   hy  two.s,   two  (;aeh.  pakanaha,   hy  ioitvs. 

tpakoiJu,   bv  threes,   tiiree  e.iifjh,         pahan^'ri,   l)y  hi'n(ireds. 
i^)aha.,   by  four^s;,  patansani,  by   th(jusaiid.s. 

;j)a  lima,  by  tjves, 

NoTK — The  syliabh; /r«  is  .sonietiuios  preli\(>d  to  •ex|ir<>os //(iw 
mony:  how  mnny  fold}  a^,  holiia!  ho'w  ufany  loki.-'  atis.  koknlu, 
.thr<!e  lohJ^  tWi,  Tlic  ,vvord  wiuhulu  is  used  to  e.xjjrcss  a  period  i\f 
Hen  days 

OBSEIIVATIONS  ON  THE  NUMCfvAL  AMECTIVES. 

§  116.  ]st.  T'he  original  cai%!inal  niimbcfs  uve/athi, 
dna,  kidh,  iS,ui.  The  a  or  c  is  prefixed  accordinij;  to  the 
.^truGture  o/  the  seiiiteuce  or  the  kind  oj"  iutei:rogativc  used 


<»1'     PKO.NCHiNS.  57 

ii\  asking  the  question.  W  the  inteirogative  be  ah/u,  how 
many?  the  answer  will  irenerally  be^in  u/iia,  akolu,  ahiku; 
but  it"  the  question  be  fi^sked  by  ehia,  how  mnny?  the  an- 
swer will  generally  begin  with,  elu(i,ekolu,  eliiku,   &.c. 

2ntl.  The  Ordinal  has  the  deiinite  article  prefixed  to 
the  simple  cardinal  numbers. 

3rd.  jPormerlv,  in  counting,  the  Havvaiiims,  when  they 
i-eachetl  the  number  Jorft/,  turned  back  again  and  com- 
menced at  one  and  counted  another  forty,  and  so  on  till 
they  laid  aside  ten  forties;  these  ten  forties  they  called 
a  /o.u,  400.  It  is  a  rrodern  improvement  that  the  word 
k((na  has  been  prefixed  to  li7m(,  o/io,  hiku,  etc.,  to  express 
fifty,  sixty,  seventy,  e-tc. 

4th.  The  words  ha?ien,  hundred,  Uiusuni,  thousand,  ?»///- 
ana,  million,  have  been  introduced  from  the  Engliah  as  con- 
venient for  arithmetical  purposes.  At  the  })resent  time 
they  numerate  by  units,  tens,  hundreds,  thousands,  etc. 

5th.  The  aiicient  numeration  table  written  out  would 
ibe  as  follows; 

Aha  kahi,  4       units,  are 

Umi  kauiia,         ten    fours,  — 

Umi  kanaha,       ten    fortys,  — 

Umi  lau,  ten    400s,  — 

Umi  mano,         ten    4,000«,  — 

Umi  kini,  ten   40,000s,  — 

OF  PRONOUNS. 

§  117.  A  Pronoun  is  a  word  tha-t  standi,  in  general^ 
in  the  place  of  a  noun;  but  in  Hawaiian,  besides  that,  it 
Js  used  for  various  other  specific  purposes. 

1st.  Lt  often  supplies  the  place  of  the  verb  to  be  [\wd. 
.o{ possession;   as, 

JSo  ivai  keia  papale?  whose  is  this  hat?  Ao'i^,  it  is  mine. 

He  niai  maoli  ko'u,  1  am  really  sick,  lit.  real  sickness  is  mine. 

2nd.    It  stands  for  other  auxiliary  verbs;   as, 
JSau  e  ao  mai  ia  makou.   it  belongs  to  you  to  reprove  us. 
He  kapa  maenjae  ko'u. 
I  have  a  clean  garment,  lit.  a  clean,  d.c.  is  of  me. 

3rd.  It  is  used  for  expressing  many  shades  of  meaning 
which  in  other  languages  are  expressed  bv  paiticles  or 
,(Pther  parts  of  speech. 

8 


kaunpi. 

4. 

kanaliaj 

40. 

lau. 

400. 

mano, 

4.000. 

kini, 

40.000. 

leluij 

400,000 

TjB  of     I'KOxNOUNJS. 

la  la  e  kilo  nna  i  ka  uala. 

While  he  ivas  acting  the  sorcerer  with  potatoes. 

Ekolu  a'w  olelo  |m  ana  me  ia. 

Three  times  havt  /spoken  with  him. 

§  118.  Much  of  the  strength,  definiteness  and  precrs- 
ion  of  the  language  depends  on  the  right  i]se  of  the  pro- 
nouns. And  on  account  of  the  various  uses  of  the  pro- 
noun and  its  degree  of  flexibility,  the  verb  to  be^  and  other 
auxiliaries,  can  be  much  easier  dispensed  with  than  though 
it  were  otherwise. 

§  119.  There  are  three  classes  of  Pronouns,  viz.— 
The  Pei'sonal,  the  Prefix,  and  the  Interrogative.  There 
are  no  Relative  Pronouns,  though  in  translating  from  Ha- 
waiian into  English  there  are  several  words  which  we 
are  obliged  to  translate  as  though  they  were  Relatives. 

§  120.  Pronouns  have  three  ipersons,  first,  second  and 
third.  They  have  three  numbers;  viz.  Singular,  Dual 
and  Plural. 

Pronouns  have  no  distinction  of  gender;  nor  do  they 
scarcely  admit  of  a  neuter  gender  at  all. 

Pronouns  have  all  the  cases  that  nouns  have. 

OF  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

§  121.  Personal  Pronouns,  relate  to  persons  or  person- 
ified objects. 

The  Singular  number  refers  to  but  one  object. 
The  Dual,         to  two  and  only  two. 
The  Plural,      to  any  number  above  two. 

§  122.    The  Pronouns  are, 

SlNGUl,AR. 

Au,  wau,  or  with  the  o  emphatic  o  au,  o  wau,  1. 

Oe,         --------  thou. 

Ia,  -          -         -          -----     -  he,  she,  il. 

DUAL. 

Maua,  we  two,  speaking  to  a  third  person  of  myself  and  another. 
Kaua,    we  two,  including  myself  and  the  person  addressed. 
Olua,    you  two. 
Lakou,  they  two. 


*>(      PRONOUNS.  59 

PU'RAl,. 
Makou,  wo,   moaning  niysolf  and  party,  and  o.xclnding  llic  [kt- 
^i^ons  addressed. 

Kakoii,   we,  inoludiiiii:  niys^'lf  and  the  poisons  addros*M:d^ 
Oukou,  ye  or  yen. 
Lakou,  they. 
11  ai,       another. 

§  123.  The  orthography  of  the  first  person  as  it  is  now 
\ised  in  writing  and  printing,  looks  unnecessarily  heavy. 
The  simple  form  au  wi(h  the  emphatic  o,  oau  is  all  tliat 
properly  belongs  to  it.  Besides,  the  o  emphatic  n(;ed  not 
'be  joined  with  cm  any  more  than  other  words  or  any  of 
the  other  pronouns.  The  insertion  of  the  w  seems  en- 
tirely unnecessary.  The  sound  wcm  is  occasioned  by  the 
quick  succession  of  o  and  au  constituting  a  triphthong. — 
But  it  being  admitted  that  a  w  belongs  to  th^  word,  the  o 
"emphatic  being  prefixed  it  becomes  what  it  apjD«ars  mvaw, 
whereas,  o  an  is  all  that  need  be  written  even  with  the  o 
emphatic.  In  declining  au  there  will  appear  no  phK-e  \'o\ 
the  w  in  any  of  the  oblique  cases.     See  §  7,  note. 

§  124.  1st.    First  Pkrson  Singular. 

Aui  kunni.  au,  wau,                       I. 

Ani  pili,  o'u,  a'u.  of  me. 

Aui  iki,  ko'u,  ka'u.                  miipe. 

Aui  paewa.  no'u,  na'u,  for  me,  l>elonging  to  me 

Aui  alo,  Ha'u,  me,  to  me, 

Aui  moe,  ma  o'u  la.  i)y  me,  by  means  of  mo 

Aui  hea.  -^ 

Aui  hele,  mai  o'u  la.  from  me, 

Aui  hui.  me  au,  with  me,  Hke  me.  as  \. 

Aui  ia,  e  au,  by  me,  [as  an  ag<Mii  ] 

2nd.     First  Person  Dual.     First  form. 

Maua,  we  two,  cvcluding  the  persons  addressed. 
Aui  kumu,         maua,  we  two. 

Aui  pili,  o  maua,  a  maua,      of  us  two. 

Aui  iki,  ko  maua,  ka  maua,    our  two'.s. 

Aui  paewa,        no  maua,  na  maua,  for  us  two. 
Aui  alo,  ia  maua,  us  two,  to  ns  two. 

Aui  moe,  ma  o  maua  la.  by  us  two,  by   means  of  ns  two 

Aui  hea,  

Aui  hele,  mai  maua.  iVom  us  two. 

Aui  hui.  me  maua.  with  us  two. 

Aui  ia.  1^  maua.  b\-  us  two  |as  Miicnts  ) 


1)0  OF     PR  ON ()U IN 8; 

3rd.     First  Phrson  Dual.     Second  I'orni. 

Kaita,  we  two,  including  the  person  addressed. 


Aui  kumu, 

kaua, 

we  two,  you  and  1; 

Aui  pili, 

o  kaua,  a  kaiia, 

of  us  two. 

Aui  iki, 

kd  katra,*  ka  kaua, 

our  two's. 

Aui  paeWa, 

no  kaua,  \ni  k^ua. 

for  us  two. 

Aui  alo. 

ia  kaua. 

us  two,  to  us  two; 

Aui  moe. 

nia  kaua, 

by  us  two. 

Aui  hea. 

e  kaua. 

0  we  two. 

Aui  hele, 

mai  kaua. 

from  us  two. 

Aui  hui. 

me  kaua. 

with  us  two. 

Aui  ia, 

e  kaua, 

by  us  two,  &c. 

4th.     F 

iRST  Person  Plur.-^l. 

First  form. 

Makou,  \re,  eicludiiig  the 

persons  addressed.- 

Aui  kumu, 

makou, 

we. 

Aui  pili. 

o  makoid.  a  makou. 

of  iiS. 

Aui  iki, 

kd  makou,  ka  makou, 

ours. 

Aui  paewa, 

no  makou.  na  makou. 

for  us. 

Aui  alo, 

ia  makoii, 

us,  to  us. 

Aui  moe, 

rila  o  mdkdu  la, 

thrdugh  or  by  us. 

Aui  hea, 
Aui  hele, 

mai  o  makou  akd, 

from  US. 

Aui  hui, 

me  mdkou, 

with  us. 

Aui  ia, 

e  makou. 

by  us. 

5th.      F 

IRST  Person  J^lurAl. 

Second  forni. 

Kakou, 

we,  including  the  SpeakBi 

■  and  persons  addresse 

Alii  kumu. 

kakou. 

we. 

Aui  pili. 

o  kakou,  a  kakou. 

of  us. 

Aui  iki, 

no  kakou,  na  kakdu. 

ours. 

Aui  paewa, 

no  kakou,  na  kakou, 

for  lis. 

Aui  alo, 

ia  kakdu, 

u§,  to  us. 

Aui  moe. 

ma  d  kakou  la. 

through  us. 

Aui  hea. 

e  kakdu. 

O  ^Ve. 

Aui  hele. 

mai  o  kakou  aku, 

from  us. 

Aui  hui. 

me  kakou, 

^vith  us. 

Aui  ia, 

e  kakou, 

by  us. 

'i 


REMARKS  On  THE  PARADIGM  OF  THE  FIRST  PERSON; 

§125.  Most  of  the  remarks  on  the  Paradigrn  of  the 
lioun  will  apply  to  the  pronouri;  but  in  some  things  it  is 
hecessary  to  be  more  particiilar. 

1st.  In  the  foregoing  paradigm,  all  the  little  words 
that  are  sometimes  found  in  connection  with  the  different 


ul'     I'UONUUNS.  (il 

l-nses   lire  not    put  clown;  hut    ilicv  will  he   accoutitod  lor 
among  other  p:irts  ol".s[)eech. 

2nd.  All  the  definitions  are  not  ain.vcd  to  ilio  different 
cases  that  might  be.  The  more  general  ones  are  insert- 
ed. The  others  may  be  learned  from  the  examples  that 
may  be  inserted. 

3rd.  Some  of  the  cases  are  exchanj^ed  for  each  othei^ 
i.  e.  take  each  others  phice;  viz.  the  aui  iki  for  the  aui 
pill;  the  aui  paewa  for  the  aui  aio\  the  aui  alo  fur  the  aui 
hui,  etc. 

4th.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  aui  moc  and  the  aid 
hele  are  compounded  sometimes  with  their  own  preposi- 
tion and  that  of  the  aui  pili. 

§  126.  1st.  There  is  nothing  diffei^ent  in  the  definition 
of  the  A.ui  knmit  [Nominative  Case]  from,  the  nominative 
case  in  any  language,  except  that  niaiiy  a  nominative 
case  in  Hawaiian  has  no  verb  expressed  or  implied;  but 
the  declai'ation  oi-  affirmation  is  made  by  some  emphatic 
or  affirmative  particle,  or  has  the  afHrnuition  in  ilsell";  as, 

He  alii  mana  rVd  o  Kamehameha. 
Kamehaineha  teas  indeed  a  powerful  chief. 
Ua  manaoia  he  inea  make  ka  palapala. 
It  was  thought  instruction  was  a  deailly  thing. 

2nd.  Aui  pili  o^u  and  a'u  are  both  frequently  used,  but 
not  in  i'clation  to  the  same  thing.  The  Hawaiians  say,  he 
aina  o'?<,  he  kapa  o'w,  lami  of  vfiine,  kapa  of  mifia;  but  keiki 
«'m,  ka  palapala  a'w,  a  child  of  mine,  a  writing  of  mine. — 
The  meaning  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  prefixed  pronoun.^ 
of  the  aui  i/ci;  viz.  ko'u  aina,  ko'u  kapa,  ka'u  keiki,  ka'ii 
palapala. 

Ka  hana  a'w  i  ike  ai. 

Lit.  The  work  qfmC,  to  know,  the  work  which  Tkncw. 

E  hai  oe  i  keta  kumu  nianao  o'w. 
■  Do  you  declare  this  opinion  of  mine. 

Hookahi  a'u  ninau  ana. 

Once  of  me  the  asking,  i.  e.  once  /asked. 

Hookahi  o'w  kamaiUo  ana  mc  na  haumana. 

Once  ihe  conversation  of  mt  with  the  scholars,  i.  o.  once  I  had 
•a  conversation,  <Scq.. 

Aole  he  haneri  lio  o\i. 

There  is  not  of  me  a  hundred  horses,  i.  e.    /  have  not,  etc. 


^)*i  v)F     PRONOUNS. 

Aole  o'w  ike  i  ka  lawaia. 

There  is  not  of  me  kiiovvledgo  of  the  fisherman,  that  is,  1  do  noi 
know,  itc. 

Aole  loa  a'n  niea  oiio,  nothinj:»-  at  all  of  mine  is  sweet. 

3rd.     J.Mi  iki,   ko'ti,   ka'ii,  this  has   greater    variety  of 
meaning  and  strength  of  expression  than  the  aui  pili;  as, 

Eia  no  kc(\i  e  hoike  aku  ia  oe» 

Lit.  here  is  mine  to  tell  you,  here  is  ivhat  I  have  to  tell  you. 

lie  kapa  n^aemae  ko\i. 

Lit.  a  clean  kftpa  is  mine,,  1  have  a  clean  kapa. 

O  ko'u  wale  no  koe. 

Lit.  of  nU  Only  the  remainder,  the  remainder  is  num. 

He  niea  hoakuka  k6\i  ia  oe. 

Lit.  a  thing  to  explain  is  mine  to  you,   I  have  an  e.\|»lanation  fn 
hiake  to  you. 

O  oe  no  kan  i  kii  mai  nei. 

Lit.  you  indeed  are  mint  to  fetch,  you  arc  the  person  I  came  to 
fetch. 

Aole  he  hele  kolohe  ka'ii. 

Lit.    not  a  mischievous  goitig  is  mine,   /«wi  not  going  for  mis- 
chief, itc. 

.4th.  Aui  paetua,  no^n,  na'u,  this  is  often  nsed  like  the 
two  above;  but  besides,  it  implies  also,  duty,  office,  obJi- 
gatio/i. 

Aole  na^n  e  malama   i  ka  nnia. 

Lit.  it  is  not /of  me  to  takt;  care  of  the  land,   i.  e.  not  my  office, 
duty,  Szc. 

Nui  ko'u  hcvvai,  aole  no  hai,  na'u  no. 
Great  is  my  fault,  not  of  another  il  is  my  oivn. 
Nau  no  ia  palapala,  aole  na\i. 
Thine  is  that  vvritwig,  it  is  not  mine. 
Aole  na'u,  nA  ke  knnawai. 
It  is  not  of  my  doing,  the  law  has  done  it. 
H(^  mea  hilahila  ia  wo'w,  it  was  a  shameful  thing /o/  me,  ii  made.  etc. 
Heaha  kou  manao  wo'w?  what  is  your  opinion  of  me} 

5th.  It  might  be  asked  here,  if  all  these  cases  may. 
serve,  as  they  sometimes  appear  to  do  for  nominatives  to 
verbs  as  well  as  the  nominative  itself?  It  must  be  answer- 
ed that  in  certain  respects  they  do,  and  that  too  in  con- 
formity with  the  laws  of  other  languages.  But  for  an  ex- 
planation, see  Syntax. 

6th.     Aui  (do.  This  rase  is  used  after  an  active  verb  or 


OF     PRONOUNS.  fio 

preposition;    it    is   Ireciuently   usetl  wliere   the  <iui  j>ili  or 
aui  iki  might  be  used;  as, 

Eia  ke  kaiioha  a  ke  kupapJiu  iau. 

Here  is  the  charge  of  the  (kceased  to  me. 

Ua  hoopunipniii  inai  oiua  ic/'w,  you  two  have  <|r('.'ive(l  me. 

No  keaha,  aole  on  hai  miia  mai  iciu! 

Wliy  did  you  not  tell  me  before? 

Kii  koke  iho  la  oia  ia\i,  he  came  quickly /b/-  me. 

Ua  loaa  iau  keia  niau  mea,  J  have  received  iht.se  things. 

O  na  aina  ia^u  ponoi,  o  kou  aina  ia. 

The  lands  belonging  to  myself,  they  shall  be  }(>urs. 

The  ia  of  this  case  sometimes  becomes  io,  especially 
alter  a  verb  of  tiiotion;  as,  i  hele  mai  oia  iu'u  nei,  he 
came  to  me  here.  Aia  wu  la,  iin  kiipu,  ua  \di\\,  for  me  in- 
deed it  has  sprouted,  the  leaf  has  appeared.  The  "  m 
stands  before  pronouns  and  names  of  persons  as  /  does 
before  common  nouns.  See  105,  6. — It  stands  as  the  sign 
of  the  Objective  or  Accusative  Case  even  after  an  iictive 
verb,  ill  which  case  it  has  no  meaning.  But  it  is  also 
used  after  neuter  or  intransitive  verbs,  and  then  ia  signi- 
fies the  agent.,  time.,  place,  manner.,  instrument.,  etc. 

7th.  Aui  moe\  this  case  is  known  by  the  syllable  ma. 
Before  nouns  ma  generally  signifies  rest  at  or  in  a  place, 
or  motion  towards  a  place.  Sometimes  it  si;2fnifies  through., 
by  means  of  ect.  Before  pronouns  this  last  meaning  is  a 
common  one.  It  is  often  followed  by  nei  or  la;  as,  ma 
o'u  nei,  by  me,  through  my  agency  or  means;  so  in  all  the 
persons,  where  it  is  formed  by  ma  being  prefixed  to  the 
Aui  pili;    as. 

Ma  o\i  la  ua  maruliia  ke  kulanakauhalc. 

Tlirough  me  the  city  was  in  peace. 

Ma  o'u  nei  e  noho  luna  ana  oia. 

Through  me  is  his  office  of  luna. 

Ma  o'u  la  i  hooniaki  ai  oia  i  kanaka. 

By  me  he  governed  the  people. 

No  ka  mea.  ma  o'u  net  kou  waiwai,  for  by  me  is  your  [)roperty. 

8th.  Aui  hea.  This  case  is  equivalent  to  the  A'ocative 
cases  of  Latin  and  Greek.  It  is  represented  by  the  letter 
e  before  the  person  or  thing  called  upon  and  frequently  [ol-, 
lowed  by  another  e;  as,  e  ke  Alii  e,  0  A7/zg,  e  kuu  makua» 
0  my  father.     It  is  seldom  used  in  the  first  person,  except 


64  OF    PRONOUNS. 

when  a  {person  calls  upon  his  son!  or  personifies  some  of 
the  members  of  his  body,  in  which  case  perhaps  it  is  rath- 
er the  second  person  than  the  first;   as, 

E  o\i  uhane,  ihea  oe  e  hele  ai?  O  my  soul,  whither  goest  thou? 

Ji!  ko'u  lima  e,  mai  kolohe  oe,    O  my  hand,  be  not  nusciiievuus. 

9th.  Aui  hele.  This  case  is  represented  by  the  syllable 
mai,  which  signifies  from  one  person  or  place  to  another. 
And  the  idea  is,  unless  other  words  are  connected  with  the 
subjects,  that  the  movement  is  towards  the  speaker.  The 
word  before  which  it  is  used  is  frequently  followed  by 
another  mai  or  aku  or  ae  according  to  the  direction  ot 
the  motion.  The  mai  preceding  the  noun  or  pronoun 
is  the  one  that  s'ignifies  from;  the  words  following  point 
in  some  degree  the  direction  of  the  motion;  thus,  mai  La- 
hina,  signifies  from  Lahaina  indefinitely.  Mai  Lahaina 
mai,  implies  that  the  speaker  is  at  another  place  than  La- 
haina, and  that  the  person  or  thing  has  come  from  Lahaina 
towards  or  to  the  place  where  he  is.  Mai  Lahaina  aku,  im- 
plies that  the  speaker  is  at  Lahaina,  but  the  subject  was 
at  Lahaina  and  departed  in  a  direction  opposite  to  the 
speaker.  Mai  Lahaina  nei  aJcu,  implies  that  the  speaker 
is  at  Lahaina,  but  the  subject  has  departed  from  Lahaina 
off  to  some  other  place.  Mai  Lahaina  ae,  implies  a  move- 
ment from  Lahaina  in  any  direction.  Sometimes  the  pre- 
position from,  in  English,,  is  made  :by  no  or  ma  prefixed 
and  mat  after;  as,  ma  ia  kuauhau  jnai,Jrom  that  genealogy; 
m  Hawaii  mai  kela,  that  person  w^s  fro7n  [belonged  to] 
Hawaii  here. 

Hoi  lakou  mai  du  aku,  they  retmned  from  me. 

Ua  liuli  oukou  mai  o^u  aku,  you  have  turned  frojn  me  away. 

10th.  Aui  hui.  Me\^i\\Q  representative  of  this  ease^ 
;ajid  before  a  pronoun  it  generally  signifies  luith,  in  compa- 
iiJ/  with,  along  with,  also  as,  like,  ect.  It  rarely  means  with 
^n  the  sense  of  insirument  or  agent. 

I  like  11W  ail  nei  ko  lakou  riui. 

Ltxke  mine  was  their  size,  like  me  were  they  h'  size. 

I  riolio  umi  ai  lakou  me  au,  that  they  may  dwell  with  nie. 

Ka  ninau  no  kana  olelo  ana  me  an. 

The  question  concernino  his  talk  tvith  me. 

Me  an  i  paio  ai  nianiua.  pela  e  paio  hou  ai. 

^4s  /strove  before,  so  1  shall  slrive  again 


t)i.    lMluN()lJ^^s.  .  65 

Hill.  Aui  /a.  Tliis  case  is  so  called  lium  tlie  liicl  ihat 
fi  is  always  after  a  passive  verb  which  is  Ibrmcd  by  addin»' 
id  to  the  verb,  and  sii^nifies  the  agent  by  which  a  thing  is 
done;   the  agents  in  this  case  are  i^cnevnWy  persons ;  as, 

Ua  pepchiia  oia  e  au,  he  was  killed  by  me. 

A  |)au  ka  niiiau  i  ka  ncinnia  e  au. 

WlicM  the  ([uestion  has  all  been  looked  at  by  me. 

Ua  kukuluia  ka  luakini  e  au,  the  temple  toas  buill  by  me. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  DUAL  NUMBER  OF  THE  FIRST 

PERSON. 

§  127.  The  First  person  has  iivo  forms  The  first 
form  maua,.  supposes  that  I  speak  of  ray  self  and  one  other 
person,  to  others. 

1st.  Aid  kumu,  maua,  we  two,  excluding  the  person  or 
persons  addressed.  It  often  takes  the  0  emphatic,  0 
maua;   as, 

Nolaila  maua  i  hooikaika  ai. 

For  this,  ive  two  have  been  persevering. 

0  maua  no  ka  mca  hoike,  ive  two  are  the  witnesses. 

2nd.    The  Aui  pill,  is  like  the  aid  pili  oi  the  singular. 

Ma  ke  alanui  a  maua  i  hole  ai. 

On  the  road  of  its  two  to  travel,  on  the  road  lue  two  traveled. 

3rd.    The  Aui  iki,  is  also  like  the  same  case  singular 

He  hale  noho  ko  maua,  we  two  have  a  house. 

Ka  maua  ia  palapala  ainaj  that  map  is  ours  [of  us  two.] 

4  th.  Auipaeiva. 

1  moku  no  maua  e  holo  ai,  a  ship  for  us  two  to  sail  in. 
j.\'«  maua  me  li  i  liana,  /and  li  did  it. 

5th.  Aui  alo. 

Ua  loaa  ia  maua  ke  lihi  o  ke  kino. 

Fatigue  of  body  came  upon  us  two. 

Malama  mai  oia  ia  maua,  he  took  care  of  us  two. 

6th,  Aui  moe.  7th.  Aui  hca. 

8th.  Aui  hele. 

Mai  maua  aku  a  i  ka  pali,  horn  us  tivo  t<>  t!it'  j>r< cipii  r 
9th  Aui  hut. 

Oia  kekalii  nic  maua  mu  keia  aina. 
He  also  was  ivlth  us  two  in  this  country. 
Ē  noho  liie  maua  maaiiei,  slay  with  n;  (\ 


66  HF     rRONOUNS: 

10th.  Aui  ia. 

Ua  kanuia  ka  loi  e  maua,  the  kalo  bed  was  planted  by  us  two. 

First  Person  Dual.     Second  form. 

§  128.    This  form   implies  that   I   include  myself  and 
one  person  besides,  viz.  the  person  I  address;  you  and  /. 

1st  Aui  kumu. 

No  ka  waiwai  e  huli  kaua  mamuli  ona. 

For  the  sake  of  gain  let  us  two  turn  after  him. 

E  poino  ana  kaua  mahope  aku,  we  two  shall  suffer  hereafter, 

2nd.  Aui  pili. 

E  hoike  i  ua  hauuiaua  a  kaua,  to  exhibit  the  scholars  o/"  ms  two, 
O  kaua  ka  hoi,  of  us  two  indeed. 

3rd.  Aui  iki. 

He  mala  ko  kaua  aia  i  uka. 

You  and  I  have  a  garden  up  country. 

Aia  kekahi  pepa  kakau  ka  kaua. 

There  is  some  writing  paper  belonging  to  you  a,nd  me, 

4th.  Aui  paewa. 

Na  kapa  no  kaua  e  mehana'i. 

The  kapas /or  us  two  to  keep  us  warm. 

Ka  ai  na  kaua,  na  ke  alii  mai. 

The  food /or  you  and  me,  from  the  chief. 

5th.  Aui  alo. 

E  hoomakaukau  ana  ia  kaua  e  hele,  getting  us  two  ready  to  go. 

Ina  ia  kaua,  ina  ua  hewa. 

If  it  has  come  upon  us  tiuo,  it  is  wrong. 

Ua  loaa  ia  kaua  ka  uku  i  oleloia'i. 

You  and  I  have  received  the  reward  agreed  upon. 

E  hele  mai  ia  io  kaua  nei,  he  will  come  to  us  tivo  here. 

6th  Aui  moe. 

0  ka  mea  i  maalo  ae  ma  o  kaua  nei. 
The  person  who  passes  by  us  two. 

7th.  Aui  hea. 

E  kaua  e,  e  hoi  kaua,  O,  we  two,  let  us  two  go  back. 

8th.  Aui  hele. 

Mai  kaua  aku  nei  kona  hele,  from  us  two  he  went  forth. 

9  th.  Auihui. 

1  ke  kamailio  pu  ana  me  kaua.  in  the  conversation  with  us  two. 
Me  kaua  o  paani  pu  mai  ia,  he  played  together  ivith  us. 


OF     PlUJNOllNS  67 

lOlh.  Aiti  id. 

tna  c  eliia  ka  Itia  c  haiia,  iia  kana  k:i  nkii. 

If  the  pit  shall  be  digged  by  us  tivo,  then  Wo  two  shall  have  the 
r^ay. 

First  Person   Pltjrat,.     First  form. 

§  129.  The  first  person  phmU,  it  will  be  seen  by  the 
Paradigtn,  has  two  forms  like  the  dual.  Tho^rs^  Ibrm  is 
mnkou,  which  takes  all  the  forms  of  the  sini^ular  and  dual. 
Makou  signifies  we,  more  than  two,  inclutling  the  speak- 
er and  his  party,  and  excluding  tiie  person  addressed,  h 
takes  0  emphatic. 

1st.  Aui  kumu. 

Ua  nana  makou  ma  ke  kanawai,  ive  have  looked  at  the  la\'/ 

O  makou  noiia  iia  inoa  malalo,  we  whose  names  are  l»ehnv. 

2nd.  Aui  pili. 

0  ka  hale  pule  hoii  o  makou,  the  new  met'ling  house  q/ Kfi 
Aia  ko  uka  o  makou  la,  there  at  the  upland  side  of  us. 

1  ka  wa  a  makou  i  hele  aku  ai. 

At  the  time  [of  us  to  go\  we  went  forth. 

3rd.  Aui  iki. 

He  wahi  mehameha  ko  makou,  we  have  a  sohtary  place. 

He  halawai  maanei  ka  makou. 

There  is  here  a  meeting  of  ours,  we  Ivave  a  meeting  here, 

4th.  Awl  paewd. 

I  hale  kula  lejX)  no  makou,  an  adohic;  school  luiusc;  /o/'  uh. 
A  na  makou  no  e  hoopii  aku,  it  belongs  to  us  to  petition. 
Na  makou  e  malama  i  kona  ola. 
JVe  will  see  to  his  living,  i.  e.  it  belongs  to  us  to  prov  idc  lor  linn 

5th.  Aui  nlo. 

Ua  akaka  ia  makou,  it  is  clear  to  us. 

No  kou  ninau  ana  mai  ia  makou,  on  ac(*onnt  of  yoin  asking  us 

0  ka  nku,  ia  makou  in  wahi,  as  to  iIk;  \r.\y.  that   part  is  /or  us. 

6th.  Aui  moc. 

Ua  hoolahaia  ka  naauao  ma  o  makou  nei. 

Knowledge  was  e.vtended  through  us. 

1  kokuaia'i  oukou  ma  o  makou  la. 

That  you  should  he  helped  by  us.  \ytui  Imt.   not  nseill 

7th.  Aid  hele. 

E  hoi  aku  oe  mai  o  makou  aku,  return  thou  from  us. 

Ua  Inula  oe  mai  o  makou  aku,   thou  art  liiA  J  ram  us 


68  >'l       FRuivuUi^.:^ 

8th.  Aui  hui. 

Pomaikai  i  ka  noho  |hi  ana  me  makou. 

Fortunate  in  his  living  ivilh  us. 

Hawanawana  mai  lu  ia  me  makou,  lie  wliispered  with  US. 

9th.  Aui  ia. 

I  loaa  ole  ia  oukou  ka  lievva  e  makou. 

That  you  may  receive  no  injury  by  us. 

Me  keia  haawina  i  laweia  e  makou,  with  this  gift  taken  by  us. 

First  Person  Plural.     Second  form. 

§  130.     This  form  is  kakou,  we,  and  includes  the  speak- 
er and  the  person  addressed. 

1st.  Aui  kumu. 

Ke  heluhelu  nei  kakou  i  na  manao,  we  are  reading  the  opinionSc 

Ua  heluia  kakou  me  na  aupuni  naauao. 

We  are  numbered  with  intelligent  kingdoms. 

2nd.  Aui  pill. 

Ke  ike  nei  ia  i  kalii  a  kakou  e  imi  nei. 

He  sees  the  place  we  are  looking  for. 

O  na  mea  a  kakou  i  manao  ai. 

The  things  ive  thought  of  [of  us  to  think.] 

3rd.  Aui  iki. 

O  ka  hewa,  aole  nae  ko  kakou,  the  wrong  but  not  ours. 

He  ike  ko  kakou  e  like  me  oukou. 

Knowledge  is  of  us  as  well  as  you,  we  have  knowledge  as,  &c. 

4th.  Aui  paeAua. 

E  lilo  ia  i  waiwai  no  kakou,  it  will  become,  property /or  us. 

E  luu  ae  oe  i  na  barcla  bipi  na  kakou. 

Dive  down  for  the  barrels  of  beef  belonging  to  us. 

5th.  Aui  alo. 

Ke  hoolilo  kakou  la  kakou  iho  nona. 
If  we  transfer  ourselves  to  him. 
Eia  kana  i  olclo  mua  mai  ai  ia  kakou. 
Here  is  what  he  said  to  us  before. 

6th.  Aui  moc. 

Tna  nia  o  kakou  noi  ka  mua,  if  the  first  be  by  us. 

7th.  Aui  hea. 

Auhea  kakou,  e  na  hoahanau,  luhcre  arc  ive.  hrolhcrn 

E,  e  eu  ae  kakou  o  poino  auanei. 

Here,  lei  us  be  up  lest  evil  ovcrlnke  us. 


Ol'     I' R()  NOUNS.  G9' 

r*.(*li.  Aui  hdc. 

{  liele  ae  mai  o  kakou  &ku,  who  lias  jronc  frnrn  v<:. 

Ua  luili  ae  kona  huliu  mai  o  kakou  aku. 

His  anger  is  turned  away  from  us. 

9th.  Ain  hui. 

Ī  hoounaia  e  noho  pu  me  kakou,  he  was  sent  to  live  loith  us. 

Aole  e  Htihu  ko.  noho  pu  me  kakou. 

Not  long  shall  he  stay  with  us. 

10th.  Aui  in. 

Ua  lohea  kana  olelo  e  kakou,  his  speech  was  heard  by  us. 

§  131.  Personal  Pronouns,  Second  Person  Singular,  oe, 
thou,  or  with  o  emphatic,  o  oe.  The  second  person  has 
but  one  form  in  each  number,  viz.  Sing,  oe,  thou,  dual, 
olua,  you  two,  plural  uukou,  ye. 

It  should  be  remarked  that  the  dual  mimher  in  Hawaii- 
an is  most  rigidly  adhered  to  in  practice,  both  in  conver- 
sation and  writing.  When  the  number  can  be  known^ 
the  dual  and  plural  are  never  interchanged. 

§  132.   1st.  Declension  of  the  Second  Person  Singular, 


oe,  thou. 

Aui  kumu, 

oe, 

thou. 

Aui  pili, 

ou,  au, 

of  thee. 

Aui  iki, 

kou,  kau. 

thine,  thy. 

Aui  paewa 

nou,  nau, 

for  tliee. 

Aui  alo, 

ia  oe, 

thee  to  thee. 

Aui  moe, 

ma  ou  la. 

by,  through  tlicc. 

Aui  hea, 

e  oe, 

O  thou. 

Aui  hele, 

mai  ou, 

from  thee. 

Aui  hui, 

me  oe, 

with  thee. 

Aui  ia, 

e  oCj 

by  thee. 

2nd. 

Second  PEiist)N  Duu,, 

olan,  you  two. 

Aui  kumu, 

olua. 

you  two. 

Aui  pili, 

olua,  a  olua. 

of  you  two. 

Aui  iki, 

ko  olua,  ka  ol 

ua, 

your  two's. 

Aui  paewa, 

no  olua,  na  ol 

ua, 

for  you  two. 

Aui  alo, 

ia  olua. 

you  two,  to  or  for  you  two 

Aui  moe, 

ma  o  olua  la, 

by,  through  you  two. 

Aui  hea, 

e  olua. 

O  you  two. 

Aui  hele, 

mai  olua, 

from  )'ou  two. 

Aui  hui, 

me  olua, 

with  you  two. 

Aui  ia, 

e  olua, 

I)\   v')u  two. 

70  UF    PRONOUNS. 

3rcl      Second  Person   Plural,  oulnm,  yoil.. 

Aui  kumu,  oukou,  ye,  you. 

Aui  pili,  o  oukou,  a  oukou,  of  you. 

Aui  iki,  ko  oukou,  ka  oukou,  yours. 

Aui  paewR)  no  oukou,  na  oukou,  for  you. 

Aui  alo,  ia  oukou,  you,  to  you. 

Aui  inoe,  ma  oukou  laj  through,  by  yoti: 

Aui  hea,  e  oukou,  O  ye. 

Aui  hele,  mai  oukou,  from  you. 

Aui  hui,  me  oukou,  with  you. 

Aui  ia,  e  oukou,  by  you. 

§  133,     1st  Aui  kufnil  oe. 

Mai  haawi  oe  i  ke  keiki,  do  not  thou  give  up  the  ciiild 
E  hai  aku  oe  i  ka  manao,  declare  thou  the  opinion. 
No  ke  aha  la  oe  i  huna  ai?  why  did  you  conceal? 

2nd.  Aui  pili. 

Aloha  oe  a  me  na  hanai  au. 

Love  to  you  and  the  foster  children  of  thine. 

Ma  na  wahi  a  pau  au  e  hele  ai. 

At  all  places  where  thou  shalt  go. 

Aole  he  wahi  hihia  ou. 

There  is  no  difiiculty  o/  pou  [respecting  you.] 

I  ka  hou  ana  ae  ou  i  ka  pepa* 

In  your  renewing  the  paper,  publishing  the  last  paper. 

3rd.  Aui  iki. 

Aole  au  e  ae  aku  i  kmi. 

I  will  not  consent  to  yours  [your  request.] 

Na'u  e  hoike  aku  i  kau. 

It  is  mine  to  show  yows  [my  duty  to.  Sic] 

Aohe  anei  he  akua  koul 

Have  you  no  god?  [is  no  god  for  you.] 

4th.  Aui  paewa. 

Nau  no  e  lawe  akii,  it  is  thint  to  take  it  away  [thy  business.] 

He  mea  ole  na  mea  i  lohe  nou. 

The  things  which  I  heard  concerning  you  are  nothing. 

O  ka'u,  nau  c  hoike,  mine,  you  shall  exhibit  [your  oriice  to.| 

E  hele  oe  e  imi  i  hana  hou  nau. 

Go  thou  and  seek  new  work  for  youi'sel/. 

5th.  Aui  alo. 

He  wahi  manao  ko*u  ia  oe,    I  have  a  thought  to  you    [for  you.] 

Eia  keia  ai  a'u  i<i  oe,  here  is  this  food  of  mine  for  you. 

Ke  ninau  aku  nei  au  ia  oe,  I  ask  you. 

Ja  oe  wale  no  ia  walii,  to  you  oidy  that  thing  belongs. 


OF     PRONOUNS.  T\ 

6th.  Aui  rnoc. 

Ma  ou  la  e  laiiakila  ai,  through  you  wo  will  coikiimt. 

Ma  ou  la  i  loaa  ia\i  ka  ai,  through  you  1  icceivcd  loocl. 

7th.  Aui  hea. 

Auwe  oe  e  ka  mca  liilahila  ole,   O  thou  sliamtlcss  person. 
Aloha  oe,  ea,  salutation  to  you. 

8th.  Aui  hele 

A  hull  ka  inaina  mai  ou  aku. 

When  his  anger  shall  turn  away  from  you, 

Ua  laweia  ia  mca  mcti  ou  aku  la. 

That  thing  was  taken  away  from  you. 

9th.  Atii  hui. 

Aohe  rnea  e  ae  e  hke  nic  oe,  there  is  no  person  like  (het^ 

Me  oe  i  wehewehe  niai  nei  i  ke  kanawai. 

As  you  have  just  explained  the  law. 

Ua  hele  mai  nei  an  e  kaniailio  pu  me  oe. 

I  have  come  here  to  converse  luith  you. 

10th.  Aui  ia. 

Ua  kahikoia  e  oe  na  pele  o  Kauai. 

The  volcanoes  of  Kauai  are  adorned  by  thee. 

Ua  hoooluolu  ia  ka  naau  o  lakou  e  oe. 

Their  hearts  are  comforted  by  thee. 

Second  Person  Dual,  olua. 

§  134.     J  St  Aui  kumu. 

Ua  loaa  olua  ia  Nawaa?  did  you  two  get  it  from  Nawaa? 
Ua  hoopunipuni  mai  olua  ia'u,  you  two  have  deceived  me, 

2nd.  Aui  pili. 

E  hoi  kela  mea  keia  mea  o  olua. 

Let  that  and  this  one  of  you  two  return. 

Pehea  ka  hale  o  olua}  what  kind  of  a  house  have  you  two} 

3rd.  Aui  iki. 

E  like  me  ka  olua  i  hana  mai  ai  ia'u. 

According  as  you  two  have  done  to  me. 

He  aina  momona  ko  olua,  you  two  have  a  fat  land. 

4th.  Aui  ■paewa. 

E  lilo  laua  i  mau  kane  na  olua} 

Will  they  become  husbands /or  you  two. 

E  kakali  anei  laua  no  olua'^  will  tli(>y  wa\i  for  you  Iīvo. 

Ua  nui  ko'u  eha  no  olua,  I  am  mucli  pained /o/*  you  two. 


Tl  OF    PRONOUNS. 

5th.  Aui  alu. 

Eia  kekalii  maimo  p'li  ia  olua, 

Here  is  a  thought  of  mine  to  you  two. 

Oia  kail  wahi  nonoi  ia  olua,  that  is  my  little  re(iuesl  lo  you  Ims. 

Ī  liaavviia  mai  ia  olua  ka  hoomaha. 

May  rest  be  given  to  you  two. 

6th.  Aid  moe. 

Ma  o  olua  la  kona  oia,    he  gets  his  living  by  means  of  you  two. 

7th.  Aui  hea. 

E  hoololic  mai  [e]  olua  i  ko'u  leo,    hearken  ye  two  to  my  voic<^ 

Aloha  okia  ea,  salutation  to  you  two. 

O  haele  olua,  a  e  hoi  i  ko  olua  wahi. 

Go  you  two,  and  return  to  your  place. 

Note.-— The  e  the  sign  of  the  aui  hea  is  often,  if  not  always, 
^omitted  in  cases  of  this  kind. 

8th.  Aui  hele. 

Mai  o  olua  mai  a  ia  nei,  he  came//'o«i  you  two  here. 

'9th.  Aui  hui. 

Me  olua  anei  i  hele  ai  ka  puaa?  did  the  pig  go  with  you  tivo} 

Ke  ai  pu  nei  ka  ilio  me  olua,  the  dog  is  eating  ivith  you  two. 

10th.  Aid  ia 

-Ua  aihueia  na  dala  e  olua,  tlie  money  was  stolen  by  you  tivo. 
Hooi)unipumia  ke  kumu  e  olua. 
The  teacher  was  deceived  by  you  lioo. 

Second  Person  Plural,  oukou,  yc  or  you. 

§  135.  1st  Aui  kumu. 

Noho  anei  oukou  me  ka  noho  wale?  do  you  indeed  sit  in  idleness: 
Jna  he  pono,  e  liana  oukou  a  pau,  if  it  be  right,  do  it  all  of  you. 
E  hula  mai  oukou  i  kuu  keiki,  sing  ye  for  my  child. 

2nd.  Aīd  pili. 

E  hoopau  i  ka  pepehi  ana  o  oukou. 

■Cease  the  striking  of  you  [your  striking.] 

Anu  ke  kahu  o  oukou  i  ka  hale  olc, 

The  guardian  of  you  is  cold  for  want  of  a  house. 

Ewalu  a  oukou  e  ku  iluna,  eight  of  you  stand  up. 

3rd.  Aui  iki. 

Ka  inoa  hoi  he  pono  ka  oukou. 

J  supposed  that  goodness  uuis  yours  { that  you  were  good.J 

,€J,a  pau  ae  la  ko  oukou,  your  buainens  is  finished. 


OF    PRONOUNS  73 

4ih.  Am  pacwa. 

Pulehuia  na  ia  na  oukou.  the  fish  are  roasted /or  you. 

No  oukaii  ka  aina,  no  oukou  ka  hale. 

Fo/"  you  there  is  land,  /or  i/ou  the  house. 

5th.  Aui  ah). 

G  inalaina  poiio  ouk«Hi  ia  oukou  iho. 

Take  ye  heed  rcspcclinp;  yoursclccs. 

Eia  ko'u  njauuo  ia  pukou  a  pan,  here  is  my  thought  /o  you  till 

Ke  aloha  aku  iiei  au  ia  oukou,  I  love  you. 

Kfuioha  iho  la  au  ia  oukou  e  kiai.     1  eoimuaiided  ijou  to  waleh 

6ih.  Aui  muc. 

Ua  olelo  mo  la  ae  la  iiui  o  oukou  la. 

He  is  re[)roached  through  you. 

Ala  o  oukou  la  na  waiwai  ia  makou. 

Through  you  we  have  our  properly  [by  yout  means,  &c.] 

7th.  Aui  hea. 

E,  oukou,  e  na  makua,    O  you,  ye  |>arents. 
E  haele  oukou.  aole  nae  e  lK)i  hou  nmj. 
Go  ye,  but  do  not  ponf»e  back. 

8th.  Aui  heh. 

E  kaawale'ci  ka  miiiao  ino  mai  o  oukou  aku. 
Let  evil  thoughts  be  separate  /'rov>i  you. 

Mai  o  oukou  akxi  \  pae  ai  ka  leo,   from  you  went  out  a  sound. 
E  pale  i  ka  enemi,  e  holo  ia  mai  o  oukou  aku. 
Resist  the  enemy,  he  will  ūee  from  you. 

9th.  Aui  hui. 

Aole  ia  e  kula  hou  ia  me  oukou. 

He  will  go  to  school  no  more  icith  you. 

Aohe  ona  kuleana  me  oukou,  he  has  no  more  pait  with  you. 

10th.  Aui  ia. 

Ua  hooliloia  e  oukou  ka  hale  i  wain  aihue. 
The  house  became  by  you  a  place  of  thievm^. 
E  kokuaia  au  e  oukou  i  ko'u  hele  ana. 
I  shall  be  assisted  by  you  in  my  journey. 

Third  Person  Singular,  ia,  o  la. 

§  136.  The  Third  Person  has  three  iniiifbei's;  (he 
Sing,  ia,  he,  she,  it^  Dual,  /awft,  they  two;  Plural,  Mow, 
they.  It  has  but  one  form  in  each  number.  The  third 
person  Singular  in  its  various  cases  has  a  variety  of  uses; 
but  they  may  be  summed  up  in  the  verb  (o  br,  often  used 

01 


74  OF    PRONOUNS. 

impersonally,  and  the  verb  to  have  or  to  possess,  and  often 
for  the  affirmative  adverb  yes. 

1st.  As  a  verb  to  he,  or  t!ie  impersonal  verb  of  affir- 
mation, it  is  used  as  follows. 

O  ka  ai  noa,  oia  ka  hooniaka  ana  e  pan  ai  na  kapu  kahiko. 

The  eating  freely,  that  ivas  the  beginning  of  the  desiruction  of 
ancient  tabus. 

Malaila  no  oia,  lie  iva}<  there. 

O  ka  inu  rama  iho  la  no  ia,  that  was  rutn  drinking. 

2nd.    It  is  used  as  a  verb  to  have  or  to  possess. 
Aole  na  kakou  ia,  this  is  not  for  us,  i.  e.  it  is  not  ours. 
Na  ke  alii  no  ia,  it  belongs  to  the  chief,  it  is  for,  &c. 
Ke  kumu  nona  ka  hale,    the  teacher  whose  is  the  house. 

3rd.  It  will  be  seen  afterwards  that  the  pronoun  ia 
affixed  to  the  verb  forms  the  passive  voice. 

4th.    For  ia  or  oia,  as  an  affirmative  adverb,  see  adverbs. 

§  137.  There  seem  to  have  been  in  some  age  of  the 
language  ttvo  different  words  for  the  third  person  sin- 
gular; viz.  ia  and  na,  as  in  declining,  ia  seems  to  fail  and 
7ia  takes  its  place.  At  present  a  part  of  each  has  gone 
into  disuse,  and  the  remainders  are  put  together  to  make 
up  the  cases.  All  the  pronouns  are  generally  regular  in 
their  declensions,  except  this  third  person  singular. 

Note. — Some  regular  forms  exist  as  will  be  seen  in  the  remarks. 

§  138.  The  orthography  also  of  the  third  person  sin- 
gular as  expressed  in  printed  books,  in  the  Aui  pili,  Aui 
iki,  and  Aui  paewa  does  not  follow  the  anaolgy  of  the 
other  persons  and  numbers.  There  seems  no  good  reas- 
son  why  kona,  kana,  nona,  nana,  should  be  written  in  one 
word;  and  ko  lakou,  ka  lakou,  no  lokou,  na  lakou,  be  divi- 
ded into  two,  except  that,  even  when  united,  they  do  not 
form  a  long  word.  There  might  be  some  advantage,  at 
least  in  appearance,  \^  i\-\e  prefix  pronouns,  were  so  united 
and  it  would  not  look  bad  to  unite  them  in  the  dual  and 
plural;  as,  kolaua  kalaua,  kolakou,  kalakou,  etc.  the  gram- 
matical construction  requires  them  to  be  separate  as  much 
in  one  case  as  the  other.  In  the  Aui  alo  [Objective  case] 
ia  ia  the  preposition  and  pronoun  are  seperated  and  so 
in  all  the  cases  below,  while  in  the  three  other  oblique 
cases  above  they  are  united. 


ol'    i>i;u,\oi].\s. 


lO 


§  K>9.   Tim;?)  P)<;nsoN  SiNGiJi.AK,   /a,  lio,  slic,  il ;  fv  em- 
phatic, oia. 


Am  ktiiiiu, 
Alii  pi!i, 
Aui  iki, 
Aui  paewa, 
Aui  alo, 
Aui  moe, 
Aui  hea, 
Aui  hel(^ 
Aui  luii. 
Aui  ia, 

2nd. 
Aui  kuniu, 
Aui  pili, 
Aui  iki, 
Aui  paewa, 
Aui  alo, 
Aui  moe, 
Aui  hea, 
Aui  hele. 
Aui  hui. 
Aui  ia, 

3rd. 
Aui  kumu^ 
Aui  pili, 
Aui  iki, 
Aui  paewa, 
Aui  alo, 
Aui  moe, 
Aui  hea, 
Aui  hele, 
Aui  hui, 
Aui  ia. 


la,  lie,  slic.  It. 

()  na,  a  n::,    ^  o  ia,  a  ia,        }  of  him,  &,c. 
koiia,  kana,  \  ko  ia,  ka   ia,  ^  rarely  used,  his, 
noiia,  nana,  ^  no  io,  na    ia,  }  Tor  him,  &c. 
ia  ia,  (  i  o  na  !a,         5  ''i^'*   ^^  ^'i'"- 

ma  o  na  la,  through,  by  him. 


mai  o  iia  la,  iVom  him. 

me  ia,  with  iiim. 

■c.  ia,  ))y  him. 

Third  Person  Dual,  laua. 

laiia,  they  two. 

o  laua,  a  lana,  -of  them  two. 

ko  laua,  ka  laua,  their  two. 

no  laua,  na  laua,  tor  them  two. 

ia  laua,  them  two,  to  them  two. 
ma  o  laua  ia,  by  means  of  them  two,  through,  Sic. 


from  them  two. 
with  them  two. 
by  them  two. 

Third  Person  Piajral,  lakou,  they. 


mai  laua, 
me  laua, 
e  laua, 


lakou, 

o  lakou,  a  lakou, 

ko  lakou,  ka  lakou, 

no  lakou,  na  lakou, 

ia  lakou, 

ma  o  lakou  la, 


they, 
of  them, 
theirs, 
for  them, 
ihcm,  to  them, 
thvouiih  them. 


mai  !akou.  from  then;, 

me  lakou,  with  them, 

e  lakou,  by   them. 

§  140.    Remarks  on  the  Thirel  Person  Sin;^iilar. 
1st.  Aui  kumu. 

Holo  aku  la  ia  a  hiki  i  Ifonuaula, 
He  sailed  onward  to  Honuaula. 
A  po,  kii  aku  la  ia  i  ka  waapa. 
At  night,  he  went  to  fetch  the  boat. 
Oia  a  me  kona  jioe  kanaka,  he  iuni  his  peopl(\ 
Oia  ka  uku  o  ke  kanawai,  that  is  \\\c  pnnishnunl  ul  the  ?;n^ 
He  manawa  kaua  ia,  that  was  a  time  of  \iar 


75  uī     PRONOUNS. 

2ncl.  Aui  pUi. 

In  this  case  the  ia  is  dropped  and  na  takes  its  placfe', 
though  the  regular  form  is  now  and  then  found,  but  with 
some  modifying  word.  So  also  i\\Q  Aui  iki  and  Aiii  pa- 
ewa,  specimens  of  the  more  obsolete  forms  will  follow  the 
examples  of  the  more  regular  ones. 

I  keia  kil  rtiai  o  na,  on  this  arrival  of  him. 

AIn  ana  hale  e  kukulu  ai. 

Four  houses  of  her  to  build  [for  her  to  build.] 

Nui  loa  mai  la  na  mea  ona. 

There  was  much  property  of  him  present. 

Aole  a  ia  nei  palapala,  there  is  no  book  of  him  here. 

He  puolo  owai  keia?  he  puolo  o  ia  la. 

Whose  bundle  is  this?  it  is  the  bundle  of  him  there. 

3rd.  Aui  iki. 

He  wahi  hale  pili  kona. 

There  is  a  grass  house  of  him,  that  is,  he  has  a  grass  house. 

1  kona  hele  ana,  he  hipuu  kana. 

In  his  travelling,  there  was  a  scrip  of  him,  i.  e.  he  had  a  scrip 

E  kii  hou  mai  auanei  keia  i  ko  ia  la  mau  waiwai. 

He  v.ill  come  again  for  the  goods  of  him. 

Ua  like  anei  ko  oukou  manao  me  ko  ianci} 

Is  your  opinion  like  that  of  him  present? 

4th.  Aui  paewa. 

Nana  no  e  malama  hou  i  ka  aina. 

It  was  for  him  again  to  manage  the  land. 

Make  ke  kanaka  nona  ke  aka. 

The  man  died  whose  was  the  shadow. 

No  wai  keia  auka  sopa/  no  ia  la. 

For  whom  is  thi?  bar  of  soap?  it  is  for  him  there. 

5th.  Aui  (do. 

E  halawai  ia  me  ka  poe  i  make  ia  ia. 

He  will  nieet  those  killed  by  him. 

Olelo  ao  mai  o  A^^anekouva  ia  ia,  Vancouver  exhorted  hint. 

Ilele  mai  la  lakou  io  na  la,  tliey  came  to  her. 

6th.  Aui  moe. 

Ma  o  na  la  ka  hooponopono  ana. 

Through  him  is  the  settlement  [of  ihc  ditliculty.| 

K  hoopai  aku  wau  ia  oukou  ma  ona  la. 

I  will  punish  you  ihrous;}}.  him. 

Mai  hoohiki  ma  o  na  la,  do  not  swear  by  him. 

7th.  Aui  hea,  not  u.sed. 


i)t  t^Roxorr^s.  7? 

^)th.  Atii  helc. 

Haliii  aku  mai  o  na  aku,  he  tinned  ;\wn\  fiom  him. 

9th.  Aui  Jmi. 

A  pan  pn  viv.  ia  na  kiion  kaliiko. 

And  with  him  ended  the  ancient  tal)ns-. 

Me  kekahi  man  alii  pu  me  ia  nm  Kohala. 

With  certain  c'hiefs  with  him  at  Kohala. 

A  me  na  kanaka  pu  me  ia,  and  also  men  loirrlhrr  with  him. 

10th.  Aui  ia. 

E  ninauia  mai  anei  au  e  ia}  shall  I  be  qneistioncd  Inj  him} 

TtiiRD  Person  Dual,  laua,  (hey  two. 

§  HI  There  is  a  peculiarity  in  the  use  ol"  the  Dual 
Which  is  apt  at  first  to  be  mistaken.  I'he  dual  is  so  used 
that  there  appears  to  be  three  persons  s])oken  of.  Thus, 
halavvai  tnaua  me  ia,  which  would  seem  to  mean,  ilh'  two 
met  with  him,  but  the  real  meaning  is,  wc  two  met  tojreth- 
fer,  or  1  met  with  him.  The  dual  pronoun  in  such  cases  in- 
tludes  all  spoken  of,  I  keia  ku  ana  mai  o  Vanekouva,  aoie 
iaua  i  halawai  me  Kaniehameha,  Lit.  on  this  time  of  Van- 
couver's Comingtoanchol', /At'//  /?rodid  not  meet  with  Kame- 
hameha;  this  would  imply  three  persons,  but  the  mean- 
ing is,  Vancouver  did  not  meet  wMth  Kamehameha.  Van- 
couver and  Kamehameha  are  united  in  the  lava,  then  Ka- 
mehameha is  expressed  again.  Such  is  the  peculiarity 
of  this  pronoun  whei-e  persons  are  concerned. 
1st.  Aui  kumu. 

He  mea  ia  e  hui  ai  laua  elua  i  hooka  hi  aiio. 

That  is  what  will  unite  them  both  in  one  form. 

Aole  anei  laua  makemake  i  mau  kumu? 

Did  not  iheij  two  desire  teachers? 

Heaiia  laua  kekahi  i  kekahi? 

What  are  they  two  to  each  other?   wlint  relation 

Uwe  pu  laua,  they  two  wept  togetlier. 

2nd.  Aui  pill. 

Owai  ka  mea  lapuvvale  loa  o  laua} 
Who  was  the  more  foolish  of  them  two. 
\\\  ka  hewa  iiuna  o  lava,  the  guilt  fell  upon  Ihfm  tirO. 
I  ka  haalele  ana  i  kahi  a  laua.  i  noho  ai. 
On  leavincf  the  place  where  they  two  had  \\\i\\. 


3rd.  Aui  iki. 

I'enei  ka  laua  i  iini  ai,  I'ms  did  they  tv'o  seek» 

I  like  ka  iiiaiiao  nie  ko  laua  nei. 

Tliat  the  opinion  nuiy  be  like  that  of  ihem  lico. 

He  man  keiki  kane  ka  laua,  they  two  had  sons. 

4th.  Aui  paewa. 

No  laiha  ka  aina  pali,  for  them  two  Was  broken  land^ 

Ua  ohiia  ka  ai  nd  laua,  the  food  is  collected /or  them  Iwd. 

5th.  Aui  alo. 

Aole  ia  laua  ka  liewa  nui. 

l^he  great  fault  did  not  belong  lo  them  tVO^. 

He  aloha  \\u\  ko'u  ia  laua  nei. 

i  have  great  love /or  Iheni  two. 

A  hookolokolo  ia  laua,  and  called  them  two  to  account. 

6lh.  Aui  mm. 

Ma  o  laua  la  e  hoouna  ai  oukou^  by  them  two  do  you  seiuL 

Ua  hanaia  ia  mea  ma  o  laua  la. 

*l'he  thing  was  done  by  them  two,  i.  e.  through  their  means. 

7th.  Aui  hea,  not  used. 

8th.  Aui  heie. 

Mai  laua  mai  ka  palapala,  the  letter  was  from  them  two. 

Mai  o  laua  la  ka  Inua  i  hele  mai  noi. 

From  them  two  was  the  messengfeV  that  came, 

9th.  Aui  hm. 

Halawai  kekahi  hoahanau  me  lau<!!^. 
Verla'iu  relatives  met  with  them  two. 
A  fnahope  iho  hni  ia  oia  me  laua. 
ARefward  he  united  ti)ith  them  ttW. 

10th.  Aui  in. 

Haliiia  a*3  la  ka  papa  t  laua,    the  table  was  spread  by  them  timh 

§  142.     TiiUiD  Pj:rson  Plurat.,  lakou,  they. 

The  Plural  refers  to  any  number  greater  than  two. 

1st.  Aui  kumu. 

Ooki  ae  la  lakou  i  ke  kaula,  then  they  cut  the  rope. 
Pepehi  jho  la  lakou  ia  ia  a  make. 
They  pounded  him  Until  dead. 

2nd.  Aui  pili. 

Pomaikai  i  na  mea  a  lakou  i  aihue  ai. 
F'ortunale  in  tvhat  they  had  stolen. 


OF     PKONOUNS  70 

Kuu  ilio  kii  waapa  o  Uikou. 

The  boat  of  them  \[\\c\x  ho\\{\  was  lot  down. 

lloau  lakoii  i  iia  f)alni   a  lakoii.. 

They  floated  oil"  the  casks  of  them,  i.  c.  \.\m\  caskN. 

ord.  Aui  iki. 

J'^ia  ka  lakou  i  ike  ai. 

This  lOiis  theirs  to  8ee  [this  lans  lohul  they   saw  | 
He  rnanaoio  no  ko  lakou  e  make. 

Full  confidence  was  tlieirs  to  die,    i,  e.  ihey  believed  they  should 
die. 

4th.  Aui  paciva. 

E  kaua  akn  nj  i  ka  aina  no  lakon,  to  fight  other  hindr/o/'  them, 

iVa  lakou  no  i  pepehi  i  iia  haole. 

They  toere  those  who  killed  the  tbieigners. 

I  mail  mea  eha  kekahi  na  lakou. 

Some  deadly  weapons  also yo>'  them. 

5th.  Aui  ftlo. 

Ī  loaa  ai  ka  ai  ia  lakou,     that  food  might  be  obtained  for  them, 

E  hoonoho  papa  ia  lakou,  set  Ihem  in  divisions. 

Ac  aku  ia  lakou  e  malama  i  ka  pono,  he  taught  them  to  do  well. 

Hai  aku  la  ia  ia  lakou,  he  spake  to  them. 

6th.  Aui  nioe. 

Ma  o  lakou  la  i  hoao  ai  oia,  through  them  he  made  trial. 

Ma  o  lakou  la  i  hoahuia  na  kapa. 

By  them  the  kapas  were  laid  up. 

7th.  Aui  hea,  not  used, 

8th.  Aui  hele. 

Mai  o  lakou  aku  ka  leo  kaua. 

From,  them  went  out  the  voice  of  war. 

Mai  lakou  mai  ia  a  ia  nei,  from  them  he  came  here, 

9th.  Aui  hui. 

Aole  e  like  me  lakou  i  ka  hiki  ana  mai  mamua. 

Not  like  as  they  were  on  a  former  arrival. 

10th.  Aui  ia. 

Ua  ao  ia  mai  oia  e  lakou,  he  was  instructed  hy  Ihem. 
Kukuluia  ua  hale  la  e  lakou,  the  house  was  built  hy  them. 

THE  PRONOUN  Hai. 
§  143    The  anomalous   pronoun  hai  may  be   declined 
here,  for  it  is  both  a  personal  and  a  prefix  pronoun. 


80                                                OF    PRONOLTNS. 
An\  kiMiiu, ~ 


Alii  [)ili,  o  liai.  a  liai,  of  another. 

Am  iki,  ko  hai,  ka  hai,  anotlier'g. 

Aui  paewa,  no  hai,  iia  hai,  for  another. 

Aui  alo,  ia  hui,  to  another. 

Aui  moe, — ^-^ — ^-r. 

Aui  hea,  — - — ^ ^ 


Aui  hele,         niai  hai,  from  another. 

Aui  hui,  me  hai,  with  another. 

Aui  ia,  e  hai,  by  another. 

§  144  The  foregoing  is  a  specimen  of  the  manner  in 
which  tho  personal  Pi'ononns  are  used  in  the  diftereni 
cases.  The  variety  of  meaning  is  very  great;  and  doubt- 
less there  is  room  for  improvement  in  the  method  of 
statement. 

§  145.  There  might  have  been  another  division  of 
them  according  as  they  stood  in  relation  to  the  verb  or  to 
the  7iou)i.  Some,  especially  in  the  ^1?//  pili,  Aui  iki  and 
Aui  paewa  are  more  particniary  connected  with  verbs;  oth- 
ers with  nouu.s,  or  stand  independently  having  the  verb  in 
themselves. 

§  146.  The  ibilowmg  stand  connected  with  and  modify 
verbs.  The  literal  English  will  be  put  down  first  in  the 
example. 

Eia  ka\i  e  hoike  aku  ia  oe. 
Here  is  mi?ie  to  show  to  you,  this  is  ivhot  I  hare  to  show  you. 

Aole  nrt'w  e  nialama  i  ka  aina. 
U  is  not  mine  to  oversee  the  land,  it  is  not  my  ojjice,  duty,  tt-c.  to, 

Ma  ke  alanui  a  inaua  i  hele  ai. 
On  the  road  where  we  two  went. 
Ke  kumu  niu  a  maua  i  ae  like  ai. 

The  cocoanut  tree  of  us  two  to  consent,  the  cocoanut  tree  about 
which  ice  two  agreed. 

I  ka  vva  a  niakou  i  heje  aku  ai. 
At  the  time  of  us  to  ^o  forth,  at  the  time  we  went  forth. 

iS'a  makou  e  malama  i  kona  ola. 
It  is /or  us  to  see  to  his  living,  it  belongs  to  us  [our  duty]  to  pro-» 
vide  for  him. 

He  halawai  maanei  ka  makou. 
A  meeting  here  is  for  us,  we  are  to  have  a  meeting  here. 

O  ka  uku,  ia  makou  ia  vvahi. 
As  to  the  pay,  that  thing  is/or  us,  as  to  the  pay,  that  is  our  concern^ 

O  na  mea  a  kakou  i  manao  ai. 
The  things  of  us  to  think,  the  things  we  were  thinking  of. 


xF    I'RONOUNS,  81 

Ma  iiii  walii  a  pan  an  c  hole  ai. 
At  all  places  of  tliee  to  go,  at  all  places  where  thou  siiall  go. 

iVait  no  e  lawc  aku. 
It  is  thine  to  take-  it  away,  it  iv  Ihi/  business  to  take  it  away. 

Evvalu  a  oukoii  e  ku  iluiia, 
Eii^lit  of  i/ou  to  stanJ  up,  ci;^Iit  o/  you  arc  |llul^^L|  to  stand  up. 

Elui  ana  halo  e  kukulu  ai. 
Four  houses  of  him  to  l)uil(!.   he  had  four  houses  to  build. 

Nana  no  e  malama  hou  i  ka  aina. 
It  was /or  him  to  take  care  atj;ain  of  the  laud,    it  was  his  office  |du 
ty]  to  take  charijfe,  &c. 

I  ka  haalcle  ana  i  kahi  a  laua  i  uoho  ai. 
On  leaving  the  |)lace  of  them  Ivo  to  live,  on  leaving  the  place 
where  they  two  had  lived. 

Penei  ka  laua  iuii  ana. 
Thus  their  two  seeking,  thus  wiis  the  seeking  of  them  two. 

Pomaikai  i  na  niea  a  lakou  i  aihue  ai. 
Fortunate  in  the  things  of  them  to  steal,  (brtunate  in  luhat  they 
had  stolen. 

Eia  ka  lakou  i  ike  ai. 
This  was  theirs  to  see,  this  was  what  they  saw. 

§  147.  The  followino  are  more  independent  of  verbs,  or 
contain  more  or  less  of  the  idea  of  verbs  in  tliem. 

He  mea  hoakaka  ko\i  ia  oe. 
A  thing  to  explain  is  mine  to  you,    i  Aat'C  an  explanation    to  make. 

Heaha  kou  nianao  no'w. 
What  is  your  thought  of  me,  what  is  your  opinion  concerning  me. 

I  moku  no  maua  e  holo  ai,  a  ship/or  us  two  to  sail  in. 

E  hoike  i  na  hauniana  a  kaua,  lo  exhibit  the  scholars  o/' ms /?'J0. 

Na  kapa  no  kaua  e  niehana'i. 
The  kapas /or  its  two  to  keep  us  warm   in,  the  kfijjas  to    keep  us 
two  warm. 

0  ka  hale  pule  hou  o  makou. 

The  new  meeting  house  of  us.  our  new  meeting  liouse. 

He  wahi  mehamelia  ko  makou. 
A  solitary  |)iace  is  oftis.  we  have  a  solitary  f)lHcc. 

1  hale  kula  lepo  no  makou,  an  adobic  school  house /or  k.s. 
E  liloia  i  waiwai  no  kakou,  it  will  become  properly /or  us. 
Aole  he  wahi  hihia  ou. 

There  is  no  difiiculty  of  you,  there  is  no  rlitficidty  respecting  you. 

\o\e  au  e  ae  aku  i  katt.   I  do  not  consent  lo  yours  [your  request. j 

K  hele  oe  e  imi  i  liana  hou  nau. 
(jo  thou  and  seek  new  work /or  youraelf. 

E  hoopau  i  ka  pepehi  ana  o  oukou. 
Cease  the  strikiufi  of  ijou  fvom  striking! 


82  OF   rKONori.Ns. 

Ka  iiioa  lu»i  hv.  poiio  ka  nukou. 

r  thoii;4"l»t  that  iiOf^dness  was  of  you,   i  thought  you  ivere  good, 

I  keia  ku  mai  o  na,  on  this  arrival  of  him. 

Make  ke  kf^naka  nona  ke  aka. 

The  mail  died  for  wkoiii  [whose]  was  the  shadow. 

Hi  ka  hewa  ihiua  o  hma,  the  guilt  fell  upon  them  two. 

I  like  ka  manao  me  ko  laua  iiei. 

That  the  opinion  may  be  like  that  of  them  two. 

Kekahi  wahine  o  lakou,  a  ceriain  ivoman  of  them. 

I  man  mea  elia  kekahi  na  lakou. 

Some  deadly  weapons  n\so  for  them. 

§  148.  It  will  be  seen  iVom  the  two  last  sections  (146  and  . 
147)  that  the  class  «,  k<t  and  ita,  are  mostly  used  in 
connection  with  verbs  expressed;  and  that  the  class  o,  ko 
and  no,  are  more  generally  used  independent  of  verbs,  or 
contain  the  idea  of  the  verb  in  them;  but  the  class  a,  ka 
and  na,  are  also  sometimes  used  independantly  and  thus 
seem  to  be  synonymous  with  the  other  class. 

OF  PREFIX  PRONOUNS. 

§  149.  Prefix  Pronouns  are  so  called  from  their  general 
position  in  the  sentence:  being  always  prefixed  or  placed 
before  the  noun  to  which  they  belong,  and  never  following 
it. 

§  150.  Prefix  Pronouns  are  of  two  classes.  First,  such 
as  consist  of  the  the  oblique  cases  of  the  same  words 
that  have  been  exhibited  in  the  preceding  sections.  They 
are  equivalent,  for  the  most  part,  to  what  were  called 
possessive  adjective  pronouns  in  English  Grammars;  thus 
7/11/,  fhij,  his,  luir,  our,  your,  their,  etc.  The  following  is  an 
example  of  a  prefix  and  a  per.sonal  or  sufiix  pronoun. 

E  nhiia  kona  olohelohe  i    na  mea  a  ko'u  makua  i  kann   ai  no'u. 

Hi^  nakedness  will  he  eovered  by  th<'  p/iopnriy  whifh  my  father 
planted /o/'  ine. 

Personal  PkuNucn  I'rkhx  I'iioNoi  n. 

Ka  hale  o  makou.  Ko  tnakou  hale. 

The  house  uf  ua.  Oar  hou.^c. 

O  l;a  hale  e  kukuhi  nei. /com  La.      O  7fo"w  hale  ke  kiduilu  nei. 

The  house  here  building  is  mine.  My  house  is  here  building. 

2nd.  In  this  u  ay  all  the  personal  pronouns  may  be  chang- 
ed into  prefix    pronouns;   that  is,  by  altering  their    place 


OF   i'U(»noi;ns.  83 

Ui  the  sentence.     Generally,    however,   the  prefix    pro- 
nouns consist  of  the  pronouns  ol"  the  Aui  pili,  and  Aui  iki, 
cases  and  of  the  Aui  iki  niore  often  than  the  Aui  pili. 
,         KoMO  niai  o'u  hoahele  ia'u,  my  trrivciinju-  coiup'ajiion  invited  rue. 

E  ko'u  mau  hoalianaiu  O  my  l)ret,lir«ii. 

E  o'm  man  lioaliaiiau,  O  iny  brethren. 

Kalialia  iho  la  o'w  niaiiaf»,  mij  mind  was  astoiiisjicd. 

Kau  mau  keiki,  thy  children. 

Kau  pulii  baka  ana,  thi)  tobacco  smoking. 

E  hana  i  kona  makoniake,  to  do  his  will. 

Me  kana  mau  kanoha,  wiUi  his  last  coimnatids. 

Me  ka  lei  ma  kona  lima,  with  a  string  of  l)cads  npon  her\wu\. 

Ku  ae  la  kona  hoahanan,  his  brother  rose  up. 

Ko  makou  hale  pule.    Our  meeting  house. 

fia  makou  halawai,  cur  meeting  together, 

Ke  kolohe  i  ko  kakoii  hale,  the  mischief  in  our  hosise 

Ka  kakou  hana  no  keia,  this  indeed  is  our  work. 

Pela  no  ka  oukou  hana,   thus  may  your  work  be. 

E  hoi  ma  ko  oukou  walii,  return  to  yonr  places. 

Me  ke  ano  o  ko  lakou  naau. 

According  to  the  meaiiing  of  their  heart. 

Ina  hea  ko  lakou  polio?  when  was  Iheir  sinking  down. 

E  aho  nae  ko  lakou  hope,  more  tolerable,  however,  their  end. 

Ka  olelo  ana  o  ka  lakou  mau  keiki. 

The  conversation  of  their  ciiildren 

Ke  ano  o  ka  lakou  hana  ana,  liie  character  of  thdr  doing. 

I  ko  maua  waena  ua  pono. 

In  our  field  [field  of  us  two]  it  would  Ix;  proper. 
Aole  i  hoopiliivia  i  ko  maua  mau  kino. 
He  did  not  trouble  our  tu^o  persons. 

0  ke  kunuikuai  jmle  o  ko  kaua  ill. 

The  price  of  the  clothing  of  our  skin.,     the  price  of  the  defence 
of  the  skin  of  us  two. 

E  pono  ai  ko  kaua  nolio  ana,   to  benefit  the  living  of  us  two. 
Flelelei  ka  olua  mau  palapala,  the  pai)ers  of  you  two  are  scattered. 
Haehaeia  ko  olun  kapa,  the  garment  of  yon  two  is  torn. 
Hohola  ae  la  i  ko  laua  kapa 
They  spread  out  their  kapa,  i.  e.  of  ihtm  tivo. 

1  like  ka  manao  me  ko  laua  nei. 

Whose  opitiions  are  like  those  of  these  two. 

No  ka  maimai  ko  laua    holo  ana. 

On  account  of  sickness  was  the  sixiWi^g  of  them  two. 

3rd.  Rk. MARKS  ON   THK   ABOVE. 

Ou  is  used  for  kou  as  o'u  is  for  L(/u  [see  2nd  above.] 


8. 


OF     PRONOiJNS;. 


I  i  aiai  net  on  kulni,  e  hoi  oe,  v/o«r  gunr 'iin -;i\  -  !(.  \'.t\i.  n  tiihi 

A  !;ii  mai  ou  kahii  ia  oe.  ''   . 

Until  ijour  guardian  shall  come  again  to  letch  you. 

4th.  There  seems  to  be  a  class  of  words  whose  prefix 
pronouns  mny  be  either  ka'u  or  ko'u,  my;  and  in  the  uncer- 
tainty or  indifference  which  should  be  used  the  word  kwi 
is  used;  thus, 

He  nui  kuu  hewa  [ko'u  hewa,]  great  is  my  error. 

I  kuu  ike  ana  ia  ia  [ko'u  ike,]   on  my  seeing  him. 

Kun  then  lakes  the  |)lace  of  ko'u  and  ka'u,  my. 

5th.  Kg  is  used    somewhat    frequently  for  kou,  iJiy,  for 
which  it  is  undoubtedly  a  contraction. 
E  hoi  kaua  i  Kaihia  me  ko  keiki. 
Let  us  return  to  Kailua  with  thy  child. 

In  these  cases  there  is  an  indefiniteness  as  to  the  exact 
relationship  of  the.  parties  See  120.  2,  3  and  4. 

§  151.  The  foregoing  Prefix  Pronouns  may  be  insert- 
ed between  the  prepositions  and  the  noun  in  all  the  diff- 
erent cases  where  the  sense  will  admit  it;  and  in  these 
cases  they  take  the  place  of  the  articles. 

1st.     They  are  declined  with  the  noun  as  follows. 

.  Aui  kumu,  ko'u  kapa,  my  garment. 

Aui  pili,  o  ko'u  kapa,  a  ko'u  kapa,     of  my  garment. 

Aui  iki,  ko  ko'u  kapa,  ka  ko'u  kapa,  my  garment's. 

Aui  paewa.  no  ko'u  kapa,  na  ko'u  kapa,  for  my  garment. 

Aui  alo,  i  ko'u  kapa,  to  my  garment. 

Aui  moe,  ma  ko'u  kapa,  hy  means  of  my  garment. 

Aui  hea,  e  ko'u  kapa,  O  my  garment. 

Aui  hele,  mai  ko'u  kapa,  fVom  my  garment. 

Aui  hui,  me  ko'u  kapa,  with  my  garment. 

Aui  ia,  e  ko'u  kapa,  by  my  garment. 

2nd.  In  the  same  matiner,  kim,  my,  See  §  150,  4. 

Aui  kumu,  kini  hoa,  my  companion. 

Aui  pi!i,  o  kuu  hoa,  a  knu  hoa,  of  rny  companion, 

Aui  iki,  ko  kuu  hoa,  k;i,  kuu  lioa,       my  coujpanioji's. 
Aui  [)acwa,     no  kuu  hoa,  !;:i  kuu  hoa,      for  my  compaiiion. 

Aui  alo,  i  kuu  hoa,  my  com.,  to  my  con)paiiion. 

Aui  moe,  ma  kuu  hoa,  by  my  cojnj)anion. 

Aui  hea,  c  kuu  hoa,  ()  my  companion. 

Aui  hele,  mai  kuu  hoHj  from  my  companion. 

Aui  hui,  me  kuu  hoa,  with  my  compaiiion. 

Aui  ia^  e  kuu  Ik'H,  l>v  my  companion. 


Ill''     |'R<»\t    I     >  -".^i 

3t'd.  So  Jilso  /,«'//  ni) 

Aui  kiiinii,      ka'u  Imnrj,  my  woiK, 

Aui  pili,  o  kii'ii  luina,  a  ka'ii  haiia,    ol  my  worl;. 

Alii  iki,  ko  ka'u  liana,  ka  ka'u  haiia,  my  work's. 

Aui  j)ae\va,  no  ka'u  luuia,  na  ka'u  Kaiia,  tor  my  work. 

Aui  alo,  i  ka'u  liana,  my  work,  to  m\  wntk. 

Aui  moe,         nia  ka'u  liana,  by  means  of  my  work. 

Aui  h(!a,  e  ka'u  liana,  O  my  work. 

Aui  lieic,         mai  ka'u  liana,  from  my  work. 

Aui  lini,  me  ka'u  liana,  with  my  work. 

Aui  ia,  e  ka'u  hana,  hy  my  work. 

In  like  manner  may  bo  declinec]  the  followincr  profit 
pronouns  in  the  (.lual  anil  piur;il  nuni])ej's  as  well  a«  in  the 
singular,   viz. 

O'u,  a'u,  ko'u,  ka'u;  ou,  au,  kou,  kau;  ko  maua,  ka  niaua; 
ko  kaua,  ka  kaua;  ko  olua,  ka  olua;  ko  laua,  ka  laua;  ko 
makou,  ka  makou;  ko  kakou,  ka  kakou;  ko  oukou,  ka  oii- 
kou;   ko  lakou,  ka  lakou. 

5th.  When  used  in  tlie  dual  or  plural  mau,  poe  or  pae, 
&/C.,  must  be  inserted  between  the  prefix  pronoun  and  the 
noun,  ko'u  poe  hoa  my  companions,  kau  mauke'iki  thy  chil- 
dren, kona  man  aina,  his  lands,  ko  kakou  poe  bipi,  our 
cattle,  etc. 

6th.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  foregoing  prefix  pro- 
nouns though  they  are  made  up  of  the  oblique  cases  of 
personal  pronouns  yet  they  are  prefixed  to  any  case  of 
the  noun. 

§  152.  Second  Class  of  Prefix  Pronouns.  This  is  a  dif- 
ferent class  of  words  from'the  preceeding.  They  are  such 
as  are  called,  in  English,  Demonstrative  Adjective  yro- 
nouns.  Like  the  foregoing,  they  are  prefixed  to  the 
noun  and  may  stand  between  the  preposition  used  in  de- 
clining the  noun  and  the  noun  itself;  and  may  be  declined 
with  it.  They  are  not  a  numerous  class.  The  principal 
are  these, 

Keia,  ]     this;  these   words  refer  to  objects  either 

Nei<(i  1  present  themselves,  or  the  subj(;ct  of  pres- 

iVc/,  f  ent    remaj'k.     'i'he    last   fbrin    ua — nei  i?; 

Ua nei,    J  strong  and  emphatic  in  i(s  meaning.    'I'he 

name  of  the  person  or  thing    to  which  it  applies  is  insert- 


8{)  •/!•     PROXOWNS. 

ed  betwern  ihe  I  wo  parts  ol'tho  pronoun;   thus,  he  elema- 

kule  }ia  kanaka  naaupo  nd^  thin  if^norant  person  is  an  old 

man. 

Kcla,  ^  that;  referring  lo   objects  not   present,  or 

/c/,  >  which  do  not  regard  the  remarks  made  re- 

Uo -ia     )  specting  them.      Uu la Wke  ua — - — nei 

is    a    strong    emphatic  demonstrative  adjective    pronoun; 
fhus, 

lie  lie  ho!o  I'.a  lio  ikaika  la,  thai  strong  horse  is  a  race  horse. 

ILii,  is  a  woi'd  somewhat  anomalous;  it  is  often  used 
as  a  noun  also  as  w  personal  pronoun,  and  here  as  -a  ]>r(j\x 
pronoun. 

As  a  noun;  o  ka  hoolauiia  nui  ana  me  har. 

Friendly  with  another. 

As  a  pronoun;  haawi  oin  la  hai,  he  gave  it  lo  another. 

As  a  prefix  pronoun:  aihiie  ia  i  ha  hoi  vvaiwai. 

He  stole  another's  proptaly. 

Aole  au  i  hele  i  ko  hai  waena,     I  did  not  go  into  another  s  liekk 

§  153.     Examples  of  the  Prefix  Pronouns. 

Ua  tnan?io  wale  ia  heia  man  mea. 

Mere  matter  ofojjinion  are  these  things. 

Ma  keia  pae  aina,  at  thche  islands  |at  tliis  chisfcr  of  islands.] 

(Ja  uuku  ia,  ua  nni  aku  kcia,  that  was  liide,  this  was  greater, 

Nui  loa  iho  la  keia  nini,  this  disease  greatly  increased. 

0  ia  ka  Inapau  o  keia  pae  aina. 
l%at  is  the  i^ravc  of  these  islands. 
J  keia  tnanawa,  kHa.  nianawa. 

At  that  time  [and]    fhis  time,  i.  e.  continually. 
Pehea  oe  i  ucia  la?  how  are  you  tJm  day?  to  day, 

1  neia  wa  ua  akaka,  at  this  time  it  is  understood. 
E  holo  uiai  ia,  rua  neia  hope  aku. 

He  will  sail  here   hereafler,  i.  e.  from  this  lime  on. 

0  ka  wahine  a  ua  Ulu  nei. 

The  wife  o(  this    Ulu  here,  i.  e.  the  said  Ulu. 

E  kii  aku  ia  e  kaua  me  iia  poe  haole  la. 

He  will  pursue  after  and  make  war  upon  those  foreigners. 

Heaha  keia  nxon  nui,     what  is  that  great  tliifig. 

E  kii  au  e  hao  i  keia  waiwai. 

1  will  <ro  after  and  rob  that  property. 
Hoole  mai  keia,  that  [person]  denied. 
Ua  lele  aku  la  keia  i  ka  pali. 

77a//  (person]  leaped  down  the  precipic<'. 

Ka  uahahee  o  /w  olcio,   die  talshood  oi'  ifial  spee(-h. 


OK    PKoNOlfNS,  87 

(liilcniia,  k.i  iiioa  (»  ;(/.iiii>kii,   (ialt-uii   was  llii    naiiK    *A  tlml  shiji 

O  ka  lalitu  ia  o  llauaii  ikm. 

That  was  flic  latitiide  of  Hawaii. 

Ja  j)o  ilio.  ihat  night  after. 

Ua  kapaia  ua  pae  niokn  ta.     that  cluster  dI  i-laiuls  was   iiaiiird. 

O  Moho  ka  inoa  o  ua  kanaka  la. 

Molio  was  the  iiamL'  of  that  man. 

REMARKS. 

1st.  fieia  and  kela  often  stand  alone  or  rejMtscnl  j fiM-iis 
or  things,  the  nonn  being  unuerstooi!. 
He  mea  hoopunipuui  keia. 
A  deceitful  thing-  this.  i.  e.  this  tiiinir.  sithiir. 
Me  he  aihue  1«  ke  ano  o  kela. 
Like  a  thief  is  the  character  of  that  [fellow.] 

2nd.  Kcia  bnd  keia  when  used  siibstiintivelv  jis  ;ibove 
are  not  unfrequently  used  in  a  sense  of  disparagement  or 
contempt  as,  kcIa,  that  fellow;  keia^  this  fellow. 

Note. — Hawaiians  are  very  uniforni  when  fhev  use  these  two 
words  as  adjective  pronouns,  in  using  ke!a  first:  thus  they  always 
say  kela  niea,  keia  mea,  that  thing,  this  thing.  In  English  we  say 
this  and  that:  the  Hawaiians  reverse  the  order  and  say  that  atid  this, 
meaning  many  things,  every  thing,  6cc. 

3rd.  īa  when  used  by  itself,  signifies  that,  and  so  when 
it  is  followed  by  la:  but  when  followed  by  nti  it  signifies 
this;   as, 

Aole  vvahi  inoino  o  ia  nti,     there  is  no  hurt  upon  this  [person.] 

4th.     Hai  as  a  prefix  pronoun   of  this  class    is  confinetl 
mostly  to  the  Aui  iki,  as  ko  hai,  ka  hai;  as, 
Mai  hoolauna  me  ka  hai  waiiine. 
Be  not  intimate  with  anothers  wife. 
E  waiho  wale  i  ko  hai  waiwai,  let  aloiu  (inoilier'.s  jtiopt  i (\ . 

5th  All  the  foregoing  words  of  this  class  may  be  used  iii 
the  dual  or  plural  numbers  by  piefixing  tnau  ov  jxn ,  iliii- , 
Aui  kuinu,      A^eirt  aina.  /A'jv  land. 

keia  niau  | pact  ainu. 
Aui  pill.  »  keia  aina.  a  keia  aina.  ol  this  land. 

o  keia  mau  aina, 
Aui  iki,  ko  keia  aina,  ka  keia  aina.         this  lan<l'.-. 

ko  keia  mau  aina. 
Aui  paewa,     no  keia  nina,  na  keia  aina.  for  this  land. 

no  keia  mau  aina, 


OF    PllONOUiNS 


Aui  alo, 
Aui  luoe, 
Aui  Ilea, 
Aui  lieie, 
Aui  Inii, 
Aui  j;i, 


!  keia  aiua, 

i  keia  uuiu  aiua, 

ina  keia  aina, 

ma  keia  uiau  aina, 

e  keia  aitia, 

e  keia  mau  aina, 

mai  keia  aina, 

mai  keia  mau  aiiia, 

mo  keia  aina, 

me  keia  mau  aina, 

e  keia  aina, 

e  keia  mau  aina, 


litis  land,  to  ///is,  die. 
at,  on  //m  land. 
O  this  land, 
from  //iis  land, 
with  this  land. 
by  this  land. 


RELATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

§  151.  No  relative  pronouns,  have  been  found  in  the 
language,  tliough  there  are  words  and  forms  of  speech  we 
must  transhue  into  English  as  Relative  pronouns,  because 
we  express  many  ideas  by  that  class  of  words.  Those 
words  which  we  most  commonly  translate  as  relatives, 
are  the  oblique  case  of  the  personal  pronouns,  and  per- 
haps some  of  the  simple  prepositions.  Indeed  from  the 
mode  of  thinking  and  speaking  among  Hawaiians,  it  is 
evident  that  they  have  but  little  use  for  Relative  pro- 
nouns. 

§  155.  A  few  specimens  will  show,  by  a  literal  trans- 
lation, and  the  same  idea  expi-essed  in  English  idiom, 
the  diflerence  in  this  respect  between  the  Hawaiian  and 
European  languages. 

Olelo  mai  la  ka  mea  nana  ka  olclo. 

Lit.  the  [jcrson  spake,  it  loas  his  office  lo  speak. 

Etig.  id.  the  person  s|)ake  ivhosc  office  it  7iuis  to  speak. 

Aole  makou  i  ike  i  ka  mcanana  ia  laau  mahope  aku, 

JAt.  we  do  not  know  (he  person,  /(W  hitii  that  limltcr  heiealloi 

Eng.  id.  we  do  not  know    whose  that  timber  will  l)e  hcrealtet 

O  ka'u  poe  keiki  ka  poc  nana  ka  laau. 

lAt.  my  ehildren  arc  those  /or  them  the  timber. 

Eng.  id.  my  children  arc  tiiosc  7cho  will  own  the  timber. 

Note. — In  these  and  a  multitude  of  other  examples  Ihat  unglu 
4>e  given,  there  is  no  wani  ol  loiiical  clearness  in  the  mcanint:;  bui 
«Ī  is  manifested  l>y  a  diil'crcnl  iorni  of  c.vpression  hum  what  il  la  yn 
ttjost  Kuropeuu  languages. 


OF    PRONOUNS. 


89 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  156.  The  Interrogative  Pronouns  are  ivui,  who.' 
aha,  what?  and  perhaps  hea,  where?  though  this  last  is 
more  often  used  as  an  interrogative  adverb.  IVai  in  the 
Aui  kumu  has  generally  the  o  emphatic  oivail  It  is  appli- 
ed most  jijenerally,  if  not  universally  to  persons  or  to  the 
names  of  things,  and  not  to  things  themselves.  A  Hawai- 
ian always  says,  o  wai  kona  inoa?  lit.  who  is  his  name? 
and  not  heako-  kona  inoa?  what  is  his  name?  thus,  what  is 
the  name  of  that  tree?  must  be  rendered  in  Hawaiian. 
o  wai  ka  inoa  o  ia  laau?  tvho  the  name,  <Slc. 

§  157.    Examples  of  Interrogatives. 
Owai  ka  mea  hale  maanei?  who  has  a  hoiise  hero? 
Ma  ka  aina  oivai  ?  on  the  land  of  whom} 
Wahi  o  ivaii  the  saying  of  whom?  who  f<nid  so? 
Ko  wai  ka  laau?  whose  is  the  timbt-r? 
J\o  ivai  ka  moku?  for  whom  is  the  ship?  whose  liic  ship 
Ka  wai  ka  palapala?  whose  is  the  book? 
Art  wai  ke  keiki?  to  whom  belongs  the  child/ 
Haiiwi  i  ke  kapa  ia  ivail  he  ga\e  the  gan.ienl  to  whom- 
Ma  o  wai  la  i  hoouna  aku  ai?  by  whom  did  he  send  it? 
Mai  tvai  niai  keia  makana?  from  whom  is  this  present? 
Me  wai  oe  i  holo  ai?  with  whom  did  you  sail? 
Ua  hanaia  e  wai}  it  was  done  by  whom} 


§158. 
Aui  kumu, 
Aui  pill, 
Aui  iki, 
Aui  paewa, 
Aui  alo, 
Aui  tnoe, 
Aui  hea, 
Aui  hele. 
Aui  hui- 
Aui  ia. 


Waiy  who,  is  thus  declined. 


ivai,  ernpliatic  o  ivai, 

o  wai,  avvai, 

ko  wai,  ka  wai, 

lio  wai,  iia  wai, 

ia  wai, 

ina  o  wai  la. 


who? 

of  whoin? 

whose? 

for  whom? 

lo  whom,  whom? 

by,  liirough  whom? 


mai  wai  mai,  from  whom? 

ine  wai,  with  whom? 

e  wai,  by  whom? 

§  159.  The  Interrogative  aha,  what,  takes  both  the 
definite  and  indefinite  articles;  as,  he  aha}  what?  iu  the 
Aui  kumu;  but  in  the  oblique  cases  it  mostly  lakes  the  dc' 
finite  article  ke  and  is  thus  declined, 

Aui  kumu,      aha,  ho  aha.  what? 

Aui  pili,  o  kc  aha,  a  kc  aha.  of  what? 

Aui  iki.  k'^  I;-"  aha.,  Ky  l<e  aha, r 


90  OF    PRKPOSmONS. 

Aui  paewa.  no  ke  aha,  na  ke  alia,  tor  what? 

Aui  alo,  i  ke  aha,  to  what?  for  what?  \\  hy- 

Aui  moe.  ma  ke  aha,  hy  what?  by  what  means? 

x\i!i  !iea, 

Aui  hele, 


Aui  hui,  me  ke  aim,  uie  he  aha.        with  what?  like  what? 

Aui  ia,  e  ke  aha,  by  what? 

Note. — Other  forms  of  tliis  word  will  come  more  nroperlv  under 
tlie  head  of  Interrogative  Adverbs;  as,  heahaial  what  is  it?  i  ahai 
ia  aha}  a  what?  for  what?   to  what?  &lc. 

§  160.     Hea  is  sometimes  used  as  an  interrogative  pro- 
noun, but  much  more  frequently  as  an  adverb.    As  an  in-' 
terrogative  pronoun   it  stands  after   the  noun  to    which  it 
rehites;   as,  he  iiumu  hea  ia?  ivhat  sort  of  a  teacher  is  he? 
he  lole  hea  ia.'  what  cloth  is  it? 

Hea  is  thus  declined. 
Aui  kumu.       hea.  where?  what  sort? 

Aui  pili.  o  hea.  a  hea,        of  where,  of  wliat  place,  of  what  sort? 

Aui  iki,  ko  hea,  ka  hea, 

Aui  paewa,     no  hea,  na  hea,     for  what  place,  frotn  what  place? 
Aui  a!o,  i  hea,  ai  hea,  to  what,  to  what  place? 

Aui  moe,         ma  hea,  where,  at  what  place? 

Aui  hea, 

Aui  hele,         mai  hea  mai,                         whence,  from  what  place? 
Aui  hui, 


Aui  ia, 

COMPOUND  PREPOSITIONS. 

§  161.  This  class  of  words  is  made  up  of  the  simple 
prepositions.  See  (§  68)  and  other  words  generally  denot- 
ing place,  or  wdiich  may  be  considered  adverbs  of  place. 
They  are  generally  followed  by  one  or  more  of  the  simple 
prepositions  as  well  as  compounded  with  them.  They  are 
declineable  like  nouns.  But  few  of  them,  however,  have 
all  the  cases;  thus, 

Aiiiku.  Aui  pili  Auiike  Aui  pa.     Auialo.  Aui  moe.   Aui  hele.      Aui  hui. 

Luna,      o  iuna,    ko  luna,  no  luna,  i  Iiina,      maluna,    ni:.i  luna,  above. 

VVaena, i  waena,  ma  N\'ae!ia,  mai  waena,  between. 

I-alo,       o  lalo,      ko  lu!o,     no  lalo,     i  lalo,      ma  lalo,     mai  lalo,  beiow. 

Mua,       i  miia,    ma  imia,    mainiua,      iiiemua,  before. 

Hope,      i  hope,    rna  hone,  after 

\V.iho,    o  \val\o,   ko  waho,  no  waho.i  waho,  ma  walio,  mai  m  alio,  out  nf. 

Muli,       o  muli,     ma  muli,    bthind. 

Loko,  *  o  loko,     ko  loko,  no  ioko,   i  loko,    ma  loko,     mai  loko,  witliiii. 

(),            ko  o,        no  o,         i  o,          ma  o,          mai  o,  there. 

Noi,         o  nei,        ko  nei,      no  lu:!,      ia  nei,     ma  nei,       —  —  here. 

Uk:i,        I)  nka,       ko  «ka,    no  nka,     i  uka,      ma  nka,  inland. 

Kai,         o  kni,        ko  kai,      no  kai,      i  kai,       ma  kai,      niai  iiai,  seawanl 

*  Aloko  x'i  sornctinius  used;   as,  e  awe  inai  aloho  iici,  braig  it  In  here' 


•OV    AD\K]UiS<  1)1. 

J  ^^^-    I'^xamples. 

A  kiei  malalo  o  ka  jinpale  o  ua  liHole. 

And  looked  under  tli?  hut  of  t!ie  foreigsiers. 

jyiahope  o  kona  make  ana,  after  Ids  deatli. 

Akoakoa  ria  kanaka  maloko  o  ka  liale. 

The  people  assembled  in  [wilhin]  the  hour.o. 

Noho  paa  ka  oim  maliina  ona  i  na  la  a  pau. 

Drunkenness  sat.  fast  upon  liim  every  day. 

E  liele  loa  pela  iloko  o  ka  iilulaau,  get  you  oiī  into  the  forest. 

Mawena  o  na  manna,  among  the  tnountnins. 

Ka  hihia  iloko  o  kanaka,  the  difficulty  among  tlie  people. 

Aohe  pa  oloko  o  ka  papu,  there  was  ho  gun  wilhin  the  fort. 

§  1G3.  The  compound  prepositions  are  r)ot  used  (is 
prepositions  in  their  simple  forms;  as,  hina,  waena,  lalo, 
«fee.  but  have  some  one  of  the  simple  prepositions  prefixed. 
The  peculiarity  is,  that  they  are  followed  by  o  the  sign  of 
the  Aui  pili  of  the  noun  foilovving,  as  though  tlsey  govern- 
ed the  Aui  piii  in  connection  with  tiie  simple  preposition 
of  its  own. 

§  164.  Frequently  the  words  waf,  aku,  iho,  or  ac  come 
between  the  compound  preposition  and  the  o  (hr.r  follows; 
thus, 

Eia  no  au  no  loko  mai  a  ka  pilikia. 

Here  I  am  jiat  oul  o/the  difficulty. 

Noho  ia  nuuoaho  aku  o  ke  kulanakauhaie. 

He  lived  ont  o/the  city. 

Haule  ia  iloko  iho  o  ka  lua,  he  fell  into  the  pit. 

Hole  ae  la  ia  iloko  ae  o  ka  pa,   he  ran  inside  o/the  yard. 

NoTF.. — The  same  words  will  be  considered  agam  in  the  cliarac- 
ter  of  Adverbs  of  ])]^rn  m-  mndition. 

<JF  ADVERBS. 

§165.     Adverbs  are  of  three  classes. 

1st.  Such  as  may  be  called  Adverbs  Proper:  that  is, 
words  that  qualify  verbs.  These  are  not  varied  by  cases 
or  otherwise,  except  perhaps  by  adding  some  W(jrd  furthei- 
(jualifying  the  adverb,  and  hence  indirectly  qualifying 
the  meaning  of  the, verb.  T'he  place  of  tiiis  class  of  ad- 
verbs in  the  sentence,  is  invariably  next  after  the  verb,  and 
between  it  and  any  other  words  u^^^ei]  to  modify  the 
meaning  of  the  verb.      (lence,  any  word  that  can  be  \iset\ 


^'2  OF    ADaKRB^s. 

to  quality  a  verb  may  become   an  adverb  by  its    being  in^ 
serted  immediately  alter  the  verb;   thus, 

Hele  lokahi  aku  la  lakou  io  na  la. 

They  went  ivitk  onC  accord  to  hiiii. 

Noho  kuikahi  ia  rue  ko  Beiitania. 

He  lived  under  trtnty  witli  the  English. 

Holo  Uiki  aku  la  me  kona  ikaika 

He  ran  rapidly  with  \\'\?.  might. 

Ae  kolu*  mai  la  lakou^   they  cionsented  quickUj 

Ua  ona  loa  ia>  he  was  vety  ch'unk. 

Hoolei  mnlu  Jakon  i  ka  ukana. 

They  l)roiight  ashore  secretly  their  baggage. 

Noho  uhaiiha  Iho  la  ia. 

He  lived  in  the  manner  of  a  libertine. 

2nd.  Second  Class  of  Adverbs  These  Ad verbj^  c^oll- 
sist  of  most  of  the  woi'ds  before  spoken  of  as  Compound 
Prepositions;  but  they  refer  generally  to  place  ov  direction 
and  are  /tot  followed  hij  o,  as  the  compound  prepositions 
are.     These  may  be  termed  Adverbs  qf  place. 

The  following  are  the  principal. 
Miia,    before,  laila,  there^  loko,  inward,  within. 

Hope,  after,  behind,  muli,  after.  o,  there. 

Luna,  above,  over.  uka,  inland.         nei,  here. 

Lalo,  below,  under.  kai,  seaward.       hea,  where,  how' 

Waena,  between.  ma,   there.  kahi,  there  Where. 

Waho,  oat,  outward.  eia,  here.  aha,   what? 

As  Adverbs,  these  words,  except  aia  and  eia  are  declin- 
ed like  nouns,  but  not  in  all  the  cases;  hea  has  more; 
forms  than  any  other  of  them. 

These  Adverbs  may  also  take  other  adverbs  or  other 
parts  of  speech  to  qualify  them.     They  are  thua  declinedf 


Au 

Au 
Au 
Au 
Au 
Au 
Au 
Au 
Au 


kumu,  -i-^^:^^ — - — ^  -1 ^-^. 

pili,  o  laila,  a  laila,  of  there,  therefore,  then. 

iki,  ko  lailn,  ka  laiia.  of  thetn,  of  there. 

paewa,  no  laila.  for  there,  foi'  that,  vvherefoife» 

alo,  i  lailsi,  there,  that  place. 

moe^  ma  laila,  therCj  at  that  place. 

Ilea, -• 

hele^  tnai  laila,  from  there. 

hui^ 

ia,  — -^- ^— 


ui'    U)W:rrs.  P^ 

Ilea,  the   Inferro^ativn  adverb. 
All!  kiliniJ.  Ilea,  aulien,  whnf,  wIumt? 

Aui  [)ili,  ohca.  ahea,  of  what  pluco? 

Alii  iUi,  ko  liea,  of  what,  of  whom? 

Aui  paewa,        no  hea,  .   for  where,  whence? 

Alii  alo,  i  hea,  towards  where,  where? 

Aui  moe,  ma  hea,  at  what  place? 

Aui  hea, ^-=^ = — 

Aui  helcj  iilai  hea,  from  what  place,  whence? 

Aui  hui, -=-^  _=vr=^ 

Au  ia,  ' ...=^x-.  ^ — '-^^=---— — 

NorE.-^-^Hea  also  has  two  other  formi^;  as  ina  hea}  «lieu,  refer- 
ing^  to  pa^t  time,  and  pchea}  how',  but  these  come  properly  iuto  the 
hext  class. 

Examples  of  the  Second  Class  of  Adverb.'J. 
Aole  nui  na  awa  kdhi  o  komo  ai  na  moku, 
Tliet'e  are  not  many  harbor.s  iVlierC  sJjipM  may  enter. 
O  kahi  palahalaha  ka  nui. 

The  broad  place  is  the  largest ;  kahi  ia  here  a  noun  without  an 
article. 

Ala  ntataita  kekahi  olelo  ana. 

There  in  that  place  is  a  certain  stafement. 

Ke  holo  na  moku  i  laila    if  shipR  sail  thcrC,  [to  Ihat  place.] 

tJa  maikai  ko  uka,  the  inland  is  i?ood. 

Iloko  o  ka  honua  ma  laila,  in  tie  hiterior  there. 

Mai  laila  mai  kahi  ti,  froni  thence  Comef*  tome  of  the  tea, 

Ua  ikaika  ko  laila  kanawai. 

The  laws  Of  that  people  ale  striuirent. 

E  hele  na  moku  kalepa  a  ku  ilaila. 

Merchant  ship.?  go  and  nnchor  there. 

He  oluohi  ma  ka  waha;  aka,  apiki  ōlōkO, 

Pleasant  by  mouth;  l)Ut  roUgish  within. 

He  ano  e  ko  laila  wahine. 

A  stranf^e  fashion  of  the  womeri  of  that  ptatC. 

Mamila  aku  nei,  before  this  time. 

Alaila,  hoi   hou  na'lii,  then  the  chiefs  returned. 

Mnmua,  holo  kekahi  poe  malaila. 

In  former  times,  certain  persons  jjaiicd  thtrc. 

Aole  i  hele  aku  iwaho,  lie  did  not  go  out. 

Aole  paha  aina  maanei,  there  was,  perhap.«i,  no  hind  here. 

Mailalo  mai,  frOm  heloiv. 

Mailoko  mai  o  ka  moana,  from  Out  o/ the  ocean,  i.  e.  out  of. 

j\olaila,  ua  maopopo,    wherefore,  it  i<^  evident. 

Mai  hea  mai  la  lakou?  whence  are  they? 

fCtaha  la  kela  men  nui?   tt'hnt  k  that  area!  thiui'^"* 


94  Of    ADMiRJiS. 

Pii  aku  la  lakou  lliin  t,   t'u'v  ascended  upward. 

Mnuha  wau  me  na  kanaka  o'i?. 

{I  go]  by  land  with  my  people. 

Aole  au  e  lioio  makai,  I  w  ill  not  go  by  sea. 

Aole  ou  aina  olaila,  yon  have  no  land  there. 

ord.  TiiE  ['[TiRD  CLASS  of  adverbs  consists  of  a  large 
number  of  words  cNpre^^sive  of  tme^  place.,  circumstance, 
?nanner,  &c.  They  stand  in  such  places  in  the  sentence 
as  they  are  most  needed  to  express  those  ideas.  They 
are  indeclinable.      The  following  are  the  principal, 

Of  'i'i>fE.  Of  Interrogation. 

A,  when.  Aha,        ) 

Ano,  ')  Eaha,     ^  what? 

A  no  la.       ^  DOW.  Hen  ha,  ) 

Ano  no,      )  Ilea,  where,  how? 
E  noho  nei,  at  the  present  lime.    Ahea,  v/heii.^  [with  the  future.] 

Oiai,   while,   whilst.  Inahea,   when?  [with  the  past.) 
Ae  nei,  at  present,  just  now.         Pehea,   how? 

Nei,   now.  at  present.  Aihea,  where? 

Auhea.   where? 

Of  DicNi^iNG.  i'e,  how? 

Ole,   no.  not.  Wai.  wlio? 

Aole,   no,  nor.  Ehia.   how   many? 
Aole  hoi.  I>ul  not. 

Aohe,   no,  not  at  all.  Of   Assfnt. 

Aoe,  no,  noise.  E.       ^ 

Mai,  do  not.  A(\     ^  .^P'^- 

Mai  noho  a,  do  not.  U.       } 

Alia,   not  yet.  Oia,  that  is  it. 
Alia  nae,  but  not  yet. 

Nae,  but  not.  l)ut.  '  Of    Affirmation. 

No,  indeed,  true,  truly. 

Of   PiESF-MBLANCR.  Hoi,  Certainly,  also, 

fake.   like.  No  hoi,   verily,  indeed,  besides. 
Like  me,   like  as. 

Like  pu,   like  with.  Of  Pi-atf. 

E  like  me,  arcdrding  to.  Ai,   there. 

I*e,  as.  A  puni,   round  about. 
Penoi,  like  this.  thus. 

Peneia,  thus.  Of  Dorrix. 

Peia,   like  this.  Ī,   if. 

Pela,  so,  like  ihat.  Lia,  if. 

Pela  no,  so  indeed.  Paha,   perhaps. 

INda  no  hoi.   so  also.  Ina  palm,   if  perhaps. 


OF     AUVEKES. 


IJ5 


Mc 


ilanin. 


Malaiiiu  jnilia,    5 


■  pcrliap 


how  do  vou  do'/ 


Of   Salitation. 
Alolia,  love. 
Weli,       ^ 
Welina, 
Anoai. 
Aole  hoi  na. 
Ooe  hoi  kahi. 
Nau  hoi  kaka. 
Na  pa  ha  la. 


Iiiehiiici  kclu  la  akii,  da\  IkIoic 

ycsterdav. 
Manndi,   hcreul'tcr,  l)y  and  hy. 
Mahope,   afterwards. 
I  keia  wa  e  iioho  iiei,  jil  this 

pr(,'.scnt  tiiise. 
Loa,  very,  an  inlen.fitive. 
Iki,  a  little,  very  little. 
Pinepiiie.   frequently,  ofieii. 
Eia  kekahi,  again,  besides. 
Eia   hoi   kekaiii,    another    point, 

ai'ain. 


Other  words  become  adverbs  Aole  i  ole,  could  not  Init. 
of  this  class  by  their  use.    They  la  wa,  at  that  time, 
may    be  termed   particles;  they  la  manawa,  at  that  time,  perio<l. 
will  include   some    words   men-  Aneane,  almost,  nearly,  near  to 
tioned  before.  Ta  la,  on  tliat  day. 

Ka  iiioa,   1  thought.  I  supposed,  la  po.  on  that  night. 

la  |)o  iho,  on  the  night  aff(  r. 
Partules,  &.C.  la  po  no,  on  that  very  night. 

Wale,   the  state  of  a  thing  as  it     lo,  truly,  really. 

is,  just  so.  Pela  io  no,  so  it  certainly  is, [was.] 

Wale  no,  only,  that  only,  nothing  E,  another,  new,  strange. 

with.  Ai  ae,  there  [to  place.] 

La,    has  a  slight  reference   to     A  aldahi  iho,  when  it  was  evening. 

place   it  is  often  an  expletive.  Aole  hoi,  nor. 
A  pau,  all.  Pau  ole,  never  done,  never  ended. 

Pu,  together.  Aole  no  hoi,  not  at   all,  not  by 

Ea,  calling  attention  to  what  is  any  means. 

Mau,  vvhat  is  frequentiy  repeated^ 
coustantlv,  continually,  forever.. 
Anhea  oe,  attend,  listen,  give  ear. 
Oi,  while,  whilst,  for  a  while. 
Ai,  with   verbs,   refers    to  time, 
place,  circumstonce,  (/lumlitij, 
quaiilij. 
^Mai,  implies    motion    towards, 
the  speaker. 
\kii. from  the  .speaker. 


Oia,  he,  she,  it,  that  is  it,  yes, 
truly. 

Oiaio,  truly,  verily,  just  so. 

Oia  hoi,  that  is  it,  be  it  so. 

Oia  hoi  ha,  precisely  that,  in  re- 
ply to  what  one  has  said. 

Hoi,  also,  besides. 

Ae  ka  paha,  even  so,  grant  it  is  so. 

Apopo,  tomorrow. 

Apopo  kela  aku,  day  after  to 
morrow. 

Ineihinei,   yesterday. 


Ac,  any  oblique  motion. 
Iho,   downwards,   in    narrative 
tense,  onwards. 


TVoTE. — These  four  last  are  used  with  several  parts  of  speech, 
but  they  will  be  more  particularly  mentioned  under  the  name,  Fer- 
bal  Directives, 


96  or  VERBS. 

OF  CONJUNCTIONS. 

§,166.  Coiijimctions  are  words  used  fo  conned  words 
and  sentences.  The  words  used  exclusively  as  conjunc- 
tions are  not  numerious  in  Hawaiian.  Tiie  following  are 
the  principal, 

A,  and,  and  when,  when;  mostly  used  to  connect  verbs. 

Me,  with,  to<4Cther  with. 

A  me,  and,  and  with. 

Laiia  o,  and  with,  [used  with  the  dna!.] 

Ma  laua,  and  with,  [only  with  the  dual  or  where  two  are  concrned  ] 

LauH  nie,  aloni?  with,  [only  with  the  dual.] 

Nae.  but,  besides,  however;  [a  diflicuU  word  to  define,] 

Aole  /lae,  !iot  however. 

No  ka  niea,   because. 

No  ia  ntea,  for  that  reason,  for  that  cause,  on  this  account. 

No  iaila,  therefore,  wherefore. 

A  laiia,   then. 

Aha,  but,  [a  strong  word  expressing  marked  opposition  of  mean» 

il'r^-] 

lloi,  also. 

Aka  h(»i,  but  besiides  thai. 

I  ole  ia,       )•/•.•* 
.   .     ,     .      >  u  not  It,  or. 
A  I  ole  «a,  5 

OF  INTERJECTIONS. 

§  167.  Interjections  are  words  thrown  into  a  sentence 
to  express  some  sudden  emotion  of  the  mind.  Interject- 
ions are  numerous  amono;  the  llawaiians  as  they  are  anion^i; 
all  illiterate  people.  The  very  common  one  of  ka!  kaha- 
ha!  is  expressive  of  various  emotions;  according  to  the 
pronunciation,  accompanying  gesture,  tone,  etc.,  at  the 
time  of  its  utterance.     The  following  are  some  of  them, 

A.  Ke.  A  kola. 

E.  Auwe.  Ai  kola. 

Ka  c.  Kahehe.  Ea. 

Ahaha.  Kahoho.  Hele  pe!a. 

Kahahu.  Kei.  E  hele  pela  oe. 

Ko.  Nani.  Aole  paha. 

Na,  E  akahele  ka  |)epehi  niai  o  oukou,  o  Lonoikeaouli  na  —  o 
hoi  na  e  ka  uhane. 

OF  VERBS. 

§  168.  Verbs  in  Hawaiian  are  those  words  which  af- 
firm action,  passion,  or  some  quality,  [not  being]  of  their 


OF    VERBS.  97 

subjects.  Compared  with  I^luropeaii  languages,  the 
Hawaiian  verb  has  many  peculiarities.  In  every  full  sen- 
tence in  those  languages,  a  verb  is  necessary  to  complete 
the  idea  intended.  Not  so  in  Hawaiian;  some  of  the 
most  common,  clear  and  strong  affirmations  are  fully 
expressed  withoui  any  kind  of  a  verb.  A  few  of  these 
will  be  given  with  a  literal  translation,  and  also  a  transla- 
tion into  the  English  idiom. 

He  alii  mana*  o  Kamehamcha,  he  naauaof  kona. 

A  powerful  chief  Kameliameha,  an  enlightened  mind  his. 

Eng.  id.  Kamchameha  ivas  a  powerful  chief,  he  possessed  nn 
enlightened  mind. 

He  mai  nui  loa  mamua  a1<u  nei,  he  niai  ahulau. 

A  very  ^reat  sickness  before  this  time,  a  sickness,  pestilence. 

Eng.  id.  There  was  a  very  great  sickness  before  this  time,  a  sick- 
ness called  [like]  a  pestilence. 

Ikaika  no  kekahi  kanaka,  aole  ona  mai  iki  i  kakalnaka,  ahiahi 
make  no. 

A  man  strong  indeed,  not  of  him  the  least  sickness  in  the  morn- 
ing, evening  really  dead. 

Eng.  id.  A  man  would  he  strong  and  without  sickness  in  the 
morning,  in  the  evening  he  would  be  dead. 

Nui  wale  na  kapu  pono  ole  ma  keia  pae  aina  i  ka  wa  kahiko. 

Very  many  the  tabus  not  good  at  these  islands  in  ancient  time. 

Eng.  id.  Very  many  icere  the  tabus,  &c. 

Pela  ma  Nuuhiwa  i  keia  wa  e  noho  nei. 

So  at  Nuuhiwa  at  this  present  time. 

Eng  id.   So  it  is  at  Nuuhiwa  at  this  present  time. 

§  170.  Again,  there  is  no  verb  that  expresses  the  idea 
of  existence  or  of  being.  These  ideas,  so  far  as  they  are 
expressed,  are  expressed  by  the  particles  of  affirmation, 
such  as,  iia,  he,  no,  hoi  and  some  of  the  oblique  cases  of 
the  pronouns;  thus  he  akamai  kona,  lii.  a  skill  of  hini  or 
a  skill  his,  Eng.  skill  is  his,  he  has  skill,  he  is  skillful.  The 
structure  of  the  language  does  not  seem  to  require  any 
such  words  as  verbs  to  be,  or  verbs  of  existence.  The 
particles  mentioned  above  are  used  to  express  emphasis^ 
force  and  strong  assertion  ;  and  thus  the  verb  to  be  is  in 

*  The  word  mana  signified  divine  or  supernatural  power.  Kameha- 
meha  was  supposed  to  be  assisted  by  the  gods  in  his  conquests. 

I  This  word  is  used  comparatively.      Compared  with  the  people   in 
his  day  he  was  enlightened. 
13 


98  OF    VERBS. 

some  measure  provided  for;  but  a  word  expressive  oCthe 
simple  idea  of  existence  is  not  known  to  the  people. 

§  171 .  By  reference  to  several  places  in  the  Grammar^ 
and  by  the  manner  in  wdiich  many  sentences  and  phrases^ 
are  translated,  it  will  be  seen  or  inferred  that  there  are 
no  verbs  to  express, 

1st.  Affirmation  of  any  quality  as  belonging  to  any  sub- 
stance. 

2d.  No  Verb  to  express  being,  existence,  etc.,  like  the 
verb  to  he. 

3d.  No  Ver'b  to  express  having,  owning,  possessing,  etc. 
The  verb  loaa  signifies  to  get,  obtain;  but  not  to  own  or 
possess. 

4th.  There  are  no  Verbs  to  express  duty  or  obligation, 
as  to  be  or  do  any  thing.  The  verb  pouo,  in  some  cases, 
may  express  duty,  but  it  is  weak  in  comparison  with  verbs 
of  that  kind  in  European  languages. 

The  reader  may  naturally  ask  how  these  ideas  are  ex- 
pressed in  Hawaiian,  for  some  of  them,  if  not  all,  seem  to 
be  essential  to  the  communication  of  ideas. 

It  may  be  replied,  they  are  expressed  in  various  waysj 
some  of  which  are  as  follows. 

1st.  By  he  with  an  Adjective  or  Noun,  with  some  kind 
of  a  Pronoun  following;   as, 

Ua  ol«lo  kekahi,  he  kipi  ia,  some  say,  that  is  rebellion. 

He  hoovvahavvaha  ia  i  na  "lii,  it  is  contemning  the  chiefs. 

He  kaikamahine  kula  keia,  this  is  a  school  girl. 

He  noho  malie  konn  ano,  his  character  was  that  of  quietness. 

O  keia  hana,  he  hana  pono  ole  ia,  this  practice  is  an  evil  practice* 

He  poe  anaana  lakou  nei,  these  were  a  company  of  sorcerers. 

Note.— jHe  by  itself  sometimes  contains  the  affirmation  ;  as, 
He  pono  ole,  it  is  unrighteous. 
He  oolea  loa  ke  kanawai  e  kau  nei. 
The  present  law  is  very  grievous. 

2nd.  By  uct  and  an  Adjective  ;  as 

Ua  ma:kaukaxi  anei  oe  no  ka  hcle  ?  are  you  ready  for  going  ? 

I'a  kokoke  ka  manawa  aliaolelo. 

The  time  of  the  Legislature  is  near. 

Ua  pomaikai  anei  ke  au))uni  i  ka  hana  pela? 

h  the  kingdom  benefitted  by  doing  so  ? 


OF    VERBS.  99 

L^a  mau  na  waliine  i  lea  liana  i)ela. 
The  women  are  always  at  that  work. 
Ua  umikumamalima  lausani  a  kcu. 
There  were  fifteen  thou.sand  and  upwards. 

3d.  la  (especially  with  the  o  emphatic  oia)  eia,  keia, 
etc.,  besides  their  office  as  pronouns,  seem  also  to  have 
the  power  of  affirmation;   as, 

He  la  ahaaina  anei  ial  aole,  he  la  pule  ia. 

Is  that  a  feast  day  ?  no,  it  is  a  day  of  prayer. 

Oia  kona  nalo  ana,  that  ivas  her  j)assing  away. 

Aole  nae  ia  he  inea  e  hilahila  ai. 

That  is  not  a  thing  to  be  ashamed  of. 

Oia  ka  poe  i  hele  mai,  those  were  the  persons  who  came. 

Eia  kekahi  mea  mau  ma  ia  hana. 

Here  is  a  thing  of  constant  occurrence  in  that  business. 

4th.  The  Particles  no  and  hoi  (frequently  they  stand 
together)  give  intensity  to  the  expression  and  seem  some 
times  to  supply  the  place  of  an  affirmative  word  ;  as, 

O  oe  no  ka  mea  mama  e  hele. 

Thou  indeed  art  the  thing  swift  to  go. 

Elua  no  mau  wahi  heenalu. 

There  are  indeed  two  places  for  swimming  in  the  surf, 

O  na  moena  ko  makou  waiwai  hoi  e  kuai  ai  i  ka  lole. 

Mats  are  also  our  property  to  buy  cloth  with. 

5th.  The  Verbs  to  have,  to  ovm  or  possess  are  express- 
ed mostly  by  the  Aui  iki  and  Aui  pili  cases  of  the  pro- 
nouns;  as. 

He  makuawahine  haipule  kona,  he  had  a  pious  mother. 

Aole  ana  palapala  i  humuhumuia,  she  had  no  bound  book. 

He  wahi  apana  aina  kona,  he  owns  [has]  a  piece  of  land. 

Note. — The  examples  of  this  kind  are  so  numerous  in  other 
parts  of  the  granmiar  that  more  here  are  not  necessary. 

6th.  The  ideas  of  duty,  obligation  or  to  be  under  obli- 
gation to  do  a  thing  are  expressed  mostly  by  pronouns  in 
the  Aui  paewa;  but  the  Aui  iki  and  Aui  alo  are  some- 
times so  used  ;  as, 

JVrt'w  no  ia  e  kiai  i  ka  hale,  it  7vas  my  duly  to  watch  the  house. 

Nana  e  kii  i  ka  iliahi,  it  belonged  to  him  to  go  for  sandal  wood. 

JSa  lakou  e  kaapuni  i  ka  aina,  they  had  to  go  round  the  land. 

Note. — The  four  cases  Aui  iki,  Aui  pili,  Aui  paewa,  and  Aui 
alo  are  often  exchanged  for  each  other,  that  is  take  each  other's  pla- 
ces, but  as  a  general  rule  they  have  their  own  spheres. 


100  OF    VERBS. 

7th.  In  many  sentences  it  is  difficult  to  tell  on  which 
word  the  affirmation  lies  ;   as, 

Ei^  ka  tnea  kupaianaha,  here  [is]  a  wonderful  thing. 

Aole  anei  he  kanawai  ?   [is]  there  no  law  ? 

Auhea  oikou  ka  poe  naauao  ?  where  [are]  you  ye  wise  men? 

PeJa  ka  inea  rnaopopo  ia'u,  thus  the  thini?  [was]  clear  to  me. 

O  kona  mau  makahiki  he  *2-2,   her  years  [were]  22. 

Nui  loi  kuu  hauoU  i  kuu  heluhelu  ana  i  ka  palapala. 

Great  [was]  my  joy  on  my  reading  the  document. 

Nui  ka  pilikia  o  keia  hana,  great  [is]  the  difficulty  of  this  work. 

§  171.  Again,  there  are  no  verbs  used  expressly  as 
auxiliary  or  helping  verbs  ;  unless,  perhaps,  the  words 
hiki  and  pono,  themselves  regular  verbs,  may,  in  certain 
cases,  be  considered  such.  Hiki  signifies,  to  arrive  at,  to 
come  to  ;  hence,  to  be  able,  can,  may,  and  in  such 
cases,  stands  before  and  governs  an  infinitive  ;  as,  hiki 
no  i  keia  keiki  ke  heluhelu,  lit.  it  has  come  to  this  child  to 
read,  i.  e.  the  child  is  able  to  rend.  Pono  is  used  in  a  sim- 
ilar way.  It  signifies,  to  be  good,  right,  just,  proper,  fit, 
ought,  must,  etc.;  as  pono  ia  lakou  ke  hana  i  mea  ola,  it 
is  right  for  them  to  work  as  a  means  of  living  ;  that  is,  it 
is  proper,  it  is  a  duty,  etc. 

§  172.  There  is  no  variation  of  the  verb  itself  to 
express  number  or  person.  These  are  shown  by  the  form 
of  the  nouns  or  pronouns ;  hence,  the  nouns  and  espe- 
cially the  pronouns  are  much  more  generally  expressed 
than  in  languages  where  number  and  person  are  expressed 
in  the  forms  of  the  verbs. 

OF  THE  ACCIDENTS  OF  THE  VERB. 

§  173.  The  accidents  of  a  Hawaiian  verb  are  four, 
viz.  Person,  Number,  Mood  and  Tense. 

§  174.  Person  relates  to  the  agents  of  an  action  or 
event.  When  one  speaks  of  himself  ov  in  his  own  name, 
it  is  the  first  person.  When  one  speaks  io  another,  it  is 
the  second  person.  When  one  speaks  of  another,  it  is 
the  third  person. 

§  175.  Number  relates  to  the  persons  engaged  whether 
one  or  more.  In  Hawaiian,  the  number  spoken  of  is  either 
one,  hence  called  the  SinaiUar  Number  :  or  fvo  acting  to- 


OF  VERBS. 


roi 


gether,   hence  called  the  Dual  Number,  or   any   number 
more  than   two,  hence  called  the  Plural  Number. 

§  176.   The  three  numbers  of  Verbs  are  expressed  not 
by  any  form  of  the  verb  itself,  but  by  the  noun  or  pronouns. 

EXAMPLE. 


SINGULAR.  VERB 

Au,  wau,  I,    1  per.  hele  au. 


I  went. 

thou  vventest. 
he  went. 


THIRD. 

thou 

ia, 

he,  she,  it. 

you  two 

laua, 

they  two. 

you 

lakou. 

they. 

Oe,  thou,    2  per.  hele  oe, 

la,  lie,    3  per.  hele  ia, 

DUAL.  DUAL. 

Maua,  we,  1  per.  hele  maua,  he  and  I  went,  we  two. 

Kaua,  we,  I  per.  hele  kaua,  thou  &-  I  went,  we  two. 

Oiua,  you,  2  per.   hele  olua,  you  two  went. 

Laua,  they,  3  per.  hele  laua,  they  two  went. 

PLURAL.  PLURAL. 

Makou,         we,    1  per.   hele  makou.  we   [I  and  my  party]  went. 
Kakou,  we,  1  per.  hele  kakou,  we  [I  &l  the  persons  addressed  went] 
Oukou,       you,    2  per.  hele  oukou,       ye,  you  went. 
Lakou,      they,    3  per.  hele  lakou,        they  went. 

The  Persons  may  be  shown  by  themselves ;  thus, 

FIRST.  SECOND. 

Au,  wau,         I,    oe, 
Maua,  we  two,    olua, 
Kaua,  we  two,    oukou, 
Makou,        we, 
Kakou,         we, 

REMARKS. 

§  177.  1st.  The  Person  and  Numbers  of  verbs  as 
exhibited  above  are  in  general  easily  known  as  the  pro- 
noun is  ,o;enerally  expressed. 

2nd.  The  anomaly  of  two  first  persons  in  the  Dual  and 
Plural  numbers  may  occasion  some  difficulty  at  first  to 
strangers;  but  they  add  much  to  the  explicitness  of  the 
language,  and  the  difficulty  of  distinguishing  them  will 
soon  be  overcome.  A  Hawaiian  never  uses  a  dual  num- 
ber for  a  plural  or  vice  versa.  If  a  speaker  is  in  doubt 
as  to  the  number  of  absent  persons  or  things,  whether 
two  or  more  ;  he  may,  in  order  to  be  sure,  use  the  plural  ; 
but  more  generally  would  use  a  periphrasis,  such  as,  ia 
man  mea,  kela  man  mea,  ua  poe  la,  etc, 

§  178.  Respecting  the  double  first  persons  dual  and 
plural,  it  may  be  further  remarked,  that 


W2  OF    MOOD. 

Hele  maua,  signifies  we  two 'ivcnt,  i.  e.,  I  and  another 
person  attached  to,  or  connected  with  me;  but  excluding 
the  person  or  persons  addressed. 

Hole  kaua,  signifies  ive  two  tuent,  i.  e.,  I  and  the  person 
addressed. 

Hele  ma'kou,  signifies  we  went,  [i.  e.,  any  number  over 
two]  I  and  my  party  or  those  connected  with  me,  but  ex- 
cluding the  persons  addressed. 

Hele  kakou,  signifies  we  went,  [i.  e.,  any  number  over 
two]  I  and  the  party  addressed. 

OF  MOOD. 

§  179.  Mood,  in  grammar,  is  the  manner  in  which  a 
thing  is  spoken  of.  We  may  affirm  something  positively, 
or  we  may  ask  a  question.  We  may  command,  ask,  or 
entreat.  We  may  speak  in  doubt  or  uncertainty  of  a 
thing  ;  and  we  may  speak  in  general  terms  without  ref- 
erence to  person  or  number.  The  Hawaiian  has  all  these 
methods  of  speaking. 

§  180.  There  are  four  Moods  of  verbs  in  the  Hawaii- 
an; viz.  1st,  The  Indicative  which  affirms  something  posi- 
tively of  its  subject ;  or  it  is  used  in  asking  questions;  as, 

Alakai  ae  la  i  ka  malihini,  he  guided  the  stranger. 
Ua  puhi  anei  oia  i  ka  pu  ?  did  he  blow  the  shell  ? 

2nd.   The  Imperative,  commands,  entreats  or  begs  ;   as, 
E  hoi  oe,  i  ka  hale,  mai  puka  mai  iwaho. 
Return  to  the  house,  do  not  come  out. 

3rd.  The  Subjunctive  speaks  of  something  under  a 
doubt  or  condition  ;  as, 

Ina  e  lohe  pono  oe,  alalia  malama. 
Jf  you  hear  correctly,  then  obey. 

4th.  The  Infinitive  speaks  of  something  done  without 
reference  to  person  or  number  ;   as, 

Aole  c  pono  ke  hoomoloiva,  it  is  not  right  to  he  idle. 

NoTR. — Examples  of  Moods  will  be  inserted  more  fiilly  hereafter. 
OF  TENSE. 

§  181.  Tense,  in  grammar,  relates  to  the  time  in  which 
a  thing  is  done  or  said  to  be  done.  The  great  natural 
divisions  are  Past,  Present  and  Future  Tenses.  But  tense 
as  used  in  the   Hawaiian  language  is  more  confused  than 


OF   TExN'SE,  103 

any  other  part  of  the  verb.  The  above  mentioned  grand 
divisions  of  past,  present  and  I^uture  are  somewhat  dis- 
tinctly marked  ;  but  in  practice  they  run  into  each  other. 
Tlie  past  tenses  are  all  Aorists  or  Indefinite  tenses,  and 
one  is  used  for  another  according  to  the  structure  of  the 
sentence. 

§  182.  The  root  or  the  simplest  form  of  the  verb  is  a 
preterite  tense.  In  this  respect,  the  Hawaiian  resembles 
some  of  the  ancient  Asiatic  languages.  The  simple 
forms  of  verbs  too  are  generally  by-syllabic,  though  there 
are  many  exceptions  ;  as, 

1st.  Monosyllabic  ;  j>cf  to  strike,  i  to  say,  ko  to  fulfill,  ku  to  stand, 
a  to  burn,  ha  to  breathe,  na  to  be  quiet,  lu  to  scatter,  etc. 

2nd.  Pollysyllabic ;  aloha  to  love,  apono  to  approve,  ulono  to 
howl,  etc.  Most  of  these  by  analyzing  can  be  reduced  to  two  syllables. 

3d.  But  the  greater  part  of  the  verbs  are  bi-syllabic  in  their  roots; 
as,  haha  to  feel,  koho,  to  choose,  lana  to  fioat,  melc  to  sing,  noho 
to  sit,  pale  to  ward  off,  ivahi  to  break,  etc. 

OF  PRETERITE  TENSES. 

§  183.  The  Preterite  or  past  tenses  h^xefive  different 
forms  in  the  Indicative  mood.  It  is  difficult  to  divide 
them  mio  perfect,  imperfect  and  pluperfect  etc.  tenses,  ex- 
cept that  the  fifth,  answers  tolerably  well  for  q.  pluperfect. 
It  is  better,  therefore,  to  distinguish  them  as  the  first,  sec- 
ond, third,  fourth  and  fifth  forms  of  the  Preterite  tense. 

The  root  or  simple  form  of  a  Hawaiian  verb  is  one  with- 
out any  prefix.  It  is  an  indefinite  preterite  tense,  mostly 
used  in  narrative. 

§184.    Indicative  Mood,  Preterite  Tense,  First  Form. 

')  1st  person,     holo  au,  I  ran. 

Singular,    >2nd  person,  holo  oe,  thou  ranest. 

3  3rd  person,    holo  ia,  he  ran. 


Dual, 


"^  1st  person,     holo  maua,  we  two  ran,  [he  and  I  ran.j 

!  1st  person,     holo  kaua,  we  two  ran,  [thou  dc  I  ran.J 

j  2nd  person,   holo  olua,  you  two  ran. 

J  3rd  person,    holo  laua.  they  two  ran. 

^  1st  person,     holoniakou,  we  ran,  [I  and  they  ran.] 

p.      ,      I  1st  person,     holo  kakou,  we  ran,  [I  and  you  ran.] 

'    [2nd  person,   holp  onkou,  ye  or  you  run. 

j  3rd  person,    holo  lakou.  they  ran. 


104  OF    TENSE. 

This  tense  is  generally  found  in  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence ;   as,  1st, 

Holo  mai  la  lakou  i  Hoonaunau,  they  sailed  to  Hoonaunau. 
Hoi  aku  la  o  Kiwalao,  Kiwalao  returned. 
JSoho  no  oia  ma  Oahu,   he  lived  at  Oahu. 
I  mai  la  lakou,  ua  elemakuie  oe. 
They  said  you  have  become  an  old  man. 

2nd.  It  is  used  very  generally  after  the  Adverb  ^/az'/a, 
then  ;   as. 

Alalia,  kuka  iho  la  lakou,  then  they  took  council. 
Alalia,  lilo  ke  aupunl  la  la,  then,  the  kingdom  became  his. 
Alalia,  pau  ke  kaua,  then  the  war  ceased. 
Alalia,  holo  la  olelo  ana,  then,  the  decree  passed. 

Note. — After  alaila,  ua  is   sometimes  inserted  before  the  verb. 

3rd.  It  is  used  more  rarely  after  the  Adverb  Nolaila, 
therefore  ;  as, 

Nolaila,  pae  ae  la  lakou  i  Hoonaunau. 

Therefore,  they  ivent  ashore  at  Hoonaunau. 

Nolaila,  hee  aku  la  o  Kalanlopuu,  therefore  Kalaniopuu  fled. 

Note. — After  nolaila,  ua  is  sometimes  used  ;  as, 

Nolaila,  ua  akaka  ka  waiwai  o  ka  helu. 

Wherefore,  the  value  of  arithmetic  is  clear. 

4th.  It  is  used  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence  after  an  ex- 
planatory clause  ;  as, 

No  ka  make  ana,  ku  ae  la  kona  hoahanau. 
On  account  of  his  death,  his  brother  rose  up. 
la  vva,  loaa  la  Kamehameha  na  koa. 
At  that  time,  Kamehameha  obtained  soldiers. 
A  ma  la  hope  iho,  ici  iho  la  o  Kona. 
Afterwards,  there  was  a  famine  at  Kona. 

Preterite  Tense,  Second  form,     a. 

§  185.  In  this  form,  the  verb  is  preceeded  by  a.  It  is 
used  mostly  in  narrative  tenses  where  the  a  sometimes 
merely  signifies  and,  and  is  used  as  a  connective  ;  but 
more  generally  it  signifies,  and  when,  when,  and  then,  etc. 
It  implies  that  some  action  or  event  has  preceeded. 


pretkuitl:  ti£Nsi:.  105 

iist  per.  a  liana  an,  and  when  I  made. 

■B'lng.  >  '2d  per.  a  liana  oe,  and  when  thou  madest. 

)3d  per.  a  haiia  ia,  and  when  he  made. 

"I   1st  per.  a  liana   matia,  and  when  we  madt\    (he  and  I.) 

Dual    I  '^^  '^®''*      ^  ''^"^  '"''"^'       ^"^  ^^'''^■"  ^^  "I'^fl^'  [t'"^^»"  "'id  Ij 
J  2d  per.       a  hana  olna,        and  when  you  made   ("you    two.) 
J  3d  per.       a  haiia  laua,        and  wlien  ihey  made  [they  two.) 
^   1st  per.      a  hana  niakou,    and  when  we  made,  [they  and  11 
Plur    l^'^^  ^^^'      ^  '^'"^^  kakou,    and  when  wc  made,  [you  and  I] 
j  2d  per.       a  hana  oukou.    asid  when  you  made, 
j  3d  per.       a  hana  lakou,     and  when  they  made. 
EXAMPLES. 
A  hala  na  la  he  umi  paha,  alalia,  kulou  ke  alii  a  olelo  oku. 
And  when  ten  days  perhaps  were  passed,  then  the  king  stood  up 
and  spake. 

A  lohe  kekahi  alii,  a7id  v)hsn  a  certain  chief  heard. 

E  kali  mai  a  hiki  aku  ke  keiki,  wait  rtn^iZ  the  young  man  arrives, 

Holo  loa  no  ia  a  pae  i  Kailua. 

He  sailed  fast  till  he  he  arrived  Sit  Kailua. 

Preterite  Tense,  Third  form,     i. 

§  186.  Tills  form  is  ciistinguished  by  having /prf  fixed 
to  the  simple  form  of  the  verb.  It  apparently  makes  lit- 
tle difference  as  to  the  time,  but  it  is  found  in  sentences 
differently  constructed  from  the  preceding  ;   thus, 

^  1st  person,  i  noho  au,  I  lived. 

Sing.       >  2nd  person,  i  noho  oe,  thou  livedest. 

3  3d  person,  i  noho  ia,  he  lived. 

"]  1st  person,  i  noho  maua,  we  two  lived,  [he  and  I.] 

r)     I       fist  person,  i  noho  kaua,  we  two  lived,  [thou  and  I.] 

j  2nd  person,  i  noho  olua,  you  two  lived. 

J  3d  person,  i  noho  laua,  they  two  lived. 

"^  1st  person,  i  noho  makou,  wc  lived,  [they  and  I.] 

p,       ,      i   1st  person,  i  noho  kakou,  we  lived,  [ye  and   L] 

ui"^  •     r  2nd  person,  i  noho  oukou,  ye  lived. 

J  3d  person,  i  noho  lakou,  they  lived. 

This  tense  is  used  as  follows,  1st.  When  it  begins  a 
:sentence  and  synonymous  with  ua  ;  as, 

I  hele  mai  nei  au  e  hai  aku  ia  oe. 
I  have  come  here  to  inform   you. 

2nd.  It  is  used  i?m/  frequently  after  the  negative  Aole. 
Aole  no  hoi  i  loheia,  it  Wfis  not  even  heard  of. 
14  ^ 


106  PRETERITE    TEASE, 

Aole  oia  i  ae  mai,  he  did  not  consent. 
Aole  i  pan  ka  aie,  the  debt  was  not  paid. 

3rd.  It  is  used  after  a  noun  of  place. 
Malaila  knhi  i  noho  ai,   ko  Hawaii. 
In  such  a  pkace  dwelt  the  Hawaiians. 

4th.   After  the  pronouns  ana  or  na7ia. 

He  ahi  nana  i  hoolilo  i  ka  aina. 

The  chief  by  whom  the  land  ivas  transferred. 

Na  elele  ana  i  hoouna  mai  ai,  tiie  messengers  whom  he  sent., 

5th.  Ahev  the  ndverhs  pcia  ov  jjda  paha. 
Pela  paha  i  lilo  ai  ka  aina  i  na  'iii. 
So  perhaps  the  land  became  the  chiefs'. 

6th.    After  a   portion    of   a    sentence   or   explanatory 
clause. 

He  nui  na  mea  e  ae  i  hanaia. 

A  great  many  other  things  icere  done. 

Ma  keia  mea  paha  i  lilo  ai  ka  aina. 

By  this  means  perhaps  the  land  was  lost. 

Nui  ke  ano  o  na  haole  i  liiki  mai. 

Various  the  characters  of  the  foreigners  wlio  came  here. 

Eia  na  mea  i  emi  ai,  here  is  the  cause  why  they  decreased. 

I  ka  wa  t  noho  ai  Kamehameha,  at  the  time  Kamehameha  livedo 

Preterite  Tense,  Fourth  form,  ua. 
§  187.  The  fourth  form  of  the  Preterite  tense  is 
known  by  the  prefix  ua.  Asa.  sign  of  the  preterite,  it  is, 
perhaps,  more  often  used  as  a  perfect  tense  than  any  oth- 
er. But  it  will  be  seen  that  it  works  itself  'mtt>  almost 
every  tense  and  Mood.  Strictly  speaking,  the  va  is  a 
particle  of  affirmation,  and  may  be  prefixed  to  verbs,  ad- 
jectives, nouns,  &.C.;  and  tends  to  apply  or  fix  or  affirm 
some  quality  or  circumstance  of  the  word  to  which  it  is 
prefixed,  to  its  subject.  It  is  so  often  used  with  verbs 
that  it  may  properly  constitute  one  of  its  tenses. 

Mst  per.  ua  huna  au,         I  have  concealed. 
Sing.  >  2d  per.    ua  huna  oe,          thou  hast  concealed. 

y.id  per.    ua  huna  ia,  he  has  concealed. 

"^  1st  per.  ua  huna  maua,    we  two  have  concealed,  [he  and  I.J 
y.     ,    I  1st  per.  ua  huna  kaua,     we  two  have  concealed  [thou  &  I.] 

'  j  2d  per.    ua  huna  olua,      you  two  have  concealed. 

J  3d  per,   ua  huna  laua,       they  two  have  concealed. 


I'fnrrF.RlTK    TKNSK.  1 07 

'\  Ut  [)or.  iia  Ilium  makoii,  wc  have  coiicoalcd,  [tlioy  and   I.J 

L^k ,      {  1st  per.  iia  liiiiia  kakou,   wc  have  concealed,  Ive  and  I.J 

[  2(1  per.  iia  iiuna  oukoii,  3(»n  liave  concealed. 

J  -^d  per.  «a  Kiiiia  lakou,    tliey  have-  concealed. 

This  tense  i.s  used  mostly  as  follows;  Is't.  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  sentence  or  paragraph  when  the  verb  is  formed 
arom  an  Adjective  ;   as, 

Ua  like  me  kana  i  i  mai  ai,   it  was  like  to  what  he  said. 

[Jn  nele  makon  i  ka  hale  ole,  we  aye  desiitwie,   having  no  honse„ 

Ua  nui  loa  ka  poe  i  haule. 

They  are  very  many  who  have  fallen, 

Ua  ona  i  ka  rama,  hele  hikaka. 

He  was  dnink  with  rQin,  he  went  staggering. 

2nd.  At  the  beginning  of  a  paragraph,  ^or  the  mperjecl 
K)Y  perfect  tense  ;  as, 

Ua  hele  mai  tia  kanaka  he  nui  loa. 

There  came  a  great  many  men. 

Ua  hina  iho  nei  ka  hale  o  makoa. 

The  house  of  us  has  J usl  fallen. 

Ua  ike  au  i  koil  ano,  I  knew  yoQr  charactet. 

Ua  lohe  wale  au  i  kona  make. 

I  have  merely  heard  o(  his  death. 

3d.  It  is  used  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence  ;  thus, 

No  ka  mea,  ua  kokua  mai  oia  ia'u,  because,  he  assisted  m<c-. 

No  ko'u  aloha,  ua  hele  mai  nei  au. 

Out  of  compassion,  I  have  come  here. 

Ike  mai  la,  ua  pau  ka  hale  i  ke  ahi. 

He  saw,  the  house  was  consumed  by  hre. 

Kii  aku  au  ia  oe,  a,  ua  hele  mai. 

I  sent  for  you,  and,  you  have  come. 

4th.    Ua  is  often  synonymous  with  L 

Ua  hele  mai  nei  au  e  hai  aku  ia  oe. 

I  have  come  here  to  speak  to  you. 

I  hele  mai  nei  au  e  hai  aku  ia  oe,  I  came  hcie  to  apeak  to  yoft. 

5th.  It  is  ofteti  used  with  the  sense  of  the  p;esent;   as, 
Ua  ae  au  e  kokua  ia  oe,  Ī  conrenl  to  assist  you. 
Ua  kapa  ua  poe  naau|)o  nei  ia  make,  he  lealea. 
The  ignorant  here,  call  this  death,  pleasnre. 

Preterite  Tense,  Fifth  form,     ua^ — 'C. 
§   188.     The  Fifth  form  of  a  Preterit-e  ten^e  is  known 
^y  ua  prefixed  and  c  sullixed  to  the  verb;   as  wt  ike  c  au, 
■/  have  aeen  b&forej  i.  e.-,  I  had  seen.     The  klea  is  <hat  some 


108  PRESF.NT    TENSE. 

previous  action  or  event  is  referred  to.     This   resemble?^ 
in  ineaning  -d  pluperfect  tense. 

^  1st  per.  u;i  ike  e  au,  i  had  known,  lit.  I  liiive  known 

Sing'.  \'if.\  per.  ii;i  ike  e  oe,  thou  hast  known.  [V;efoie. 

>3(i   per.  nil  ike  e  ia,  he  had  known. 

]   Irt  per.  ua  jke  e  niaua.  ^^'e  two  had  known,  [he  and  T.j 

j^     ,    I   Kst  per.  ua  ike  c  kaua,  we  two  had  known,  [you  and  \.\ 

^^    J  2d  per.  ua  ike  e  oUia,  yon  two  had  known. 

J  3d   per.  ua  ike  e  }aua.  they  two  had  known. 

"I   1st  per.  ua  ike  e  nialvon,  we  had  known,  [tliey  and  1.] 

p,        !  1st  per.  ira  iJ-.e  e  kakon,  we  had  known,    [yon  and  !.| 

^^'  (  '•id  per.  ua  ike  e  oukou,  ye  had  known. 

J  3d  per.  ua  ike  e  lakou,  they  had  known. 

EXAMPLES. 

JJa  lilo  e  ke  aupuni  ia  ia. 

The  kingdom  had  been  transferred  to  hin>. 

Ua  hoakaka  e  inai^ua  i  kona  ano. 

He  had  explained  before  his  character. 

Ua  noonoo  e  no  wan,  /  had  thought. 

Note. — There  is  another  form  hke  this,  where  thee  however  ha? 
a  difterent  meaning.     It  signifies  against,  opposed  to,  &-c.;  as, 

Ua  ku  e  na  kanaka  ia  Lono,  the  people  wfSre  opposed  to  Lono, 

The  c  is  sometimes  suffixed  to  other  forms  or  tenses. 
Present  Texse,  Indicative  Mood. 

§  189.  The  Present  tense  has  two  forms,  both  com- 
pound ones.  The  ;st  is  made  by  prefixing  ke  and  sufiix- 
ing  7iei ;  jis,  ke  lawe  ?iei  au,  I  take^  or  carry-  This  form 
supposes  that  the  action  is  present,  for  ?iei  implies  both 
present  fime  and  present  jiJace. 

The  2nd  form  is  made  by  prefixing  e  the  sign  of  the  fu- 
ture, and  suffixing  ana  the  participial  termination  ;  as,  " 
lawe  ana  au,  I  am  taking.  This  is  sometimes  used  for  a 
preterite  tense  and  sometimes  for  a  future  ;  as, 

£  anu  rt?irt  au  ma  keia  hope  aku,  1  shall  be  cold  hereafter. 

Sometimes  the  a?ia  is  changed  into  nei ;  ns, 

Malaila  makou  e  kida  nei,  there  we  a-.e  having   school. 

fiiterally,  there  toe  school. 

Ue  pono  anei  ka  olua  e  malama  nei  ? 

Is  tliat  good  which  you  two  are  now  observing? 

Sometimes  la  is  used  instead  of  nei  ;  as,  kc  lawe  Ja  ia^ 
he  carries  or  is  carrying  ;  but   that   form  implies  that  the 


QCdon,   ihougli  r.ow  iloing  i;s  doing  ;it  anolhcM-  j)liic{'  ;    lui* 
Id  as  a  particle  ol"  i)lace  is  the  opposite  of  nei ;  us, 

A'e  hulilmli  la  lakou  i  ua  pun  pohaku  li  inu  kalii  (>. 

They  are  now  carrying  tluit  heap  of  stones  to  aiioilxT  plact;. 

ExAiAiPLEj  IsT  Form,  Ptesent  Tetise. 
^  1st  per.     ke  noi  nci  an,  J.  beg. 

Sintr.       >-2nd  per.    ke  noi  nei  oe,  thou  hegesl. 

33(1   per.      ke  noi  nei  ia,  lie  l)e,u'.s. 

^   1st  per.     ke  noi  nei  niauuj         we  two  Ix''^-  (In;  a.id  I.) 
j^     I        !   l>>\.  per.      ke  iioi  nci  kaua,  we  two  heu-,  (y<ni  aiul  I  ) 

[  '2d   per.     ke  noi  nei  ohia,  yon  two  beg; 

J  .'M   |)er.      ke  noi  nei  kiua,  they  two  l)eg. 

^  1st  per.     ke  noi  nei   inakou,     we  beg,  (they  and  f.) 
PI       ,      fist  per.     ke  noi   nei   kakoit,     we  beg^  (you  and  \.) 
j  •2d  per.      ke  noi  nei  oukou,       ye  bog. 
J  od   per.     ke  noi  nei  lakou,         they   beg. 
Ke  pule  aku  ?iei  inakou,  ice  prtty. 
Ke  noi  aku  nei  makou  ia  ia,  ive  beseech  him. 
Ke  hai  aku  nci  ia  ia'u,  he  says  to  inc. 
Ke  moe  ialani  nci  na  iiioa,   the  names  lie  m  rows. 
Ke  hooU  nci  lakou,  they  deny. 

Ex a:\iple,  2nd  Form,  Present  Tense. 

)  1st  person,  e  lavve  ana  an,  I  carry.  I  am  carrying,    [ing. 

Sing.  >  2d  persoUj  e  laWe  ana  oe,  thou  caniest,  thou  art  carry- 

)  3d  person,  e  lawe  ana  ia,  he  cairics,  he  is  carrying. 

^   1st  person,  e  laWe  ana  maua,  we  two  carry,  Ac,  (he  &  Ī.) 

1^     I   list  person, e  lawe  ana  kaua,  vye  two  carry,  (\ou  and  1.) 

I  2d  person,  e  lavve  ana  ohia,  you  t\'.o  canv. 

J  3d  person,  e  lawe  ana  laua,  they  two  carry. 

^   Ist  person,  e  lavye  ana  makou,  we  carry  (they  and  Ī.) 

p.    _    !   Ist  person,  e  lawe  ana  kakou,  we  carry  (you  and  I  ) 

j  ^d  per.^on,  c  lawe  ana  oukou,  ye  c.irry. 

J  3d  person,  e  lawe  ana  lakou,  the}'  carry. 
A  korno  ia  i  ka  hale  ē  noko  aaa  o  Pipi. 
He  entered  th.e  house  where  Pipi  lives. 

FUTURE  TENSE. 
§   190.     The  future  Ten.^e  has  two  forms  ;  oi-  thev  may 
be  called  the  Firs'  and  Second  Future  Tenses. 

1st.   The  First   Future  is   known   by   c  prefixed  to  (he 
root  of  the   yerb;    as  e  lawe  au,  I  shall  oi'  will  take. 


Ph 


111)  i'UTURK    TK\SVJ. 

c  lolic;  an,  I  shall  or  will  lu^ar. 

Sins^-.       J>  -2(1  per.      e  lolic  oe,  tlioii  siialt  or  wilt  hear-. 

e  lolie  ia,  he  shall  or  will  hear. 

e  lohe  niana,  we  two  shall  hear,  iLc. 

jx      ,        [  I^t  per.      e  lohe  kana,  we  two  shall  hear,  &;c. 

Dual.       >  .  ,   '  !   ,        1  ,    .>  , 

e  lone  oliia-,  you  two  shall  hear. 

e  lohe  laua,  they  two  shall  hear. 

e  loiin  inakou,  we  shall   hear,  &c. 

e  hihe  kakou,  We  shall   hear,  ttc. 

e  hjJie  oukoui,  you  shall  hear. 

e  iohe  lakou,  ihey  .shall   hear. 

EXAMPLES. 

Aoie  e  kaiia  akVi  i  k'o  kakou  akuji. 

We  ivill  \ioi  fight  against  oui-  god. 

O  ka  niea  e  hatui  i  ka  hewa,  who  ever  shall  do  wrong.  * 

Aole  anei  oe  e  haalele  ia  aoao  ?  itill  you  not  forsake  that  way  ■? 

Fj  haalele  no  an-,  1  will  forsake  it. 

Aole  au  e  hana  hou  ma  ia  liana,  I  tcill  not  do  this  work  again. 

Aole  makou  e  hana  i  kau  hana,  \X  e  icill  not  do  your  work. 

2nd.  SECOND  FUTURE  TENSE. 

The  Second  Future  tense  has  the  sam-e  foiMii  with  the 
i'  irst  with  an  additional  e  suffixed  ;  as,  e  lohe  e  au,  lit.  I 
■^hall  hear  before^  ov  I  shall  have  heard.  This  Form  is 
not  so  often  used  as  some  others,  as  the  idea  of  a  Second 
Future  is  often  made  by  -the  use  of  particles,  adverbs  of 
time,  &.C.;  as, 

E  ihea  aaanzi  ia  M'imuā,  that  itill  have  bee»,  shoited  first. 

^  1st  per.   e   lohe  e  au,        I  shall  have  heard. 
'Sin.    > -Jd  per.    e  lohe  e  oe,         they  '-vill  have  heard. 

}  ;Jd  per.    e  lohe  e  ia,  he  will  have  heard. 

^  1st  per.   e  'Inhe  -e  n?aua,    we  two  sliaM  have  heard,  {Ire  ct  l.) 
T\     1   I  '■'^*  l^*^'"    ^  '"^'*^  ®  kana,    we  two  shall  haVe  heard,  thou  <t  I. 

[  2(1  per.    e  lohe  e  olua,     you  \\\'o  wiH  haVe  heard. 

J  3d  per.    e  loh6  e  laua,     they  two  will  have   heard. 

^  1st  per.  e  lohe  e  niakou,  we  ishall  have  heard,  fthey  &.  I.) 
i  I   is!  per.    e  lolie  e  kakou,  vve  shall  have  heard,  (you  &.  I.) 

j  -id  per.    e  lo'ie  e  onkon,ye  sliall  have  heard. 

J  '.I'}  per.    e  l6!ic  e  lakou.   they  sliall  have  lita'rd. 
He  pono  i  ka  lunakanaWai  e  Olelo  e  aku  i  na  niakna. 
It  would  have  been  prcper  for  tl»e  judge  to  have  jh'^t   spoken  to 
the  |)areuts. 


1iAHM:K.\T1\  K    .MOOD.  11  \ 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 
§  191.  The  Imperative  Mood  in  ll;\v;iii:in  lii:s  tlio 
geueral  meaning  that  it  has  in  otlier  hingwagcs  ;  it  com- 
mands, forbids,  entreats,  &c.  The  First  Form  is  the 
j5ame  as  the  First  F»-U»ii-e,  viz:  e  jirefixed  to  the  verb,  arid 
can  only  be  distinguished  I'rom  it  by  the  scope  of  the  pas-, 
gage.  Of  course  it  wants  the  first  person  in  the  Singular 
and  one  of  the  first  persons  in  the  Dual  iind  1  luia|. 

I.AiPER.vTivE  Moop,  First  Form, 
c^.  )  2(1  person,    e  nana  oe,  look  thou. 

^"       5  "-»^1  P^Tson,    e  iiaiiaia,  let  liim  look. 

^  1st  person,    e  nana  kaiia,         U'X  us  luo  look. 
Dual.       ^ '2d  person,    e  nana  oiua,  look  you  tyvo. 

)  3(1  person,    e  nana  laua,  let  them  twQ  look. 

^  1st  person,    e  nana  kakou,      let  us  look. 
plural.     >  "2d  person,    e  nana  o-akou,     look  ye. 

^3d  person,     e  nana  lakou,       let  them  look. 
EXAMPLES. 
E  malamn  oukou  ia  onkou  iho,  take  ye  h^cd  \o.  yoiirselvess. 
E  alu  oukou  a  e  hanci  mc  ka  ikaika. 
Combine  ije  and  icork  with  streniith. 
E  noonoo  i  ka  mea  a  oukou  i  lohe  ai. 
Think  of  that  of  which  you  liave  heard. 
E  hoi  oe  i  kou  vyahi  a  hiamoe. 
Go  back  to  your  place  and  go  to  aleep. 
E  kit  i  ka  laau  no  ka  rnai. 
Fetch  the  medicine  for  the  sick  person. 
E  ala  oe,  mai  kou  hiamoe  ana. 
Bake  up,  from  your  slumberina'. 

§>    192.     Tliere    is    another    form    of    the    Im|)erativo 
Mood  used  in  the  sense  of  forbidding.     It  is  formed  by 
prefixing  the  particle  mai  do  not,  to  the  verb  ;   thus, 
rj.  ^ -2(1  per.      mai  huli  oe,          do  not  thou  turn,  turn  thou  not 

"^'      5  3d  per.      mai  imli  ia,  let  him  not  turn, 

^  1st  per.     mai  huli   kaua,     let  us  two  not  turn. 
i)ual.      >2ā  |)er.      mai  huli  olua.       turn  not  you  two. 

V3d  per.      mai  huli  laua,       let  them  two  not  turn. 
^  1st  per.     mai  huli  kakou,    let  us  not  turn. 
Plural.    >  2d  per.      mai  huli  oukou,  turn  ye  not. 

V^d  per.      mai  huli  lakou.     let  them  not  turn. 
EXAMPLES. 
Mai  hana  kou  pcla,  do  not  so  again.  ' 


112  SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

.Mai  liana  i  ke  kapa  o  ka  wahine. 

Look  not  upon   the  dress  of  a  female. 

Mai  liolo  kiki  e  like  me  na  holoholona. 

iJo  not  run  pell  mell  like  the  animals. 

Mai  walaau,  r.iai  waioa,  be  not  noisy,  be  not  boisterous. 

]M<ii  hooke  oe  i  ka  makou  hana,  do  not  hinder  our  work. 

Mai  olelo  oe  i  ka  olelo  a  ke  Akua. 

Do  not  speak  respect i.'ie^  the  word  of  God. 

Mai  kaawi  oe  i  ke  keiki,  do  not  give  up  the  ciiild. 
REMARKS. 

1st.  The  above  particle  mai  must  be  distinguished 
from  another  pjiriicle  ?nal  which  signifies  near,  near  to,  al- 
most ;  as, 

Mai  haule  ia,   he  was  near  falling. 

J\Iai  ike  ole  oe  ia'u,  you  was  near  never  seeing  me, 

Mai  make  au,  I  wa*i  near  dying. 

Mai  pau  loa  i  ka  make,  almost  all  were  destroyed. 

2nd.  In  vehement,  pnssionate  speaking,  the  c  of  the 
Imperative  mood  is  not  heard  ;  malama  ia  oukou  iho,  take 
heed  to  vourselves,  instead  of  e  malama. 

3rd.  Foieigners  are  inclined  to  use  aole  for  a  negative 
or  forbidding  imperative;  as,  aole  hana  pela,  do  not  so, 
and  this  is  intelligible  to  Hawaiians  ;  but  where  the  pro- 
hibition is  direct  and  positive  the}^  always  use  mai. 

4th.  The  particle  ua  is  used  before  oki  the  imperative 
to  cut  off,  cease  doing  a  thing,  stop  ;   as, 

Va  oki  oe  i  ka  olelo,  stop  your  talk. 

Ua  oki  oe,  mai  Jioopilikia  iiou  mai  oe  ia'u  i  keia  la. 

Stop,  do  not  interrupt  me  again  to-day. 

5th.  Another  imperative  is  used  frequently,  especially 
in  familiar  conversation,  when  something  is  requested  to 
be  brought  forward.  It  is  formed  by  prefixing  i  to  the 
siame  of  the  thing  called  for  ;   thus, 

J  paid,  bring  me  a  knife. 

/wai,  get  me  some  water. 

I  noho  no  ia  nci,  get  a  seat  for  this  person,  dec. 

0  is  used  as  an  Imperative  ;  as,  o  hele  oe,  go  thou. 
SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

§  193.  The  Subjunctive  Mood  is  used  w'here  doubt, 
uncertainty,  or  condition  is  expressed.  There  are  but  few 
words  used  however,  to  express  such  a  state.     Ina^  or  its 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  113 

contraction  e,  ina  paha,  malama  paha  are  the  principal, 
2nd.  The  Subjunctive  preterite  is  formed  by  prefixing 
ina,  if,  to  one  of  the  preterites  of  the  indicative.  The 
contracted  form  is  simply  i  prefixed  instead  of  ina,  and 
is  like  in  form  to  the  corresponding  tense  in  the  indica- 
tive mood,  but  is  known  by  the  construction  of  the  sen- 
tence. It  is  frequently  equivalent  in  meaning  to  the 
English  Potential  or  the  French  Subjonctif. 

3rd.  The  Future  Subjunctive  is  formed  by  prefixing 
ina  to  the  future  indicative.  Another  future  subjunctive 
is  formed  by  prefixing  o  lest ;  as,  o  lawe,  lest  he  take.  It 
is  mostly  used,  however,  at  the  close  of  a  proposition  or 
sentence. 

Note. — It  is  also  sometimes  used  for  a  present  terrse. 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

§  194,   First  Form  Preterite  Tense,  ina  before  the  verb. 

r  1st  per.     ina  lawe  au,  if  I  carried. 

Sing.  <  2d  per.     ina  lawe  oe,         if  thou  carried. 
(  3d  per.     ina  lawe  ia,  if  he  carried. 

P  1st  per.  ina  lawe  maua.  if  we  two  carried,  [he  and  I.] 

J.     ,    !  1st  per.  ina  lav*-e  kaua,  if  we  two  carried,  [you  and  I.] 

I  2d  per.  ina  lawe  olua,  if  you  two  carried. 

[^3d  per.  ina  lawe  laua,  if  tliey  two  carried. 

r  1st  per.  ina  lawe  mak  )U,  if  \V:i  carried,   [they  rnd  I.] 

p,       J  1st  per.  ina  lawe  kakou,  if  we  carried,  [you  ai.d  L] 

j  2d  per.  ina  lawe  oukou,  if  ye  carried. 

(^3d  per.  ina  lawe  lakou,    if  they  carried. 

Ina  hoopa  iki  na  'iii  ia  nsca. 

If  the  chiefs  should  merely  touch  die  thinii. 

Ina  aahu  ke  kanaka  i  ko  ke  alii  kapa. 

If  a  man  puts  on  the  chief's  garment. 

Ina  hele  kekahi  ma  ka  main. 

i/T  any  one  went  into  the  shade- 

Ina  loalaau  kekahi  i  ka  aha. 

If  a  person  made  a  noise  in  the  assembly. 

§     195.     Second  Form,  Preterite   Tense,  ina  i  before 
the  verb. 

^  1st  per.  ina  i  lawe  an,  if  1  should  carry. 

Sing.      ^  2nd  per.  ina  i  lawe  oe,  if  thou  shonldst  carry. 

J^Sd  per.  ina  i  lawe  ia,  if  he  should  carry. 
15 


«•^. 


114  SUBJUNCTINE    I\]OOD. 

fist  per.  ina  i  lawe  maiia,  if  we  two  should  carry. 

TV     ,      J  1st,  per.  ina  i  lawe  kaua,  if  we  two  should  carry. 

j  2d   per.  ina  i  lawe  oiua,  if  you  two  should  carry. 

l^3d  per.  ina  i  lawe  laua,  if  they  two  should  carry, 

fist  per.  ina  i  lawe  niakou.  if  we  should  c;irry. 

PI       I    J  1st  per.  ina  i  lawe  kakou,  if  we  should  carry. 

[  2d  per.  ina  i  lawe  oukou,  if  you  should  carry. 

i^od  per.  ina  i  lawe  lakou,  if  they  should  carry. 

EXAMPLES. 

Ina  i  mail  keia  pilikia,  make  makou. 

If  this  ditficulty  should  continue,  we  shall  die. 

Lia  i  nianao  kekahi,  ua  hanau  o . 

Jf  any  one  thinks,  [should  think]  that was  born. 

Ina  i  heluia  na  kanaka,  if  the  peoj)Ie  were  numbered. 
Ina  i  lawehala  kekahi  kanaka.  ' 

//  any  person  were  guilti/  of  an  offense. 

§•  196,  Third  Form,  Preterite  Tense  i  before  the  verb» 

C  l&t  person,  i  hana  au,  if  I  would  [shotild]  work. 

Sing^     <  2nd  person,  i  hana  oe,  if  thou  wouldest  work. 

(^  3d  person,  i  hana  ia,  if  he  would  work. 

f  1st  person,  i  hana  niaua,  if  we  two  would  work. 

TV     r,      J  1st  person,  i  hana  kaua,  if  we  two  would  work. 

j  2nd  persoji,  i  hana  olua,  if  you  two  would  work. 

|^3d  person,  i  hana  laua,  if  they  two  would  work, 

f  1st  person,  i  hana  makou,  if  we  would  work. 

PI       ,    J  1st  person,  i  hana  kakou.  if  we  would  work. 

]  2nd  person,  i  hana  oukou,  if  ye  would  work. 

[  3d  person,  i  hana  lakou,  if  they  would  work. 

EXAMPLES. 
Aka,  i  hana  ia,  he  mea  waiwai  no. 
But,  if  he  wouUf  work  he  would  have  property. 
Aka,  i  kaumaha  oukou,  e  uinau  niai  ia'u. 
But,  if  you  are  grieved,  ask  me. 
Aka,  i  kaumaha  ole,  ua  oki  ka  ninau. 
But,  if  not  grieved,  cease  to  ask. 
yi  i  kii  hou  rnai  on  kahu  ia  oe. 
And  if  your  guardian  co)ne  again. 

A  i  kit  ale  mai,  kaua  no,  and  if  he  do  not  return,  it  is  war. 
I  komo  kekahi  i  ko  ke  alii  mocna. 
Jf  any  one  entered  upon  the  King's  mat. 

§   197.     Fourth  Form  of  the  Preterite  is  like  the  last, 
but  lias  the  sense  of  a  Potential,  &.C.,  as  follows. 
J  ole  ai  e  ku  e,  that  he  ma;;  not  resist. 


F5UB.lUNf"riVE    MOOD.  115 

Vj  liai  ana  wan  i  lohe  oiikou,    I  am  speaking  that  you  may  hear. 

I  /iilikia  ne  koaa  muu  wauae,  that  liis  legs  'may  be  tangled. 

I  hoola  Iwu  inai  iia  'lii  ia  lakou. 

I'hai  the  cliicfri  may  slir  them  up  again. 

E  hoikaika  i  na  kciki,  i  loaa'i  ka  pono. 

Encourage  the  children,  that  ihcy  may  receive  good. 

Hana  oia  i  hid  ae  na  aui)uni. 

He  caused  that  all  the  kingdoms  should  unite. 

Kua  lakou  i  ka  laau,  i  pait  ka  aie. 

They  cut  down  the  [sandal]  wood  that  the  debt  might  he  paid. 

PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

§  198.  The  Present  Subjunctive  is  formed  by  prefix- 
ing ke  to  the  verb,  and  is  distinguished  from  the  present 
indicative  by  dropping  nei  or  la.  The  same  form  is  also 
used  as  a  future  of  the  same  mood. 

When  this  form  is  used  as  a  future,  it  implies  depen- 
dence upon  something  having  previously  taken  place, 
like  the  English  word,  provided  ;  mostly  found  at  the 
close  of  a  sentence. 

C  ke  hai  au,         if  I  spoak,  if  I  shall  speak. 

Sing.      ,  ke  hai  oe,         if  thou  speak,  if  thou  shall  speak. 

(  ke  hai  ia,  if  he  speak,  if  he  shall  speak, 

f  ke  hai  maua,     if  we  two  speak,  if  we  two  shall  speak. 

p     I      j  ke  hai  kaua      if  we  two  speak,  if  we  two  shall  speak. 

"*  ■    ^*  ke  hai  olua,      if  you  two  speak,  if  jou  two  shall  speak, 
ke  hai  laua,      if  they  two  speak,  if  they  two  shall  speak, 

ke  hai  makou,  if  we  speak,  if  we  shall  speak. 

p.       ]    !  ke  hai  kakou,  if  we  speak,  if  we  shall  speak. 

"}  ke  hai  oukou,  if  ye  speak,  if  ye  shall  speak, 

[ke  hai  lakou,     if  they  speak,  if  they  shall  speak. 

EXAMPLES. 

Pela  na  mea  ai,  ke  hanaia  i  akua. 

So  with  vegetables,  if  [provided]  th£y  be  made  into  gods. 

E  maluhia  lakou  ke  hiki  mai. 

They  shall  be  made  con\fortable  if  [provided]   they  come. 

O  ka  neoneo  koe,  ke  pan  ole  na  mai  la. 

Desolation  remained,  if  the  sickness  ceased  not. 

FUTURE  SUPJUNCTIVE. 
§  199    The  First  Form  is  e  suffixed  to  ina. 
^  1st  person,  ina  c  ku  au,  if  I  shall  stand. 

Sing.  >2d  person,  ina  e  ku  oe,  if  thou  shalt  stanfU 

)3d  person,  ina  e  ku  ia,  if  ho  shall  stand. 


f 


nr> 


SLB.TUNCTIVE 


MOOD. 


Dual 


Plur. 


r  1st  person,  ina  e  ku  maua, 
1st 


f  we  two  shall  stand, 
f  we  two  shall  stand, 
f  you  two  shall  stand, 
f  they  two  shall  stand, 
f  we  shall  stand, 
f  we  shnll  stand, 
f  ye  sliall  stand, 
if  they  shall  stand. 


Sinf 


.  .o.  person,  ina  e  ku  kaua, 
j  -id  person,  ina  e  ku  olua, 
[^3d  person,  ina  e  ku  laua, 
f  1st  person,  ina  e  ku  makou, 
J  1st  person,  ina  e  ku  kakou, 
I  2d  person,  ina  e  ku  ouko», 
(^3d  person,  ina  e  ku  lakau, 

EXAMPLES. 
Ina  e  ivaiho  oe  i  keia  mau  mea,  if  you  shall  have  these  things. 
Ina  e  kuai  paha  me  kekahi  haole. 
If  you  shall  trade  perhaps  with  a  foreigner. 
Ina  e  loaa  ia'u  kekahi  moku,  if  I  shall  obtain  a  vessel. 
Lift  e  pa  ke  aka  o  ke  kanaka.- 
If  the  shadow  of  a  man  shall  come  upon. 

§  200.  The  Second  Form  of  the  Future  is  o  lest, 
prefixed  to  the  verb. 

o  poho  waur 
o  poho  oe, 
o  poho  ia^ 
o  poho  matra, 
o  poho  kaua, 
o  poho  olua, 
o  poho  laua, 
o  poho  makou, 
o  poho  kakou, 
o  poho  oukou, 
o  poho  lakou, 

EXAMPLES. 

Mai  hele  oe  i  ka  lua  Pele,  o  make  oe. 

Go  not  to  the  Volcanoe,  lest  you  die. 

Aole  au  e  olelo  aku  ia  oe  o  poho  kuu  ikaika. 

I  will  not  speak  to  you,  lest  my  effort  should  be  lost. 

Aole  laua  i  ai  pu  o  pepehiia. 

They  two  did  not  eat  together  lest  theij  should  die. 

A  makau  hoi  o  hiki  ole  ia  ia,  he  feared  lest  he  should  not  be  able. 

Makau  kekahi  o  ino  ke  kino. 

Some  feared  lest  their  persons  should  suJ/€7\ 

§  201.  The  .'iig?is  markino  the  different  tenses  of  tlie 
Subjunctive  Mood  are  used  even  where  there  is  no  verb, 
or  where  the  verb  to  be  would  be  used,  or  wliere  a  quali- 
ty is  affirmed  ;  as, 

Ina  he  kanaka  makua,  ua  noho  ma  ka  moku. 


r  1st  per. 
y  2d  per. 
(  3d  per. 
r  I  St  per. 

(^3d  per. 
f  1st  per, 

Plur  J  ^'^  ''^'• 
'   I  2d  per. 

l^3d  per. 


lest  I  lose, 
lest  thou  lose, 
lest  he  lose, 
lest  we  two  lose, 
lest  we  two  lose, 
lest  you  two  lose, 
lest  they  two  lose, 
lest  we  lose, 
lest  we  lose, 
lest  ye  lose, 
lest  they  lose. 


INFINITIVE    :\IOOD.  117 

i/"  [he  liad  been]  a  c^rown  inrin,  lie  would  have  staid  dp  the  ship. 

Inn  pela  inamva  akii  nei,  iiia  aole  i  make  na  kula. 

If  [it  had  been]  so  before,  then  the  schools  had  not  stopped. 

Ina  he  ikaika  like  oukou,  pono. 

If  [vou  are]  alike  strong,  it  is  well. 

Ina  he  paiupahi  like  oukou,  pono. 

If  [you  are]  alike  weak,  it  is  well.  < 

Ir\a  he  ulu  ke  kii  o  kekahi. 

If  the  bread  fruit  tree  [be]  the  idol  of  any  one. 

§  202.  The  word  ina  of  the  Subjunctive  JVIood  is  often 
repeated  in  the  next  clause  of  the  sentence,  and  then  the 
last  one  is  siinilar  in  meaning  to  the  English  correspond- 
ing conjunction,  if then,  as  so,  6lc. 

Ina  i  hele  niai  nei  oia,  iiia  ua  ike. 

If  he  had  come  here,  the^i  [  if]  he  would  have  seen. 

Ina  i  hele  ia  i  ke  kula,  ina  ua  naauao  iho. 

If  he  had  gone  to  school,  then  [  if]  he  would  have  been  intelligent. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD, 

§  203.  Many  of  the  forms  of  the  Infinitive  JVIood  are 
like  the  Imperative  and  can  be  distinguished  only  by  the 
sense  of  the  passage.  The  same  form  belongs  to  all  the 
Tenses,  that  is,  there  are  no  different  forms  for  the  per- 
fect or  future  infinitive. 

The  Infinitive  Mood  is  used  for  affirming  or  asserting 
something  in  a  general  way  without  reference  to  number 
or  person  ;   as, 

Aole  ona  manao  e  hele,  he  had  no  thought  to  go. 

The  Infinitive  is  formed  by  prefixing  e  to  the  root. — 
After  the  verb  hiki,  always,  and  after  the  verb  pono,  fre- 
quently the  e  becomes  ke. 

EXAMPLES. 

Makemake  au  e  inike  ia  oe,  I  desire  to  pinch  you. 

Laiia  ka  manao  o  kekahi  e  kanu  laau. 

Some  people  hope  to  plant  trees. 

Kekahi  mau  pono  e  noonoo  ai,  some  good  things  to  think  of. 

I  makaukau  na  kanaka  e  hai  aku. 

That  men  may  be  ready  to  speak. 

Oia  mau  liana,  na  makou  no  e  hana. 

Those  works,  they  are  for  us  to  do. 

After    hiki  and  pono. 
Aole  e  hiki  ia  makou  ke  hoi  aku,  we  shall  not  be  able  to  return. 
Hiki  no  i  ka  moku  ke  holo  ma  ka  moana. 


118  or  PARTiciPLr.?;. 

A  vessel  is  able  to  sail  on  the  ocean. 

Aole  pono  ia  makou  ke  hana  pela,  it  is  not  right  for  us  to  do  so. 

He  pono  ia  oe  ke  kokua  nfiai,  it  is  right  for  you  to  assist. 
OF   PARTICIPLES. 

§  204.  There  are  two  participles;  the  Presc/it  and  the 
Preterite.  This  last  may  have  different  shades  of  time 
according  to  its  use,  but  always  the  same  form. 

2nd.  The  Present  Participle  is  formed  by  prefixing  e  to 
the  root  and  suffixing  Q?ia  equivalent  to  the  English  ter- 
mination i?ig,  as  e  lawe  ana,  carrying.  The  e  is  often  drop- 
ped. 

3rd.  When  any  word  qualifying  the  verb  is  used,  it 
comes  between  the  verb  and  the  a7ia,  making  a  compound 
verb;   as, 

E  kakulu  hale  ana  ia,  he  is  a  build  house  ing. 

E  mahiai  ana  ia,  he  is  cultivate  food  ing, 

4th.  Ana  as  a  participial  termination  is  used  also  with 
the  preterite  participle  and  is  similar  to  the  modern  Eng- 
lish phrase,  the  house  is  being  built,  the  thing  is  now  be- 
ing done,  etc.;   as, 

Ua  mahiia  ana  ka  ai,  the  food  is  being  cultivated. 

E  hioloia  ana  ke  aupuni,  the  kingdom  is  being  overturned. 

EXAMPLES  OF  THE  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 
E  anaana  ana  ia  ia  kakou,  he  is  usiiig  sorcery  upon  us. 
No  ko  lakou  inu  ana  i  ka  rama. 
On  account  of  their  drinking  rum. 
E  hoohewa  ana  oe  i  ka'u  hana. 
Thou  art  condemning  my  work. 
E  ku  kokoke  mai  ana,  standing  near,  lit.  stand  near  ing. 

0  kckahi  kanaka  e  noho  ana  ma  Oahu. 
A  certain  man  living  at  Oahu. 

A  ike  i  na  haole  e  ai  ana  i  ka  ipu. 

When  they  saw  the  foreigners  ea'ing  a  melon. 

1  Maui  o  Kalaniopuu  e  kaua  ana. 
Kalaniopuu  was  on  ^\'i\\\\  fighting. 

A  lohe  na  'lii  e  noho  ana  ma  Olualu. 
When  the  chiefs  living  at  Olualu  heard. 

5th.  The  participial  form,  that  is,  a  verb  followed  by 
ana  and  preceded  by  an  article  or  prefix  pronoun  may  be 
considered  and  treated  as  a  noun.  The  English  has  the 
same  idiom  ;  as,  his  doing  so  was  correct  ;  the  burning  of 
Moscow  uHis  a  great  event. 


or    PARTICIPLES.  Ill) 

Olelo  ao  inai  ia  la  ia  e  hooki  i  ke  haua  ana. 

He  entreated   him  to  cease  going  to  war  [fighting.] 

Oia  ke  kolu  o  hona  holo  ana  nuii. 

That  was  the  third  time  of  his  sailing  here. 

I  ka  pau  ana  o  ua  hale  kula  la  1  ke  ahi. 

On  the  burning  up  of  said  school  house, 

THE  PRETERITE  PARTICIPLE. 

§  205.  The  Preterite  or  Passive  participle  is  the  sanie 
for  all  the  conjugations.  It  is  formed  by  prefixing  i  and 
suffixing  ia;  as,  i  laweia,  carried,  /  kuaiia,  bought,  i pili- 
ittj  fitted. 

Ma  ka  aina  i  haaioiia  nona,  on  tlie  land  given  to  him. 

He  nui  na  nica  e  ae  i  hanaia,  many  other  things  were  done. 

O  ka  mea  i  haiia  aku,  he  oiaio  ia,  the  thing  spoken  was  true. 

Aole  e  pau  ka  ino  i  haiia  aku. 

The  evil  spoken  o/' will  not  be  stopped. 

Note. — The  ia  may  be  united  to  the  verb  as  one  word  or  it  may 
be  separated  from  it  and  one  or  more  words  intervene. 

Ua  00  ke  kurina  i  kanu  lalani  ia. 

The  corn  planted  in  rows  is  ripe. 

THE  GERUND. 

§  206.  There  is  a  branch  of  the  verb  having  mostly 
the  form  of  a  noun,  but  the  meaning  of  a  verb.  It  re- 
sembles in  construction  and  meaning  the  Latin  Gerund. 
It  takes  the  definite  article  or  prefix  pronoun.  In  many 
cases  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish  it  from  a  noun.  Some- 
times it  is  better  to  translate  as  a  verb. 

EXAMPLES. 
Ua  pono  ka  pepehi  i  na  holoholona. 
The  killing  of  savage  beasts  is  right. 
Kaumaha  oia  i  ka  (awe  ukana. 
He  was  weary  in  the  bearing  of  the  burden. 
Hoikaika  nui  oia  i  ka  papa  aku  ia  Liholiho. 
He  was  urgent  to  forbid  Liholiho. 

Note. — It  is  used  also  in  the  Passive  form  ;  as,  o  ka  haiia  mai 
kona,  the  speaking  was  of  him. 

SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

§  207.  It  will  be  proper  to  bring  together  into  one 
view  that  part  of  the  verb  which  has  been  exhibited. — 
For  all  that  has  been  said  applies  especially  to  the  sim- 
plest form  of  the  Verb.     But  the  Paradigm  to  be  exhibit- 


120 


OF    CONJUGATION. 


ed  will  show  that  there  are  other  and  important  forms  of 
the  verb  yet  to  be  shown  with  their  various  modifications 
ofmeanins;.  But  thoroughly  understnnding  the  foregoing 
and  the  principles  of  forming  the  remaining  Conjugations, 
the  reader  will  have  no  difficulty  in  understanding  the 
whole. 

§  208.    Synopsis  of   the   Moods,  and    Tenses  of  the 
First  Conjugation. 

Indjcative  Mood,  Pieter  Tense 

1st  form. 
Lavve  au,  I  carried,  see      <§)193. 

2d  form. 
A  iawe  an,  &  when  I  carried.  194. 

3d  form. 
I  Iawe  au,   I  carried.  195. 

4th  form. 
Ua  Iawe  au,  I  have  carried.  196. 

5th  form. 
Ua  iawe  e  au,  I  had  carried.  197 

Present  Tense,  1st  form. 
Ke  Iawe  nei  au,  I  carry.      198. 

2d  form. 
E  iawe  ana  au,  I  carry,  am   car- 
rying. 198. 
Future  Tense,   1st  form. 
E  Iawe  au,  I  shall  or  will  carry.  199. 

2d  form. 
E  Iawe  e  au,  I  shall  have  carried. 

Imperative  Mood,   1st  form. 
E  Iawe  oe.  carry  thou.  200. 


Mai  Iawe  oe,  do  not  carry.  "§>201- 
SivBJUNCTiVE  Mood,  Preter  Tense. 
Ina  Iawe  au,  if  I  carried.        203. 

2d  form. 
Ina  i  Iawe  au,  if  I  should  carry.  204 

3d  form. 
I  Iawe  au,  if  I  should  cnrry.   205. 

4th  form.   [Poteiitial  ] 
I  Iawe  au,  that  I  might  ctirry.    206. 

Present  or  Future  Tense. 
Ke  Iawe  au,  if  I  carry.  207. 

Future  Tense.  1st  form. 
Ina  e  Iawe  au,  if  I  shall  carry.  208. 

2d  form. 
O  Iawe  au,  lest  I  carry.  208. 

Infinitivk  Mood,  1st  Form. 

E  Iawe,  to  cnrry.  212. 

2d  form  after  hiki  and  pono 


Ke  Iawe,  to  carry. 

Participles. 
Pres.  E  iawe  ana,  carrying 
Pret.  I  laweia,  carried. 


212. 

213. 
214. 


2d  form,  [forbidding.]  Ger.  Ka  Iawe,  the  carrying.  215. 

OF  CONJUGATION. 
§  209.  The  conjugation  of  a  Hawaiian  Verb  is  not 
what  it  is  in  the  languages  of  Western  Europe,  a  bring- 
ing together  of  the  leading  parts  of  a  verb,  but  an  ar- 
rangement of  such  parts  as  are  similarly  formed  from  the 
root,  which  formations  seen  through  all  the  moods  and 
tenses.  In  Hawaiian,  there  are  twenty  or  more  of  these 
formations.  They  are  made  by  prefixing  and  adding  to 
the  syllables  of  the  root,  and  thus  modify  its  meaning. — 
In  this  respect,  the  verb  resembles  the  Hebrew,  Chalda- 
ic  ajid  Arabic  verbs. 


OF    CONJUGATION.  121 

§  !209.  The  other  four  Conjugations  are  as  follows. — 
They  will  not  be  written  out  tliroujj;h  all  the  Moods  and 
Tenses  as  the  former  sixteen  have  been. 

Con.  17.  Con.  18.  Con.  19.  Con.  iO. 

lalalawe.  lalalaweia.  hoolalalawe.  Iioolalalavveiu. 

These  Conjugations  are  subject  to  all  the  changes  by 
Mood,  Tense,  number  and  person  that  the  foregoing  were. 

§  2i0.  Remarks  and  Explanations  relative  to  the  dif- 
ferent Conjugations. 

The  Root  or  Theme  lawe  is  the  simplest  form  of  the 
verb,  and  it  generally  consi.-ts  oitwo  syllables.  There  is 
quite  a  number  of  verbs  that  have  three  syllables  such  as 
aloha  to  love,  but  upon  analyzing  t'  ey  can  generally  be 
reduced  to  two.  There  are  some  few  verbs  of  three  or 
more  syllables,  the  root  of  which  is  difficult  to  ascertain, 
such  as  kamailio  to  converse  freely;  it  is  also  reduplicated; 
as,  kamakamailio  to  converse  familiarly. 

§  211.  1st.  Lfa(;eza  is  the  passive  of  Z««;e.  The  termi- 
nation lA  is  the  sign  of  the  passive,  or  forms  the  passive  in 
all  the  Conjugations.  In  some  cases  the  i  of  the  ia  is  drop- 
ped ;  as,  lohea  for  loheia,  so  also,  ike,  to  know,  pass,  ikea 
for  ikeia  ;  haki,  to  break,  pass,  hakea  for  hakiia  ;  kui,  to 
pound,  pass  kuia  for  kuiia ;  kiko,  to  pick  up  as  a  fowl, 
pass,  kikoa  for  kikoia. 

2d.  Sometimes  another  letter  or  letters  is  inserted,  prob- 
ably for  the  sake  of  euphony,  between  the  verb  and  the 
ia;  thus,  kau/ia,  to  be  hung  up,  for  kauia;  auhuliAia  to  be 
overturned,  for  auhuliia.  The  verb  like  to  be  like,  takes 
ha  in  the  causative  ;  as  hoo/jalike,  to  resemble. 

3d.  The  passive  laweia  may  be  followed  by  the  active 
participial  termination  una,  as  i  laweia  ana,  he  is  being 
carried  ;  o  ka  wahine  i  kahilia  ana,  the  woman  was  being 
fanned.     This  is  like  a  modern  phraseology  in  English. 

§212.  ^oo/atfg,  to  cause  to  bear  or  carry.  The  pre- 
fix hoo,  is  causative  of  the  root,  as,  akea,  Droad,  Aooakea 
to  cause  to  he  broad,  that  is,  to  extend,  enlarge.  This 
prefix  may  continue  though  the  word  becomes  a  noun  or 
adjective  ;  as,  he  kanaka  koopunipuni,  a  man  causing  de- 
ception, a  deceitful  man. 

16 


122  OF    CONJUGATION'. 

2d.  Before  words  whose  first  letter  is  a  vowel,  the  last 
o  of  the  hoo  frequently  coalesces  with  the  vowel,  partic- 
ularly with  a,  e,  and  c  ;  as,  Aoano  for  Aooano,  hoo\e  for 
hooo\e. 

3d.  A  number  of  words  take  haa  for  the  causative  pre- 
fix instead  of  hoo  ;  as,  haaheo  for  ^ooheo.  A  few  words 
also  take  both  forms;  as  Aoonui  and  ^«anui.  Hoawi  is 
used  for  hooawi,  but  haawi  is  also  common. 

4th.  The  causative  hoo  sometimes  gives  a  different 
shade  of  meaning;  as,  maikai,  to  be  good,  hoomaikai,  to 
make  good  or  to  bless.  The  verb  like,  to  be  like,  takes 
ha  after  the  causative,  hoo  ;  as,  hoouxlikej  to  cause  to  be 
like,  to  resemble.  §  211.    2. 

§  213.  Hoolaweia,  to  cause  to  be  carried.  This  is 
passive  of  Hoolawc  ;  as,  ua  hookuniia  ke  kukui,  the  torch 
IS  lighted  ;   literally,  the  torch  is  caused  to  be  burnt. 

§  214.  Lalawe,  to  carry  often.  This  conjugation  is 
formed'  by  reduplicating  the  first  syllable.  It  is  a  form 
somewhat  frequent.  Its  general  meaning  is  that  of  repe- 
tition ;  as,  7101,  to  ask,  ?ionoi,  to  ask  earnestly  or  often. — 
Sometimes  the  shade  of  meaning  is  changed  ;  as,  pehi^  to 
throw,  to  pelt,  pepehi,  to  strike,  to  kill. 

§  215.  Lalaiveia,  to  be  carried  often.  The  passive  of 
lalawe  and  subject  to  the  same  modifications  of  meaning 
as  lalawe. 

§  216.  Hoolalaioe  to  cause  to  carry  often.  This  con- 
jugation is  not  so  frequently  used  as  some  of  the  others. 
ft  is  causative  of  lalaiue  ;  as,  mai  hoololohi  oe,  lit.  do  not 
cause  yourself  to  be  slow,  i.  e.,  do  not  tarry. 

§  217.  IJoolalaiveia,  to  cause  to  be  carried  often.  It 
is  passive  of  the  foregoing. 

§  218.  Laivewe,  to  carry  often.  This  conjugation  is 
formed  by  repeating  the  second  syllable  of  the  root.  It 
is  somewhat  frequently  used.  It  is  fi-equentative  in  its 
meaning  ;  and  it  is  ditficult  to  tell  in  our  language  where- 
in the  meaning  differs  from  lalatve,  and  yet  Hawaiians  nev- 
er confound  them  or  use  one  for  the  other.  Makai,  to 
look  at  J  iiMkaikni,  to  examine,  or   look   about   with   some 


OF    C0N.1UGAT10N.  123 

curiosity.     Naki,  to  tie,  has  two  forms  in  this  conjugation, 
noJcii  and  nakiki,  to  tic  often  or  fast. 

Laioeiocia,  to  be  carried  often,  passive  of  lawewe. 

§)  219.  fToolawewe,  to  cause  to  carry  often  ;  the  same 
remarks  apply  to  this  conjugation  as  to  Hoolalaive,  It  is 
causative  of  the  foroooing.  Naha,  to  break  as  a  plate, 
nahaha,  to  break  often  or  in  small  pieces.  Ploonahaha, 
to  cause  to  break  into  small  pieces. 

§  220.  Hoolaiveiceia,  to  cause  to  be  carried  often. — 
This  is  passive  of  the  foregoing.  Hoonaweweia  ka  honua 
e  ka  olai,  the  earth  was  shaken  [was  caused  to  be  shaken] 
by  an  earthquake. 

§  221.  Laivelaioe,  to  carry  frequently  and  with  energy. 
This  form  is  a  reduplication  of  both  syllables  of  the  root. 
It  is  of  very  common  use.  It  expresses  frequency  and 
intensity.  Foreigners  are  apt  to  use  it  where  natives  do 
not ;  as,  e  hanahnna  oe,  a  form  which  natives  understand 
but  never  use,  except  in  imitation  of  foreigners.  Holoho- 
io  wale  na  lio,  the  horses  ran  without  object.  In  many 
cases  the  meaning  of  this  conjugation  cannot  be  distin- 
guished in  English  from  the  simple  form  of  the  verb. 

§  222.  Latvelaweia^  to  be  carried,  &.c.  It  is  passive 
of  laivelaive. 

§  223.  Hoolaivelawe,  to  cause  to  carry  frequently.  It 
often  expresses  great  intensity.  Hoolalelale  lakou  i  ke  ko- 
sno  ana  o  ke  alii^  they  made  great  haste  [w^ere  in  great 
perturbation]  at  the  entrance  of  the  chief.  This  conjuga- 
tion is  frequently  used. 

§  224.  Hoolaivelaweia,  to  cause  to  be  carried  frequent- 
ly, etc.     This  is  passive  of  the  foregoing. 

The  following  conjugations  are  less  used  especially  in 
prose.     More  often  in  poetry. 

§  225.  Lalalawe,  to  carry  often ;  a  frequentative. — 
This  conjugation  is  formed  by  repeating  the  first  syllable 
of  the  root,  three  times.  Pan,  to  be  all,  universal,  ;;a- 
papau  pu  makou  malalo  o  ka  make  we  are  all  [universally, 
individually]  together  under  death. 

§  226.   Z/fl/a/awem  is  passive  of  the  foregoing.  Popopniia 


124  OF    VERBS. 

lakou  e  ka  nalu,   thej  were  entirely  swallowed  up  by  the 
surf. 

§  227.  Boolalalawe.  This  conjugation  is  causative  of 
the  foregoing. 

§  228.  hoolalalmv3ia.  This  conjugation  is  passive  of 
the  last. 

REMARKS. 

§  229.  1.  There  are  other  forms  of  some  verbs  which 
are  not  here  mentioned.  Some  are  referred  to  under  the 
head  of  the  formation  of  vv(  rds.     See  §  ^3. 

2.  There  is  prohabiy  no  one  verb  of  the  language  found 
in  all  the  forms  of  the  Paradigm,  but  all  those  forms  have 
been  found  belonging  to  some  verb. 

3.  It  is  difficult,  if  not  impossible  for  us  to  see  the  rea- 
son of  so  many  forms  which  we  must  render  in  English 
in  nearly  the  same  way.  But  this  is  not  peculiar  to  Ha- 
waiian. 

4.  From  the  Paradigm  it  appears  that  a  Hawaiian  verb 
has  nearly  3,500  forms.  It  has,  however,  much  regular- 
ity and  simplicity  in  its  construction.  In  this  respect  it 
may  compare  well  with  the  cultivated  philosophical  lan- 
guage of  the  ancient  Greeks. 

OF  COMPOUND  VERBS. 

§  230.  By  compound  verbs  in  Hawaiian  is  not  meant 
the  union  of  two  words  into  one  and  this  new  formed  word 
used  as  a  verb  ;  but  a  simple  verb  with  some  prefix  sylla- 
ble, sometimes  giving  a  different  shade  of  meaning  and 
sometimes  not.  These  verbs  are  used  as  regular  or  sim- 
ple verbs  after  they  have  received  their  prefix  syllable. — 
The  reader  will  easily  see  their  nature  after  having  read 
the  foregoing  article  on  the  verb. 

^    2.U.  EXAMPLES. 

Hee,  to  flee,  awhee,  do,  pili.  to  fit,  A'opili  to  join  together  as  boards. 

Nidi,  to  |)our,  ^ariini,  do  ,  wili,  to  twist,  Aowili,  do. 

Awe,  to  carry,  hcnwve,  do.,   Iiinu,  to  aiinoint,  Aahinu,  do. 

Pai,  to  lift  up,  /iapai,  do.,  pelii,  to  pelt,  kipelii,  do. 

Liiku,  to  slaughter,  Aailuku,  do.,  ohi,  to  collect,  A-rtohi,  to  restrain, 

Oli,  to  sing,  hauoW,  to  rejoice,  holo,  to  run,  ?iahol0,  to  run  along 
the  ground. 

Hca,  to  call,  A*ahea,  do.,  nee,  to  slide  along,  panec,  do. 

Hull,  to  turn,  A'«hnli,  do.,  kehi.  to  exceed,  ^wkela,  do. 


OF  vr.RBs.  125 

THE  ANOMALOUS  VERB  LOAA. 
§  232.  There  is  but  one  irregular  or  rather  anomalous 
verb  in  common  use  in  Hawaiian  ;  that  is  loaa^  to  get, 
obtain,  to  meet  with,  etc.  It  is  used  only  in  this  one  form, 
generally  as  a  passive  verb,  frequently,  however,  as  a 
neuter. 

Ua  loaa  olua  la  Navvaa  ?  have  yon  two  met  with  Nawaa  ? 
O  ka  poe  i  loaa  ke  daia,  those  who  obtained  the  money. 
Ua  loaa  mai  ia'u  ka  palapala,  I  have  received  the  letter. 
Inii  oia  i  ke  keiki,  aole  i  loaa. 
He  sought  for  the  child,  he  did  x\oi  find  it. 

VERBAL  DIRECTIVES. 

§  233.  Verbs  generally,  in  Hawaiian,  are  supposed  to 
have  a  motion  or  tendency  in  some  direction.  This  mo- 
tion or  tendency  is  expressed  by  several  \\Xi\e  xcords  which 
follow  as  near  after  the  verb  as  the  construction  of  the 
sentence  will  allow.  The  motion  is  either  towards  the 
speaker  or  agent,  ov  from  him,  up  or  doiun  or  sideways^ 
either  to  the  right  hand  or  left.  Even  those  verbs  ex- 
pressive of  the  most  quiescent  state,  have  this  peculiarity. 
We  have  something  similar  in  the  English  phrases,  drink 
tt/),  drink  dow?i,  etc. 

Note. — These  directives  could  not  well  be  inserted  in  the  Para- 
digm of  the  verb  for  want  of  room.  A  specimen  will  be  inserted 
in  <^  235  —  238. 

§  234.  The  words  referred  to  in  the  foregoing  section 
are  Mai,  aku,  iho  and  ae. 

1st.  Mai  implies  motion  towards  the  speaker  or  agent ; 
as,  i  hele  mai  oia,  he  came  this  way. 

2d.  ^^w,  implies  motion  from  the  speaker  or  agent  ; 
as,  i  hele  aku  oia,  he  went  away. 

3d.  Iko,  implies  motion  downward  \  as,  pepehi  z^o  laua 
kekahi  i  kekahi,  they  two  struck  the  one  the  other, 

4th.  Ae  is  used  to  express  ascending  motion  ;  as,  ua 
hele  ae  ia  i  uka,  he  has  gone  up  into  the  country ;  hapai 
ae  ia  i  kona  lima,  he  lifted  up  his  hand. 

5th.  Ae,  however,  is  frequently  used  for  any  sideways 
or  oblique  motion. 


1 


126  OF  vr.iiBS. 

PARADIGMS  OF  VERBS  WITH  THEIR    DIRECTIVES. 
§  235.    Preterite  tense  with  mai. 

^  ist  per.    lawe  mai  au,  I  brought  this  way. 

Sin.    >'2d  per.    lawe  mai  oe,  thou  broughtest  ttiis  way. 

}  3d  per.    lawe  mai  ia,  he  brought  this  way. 

"^  1st  per.   lawe  mai  maua,  we  two  brought  this  way. 

Dual  I  ^^^  ^^^'  ^^^^^  '^"*  kaua,  we  two  brought  this  way. 

I  2d  per.  lawe  mai  olua,  you  two  brought  this  way. 

J  3d  per.  lawe  mai  laua,  they  two  brought  this  way. 

^  1st  per.  lawe  mai  makou,  we  brought  this  way. 

pj        !  Ist  per.  lawe  mai  kakou,  we  brought  this  way, 

j  2d  per.  lawe  mai  oukou,  ye  brought  this  way. 

J  3d  per.  lawe  mat  lakou,  they  brought  this  way. 

§  236.    Preterite  Tense  with  aku. 

^  1st  per.     lawe  aku  au,  I  took  away. 

Sing.      ^  2d  per.      lawe  aku  oe,  thou  tookest  away. 

3d  per.     lawe  aku  ia,  he  took  away. 

1st  per.  lawe  aku  maua,  we  two  took  away. 

y.     .       '.1st  per.  lawe  aku  kaua,  we  twa  took  away. 

I  2d  per.  lawe  aku  olua,  you  two  took  away. 

J  3d  per.  lawe  aku  laua,  they  two  took  away. 

^  1st  per.  lawe  aku  makou,  we  took  away. 

PI  )  1st  per.  lawe  aku  kakou,  we  took  away, 

j  2d  per.  lawe  oA;tt  oukou,  ye  took  away. 

J  3d  per.  lawe  aku  lakou,  they  took  away. 

§  337.    Preterite  Tense  with  iho. 

^  1st  per.       haule  iho  au,  I  fell  down. 

Sing.  >2d  per.        haule  iho  oe,  thou  fellest  down, 

33d  per.        haule  iAo  ia,  he  fell  down. 

'I  1st  per.  haule  iho  maua,  we  two  fell  down. 

yv     ,  I  1st  per.  haule  iho  kaua,  we  two  fell  down. 

■'2d  per.  haule  iho  olua,  you  two  fell  down. 

J  3d  per.  haule  iho  laua,  they  two  fell  down. 

^  1st  per.  haule  iho  makou,  we  fell  down. 

p^       I  1st  per.  haule  iho  kakou,  we  fell  down, 

j  2d  per,  haule  iho  oukou,  ye  fell  down. 

J  3d  per.  haule  iho  lakou,  they  fell  down. 

§  238.    Preterite  tense  with  Ae. 

C  let  person,   oni  ae  au,         I  moved  sideways. 
Sing.      -]  2d  person,    oni  ae  oe,  thou  movedst  sideways. 

(  3d  person,    oni  ae  ia,  he  moved  sideways. 


OI'   VKKBS.  \'2.7 

fist  person,  oni  ae  maua,  we  two  moved  sideways. 

J  J  1st  person,  oni  ae  kaua,  we  two  moved  sideways. 

'^  '      ]  2d  person,  oni  ae  olua,  you  two  moved  sideways. 

|^3d  person,  oni  ae  laua,  they  two  moved  sideways, 

j'lst  person,    oni  ae  makou,  we  moved  sideways. 
.,.      .    j  1st  person,   oni  ae  kakou,   we  moved  sideways, 
lurs  •  S  0(j  person,    oni  ae  onkou,   ye  moved  sideways. 
|^3d  person,    oni  ae  lakou,    they  moved  sideways. 
OF   LA. 

§  239.  The  syllable  la  is  a  beautiful  expletive  and  is 
used  in  connection  with  all  the  Verbal  directives;  but 
mostly  used  in  connection  with  narrative  tenses.  It  al- 
ways stands  immediately  after  the  Directive.  When 
used  with  aku  or  iho  it  changes  the  accent  of  the  direct- 
ives from  the  penult  to  the  ultima.  §  59.  2. 

Note. — Iho  is  the  favorite  directive  in  historical  or  narrative  lan- 
guage, in  which  circumstances  it  often  loses  its  accustomed  mean- 
ing of  downward  motion. 

§  240.  The  foregoing  Verbal  directives  with  or  with- 
out the  expletive  la  may  be  used  in  connection  with  all 
the  Conjugations,  Moods  and  Tenses  in  consistency  how- 
ever with  the  scope  of  the  language  and  the  idea  intend- 
ed to  be  conveyed. 
FURTHER  REMARKS   ON  THE  VERBAL   DIRECTIVES. 

§  241.  The  words  referred  to  in  the  above  sections 
have  been  termed  Verbal  Directives,  because  they  are  gen- 
erally found  in  connection  with  verbs  ;  but  they  accom- 
pany other  parts  of  speech  to  some  extent. 

1st.  They  are  used  with  nouns  expressive  of  place  as. 

Ma  or  mai  Lahaina  max.  at  or  from  Lahaina  this  way,  i.e.  this 
side  of  Lahaina. 

Ma  Lahaina  aku,  at  Lahaina  onward,  i.e.  beyond  Lahaina. 
Ma  ia  wahi  mai,  from  that  place  this  way. 
Ma  ia  wahi  aku,  from  that  place /t/r//;er  on. 
Ma  ia  wahi  ae,  from  that  place,  one  side. 
Ma  ia  wahi  iho,  from  that  place  loiver  doicn. 

2.  They  are  more  frequently  used,  however,  in  con- 
nection with  adverbs  of  place  ;  as, 

Malaila  aku,  ihem,  further  on  [from  the  speaker.] 
Malaila  mai,  there,  but  this  side  [towards  the  speaker]  this  side 
of  there. 


128  OF    VERBS. 

Malaila  ae,  there,  one  side  of  there,  i.  e.  to  riglit  or  left. 
Mahiilsi  iho,  there,  below  there,  i.  e.  below  that  place. 

3.  This  applies  to  all  words  of  place  where  direction 
is  implied. 

OF  AL 

§  242.  The  use  of  the  syllable  ai  in  connection  with 
verbs  in  the  Hawaiian  Language  is  a  peculiarity.  It  gen- 
erally follows  a  verb  when  a  preceding  7ioun,  verb  or  ad- 
verb expresss  time,  place,  manner,  instrument  or  cause.  Its 
use  must  be  learned  more  by  practice  than  by  rule.  The 
Hawaiians  use  it  sometimes  in  places  where  it  is  difficult 
to  see  the  reason  of  its  use.     The  following  are  examples. 

No  ka  nui  o  kona  ikaika  i  pakele  ai  oia. 

On  account  of  the  greatness  of  his  strength  he  escaped. 

Remakks. — Ai  here  refers  to  ikaika  nui  as  the  cause  or  ground 
of  his  escape. 

Na  koa  a  Kahekili  i  hoouna  nialu  ai. 

The  soldiers  whom  Kahekili  had  secretly  sent. 

Rem. — It  is  not  certain  whether  ai  here  refers  to  koa  or  hoouna 
main  or  both. 

Imi  iho  la  i  mea  e  pono  ai  na  'lii. 
He  sought  the  thing  to  benefit  the  chiefs. 

Rem. — Ai  here  refers  to  mea,  the  thing,  or  what  would  benelit 
the  chiefs. 

Pela  no  oia  i  malama  aku  ai  ia  lakou. 

Thus  indeed  he  took  care  of  them. 

Rem. — Ai  here  refers  to  pela,  the  manner. 

I  ka  wa  i  kua  ai  na  kanpka  i  ka  laau  ala. 

At  the  time  when  the  people  cut  down  sandal  wood. 

Rem. — Ai  here  refers  to  iva,  time,  period  of  time. 


PART    III. 

OF    SYNTAX. 

Syntax,  in  Hawaiian,  as  in  other  languages,  refers  to 
■the  rehition  which  words  hold  to  each  other  in  a  sentence. 
'One  principle  difficulty  in  getting  the  idiom  of  the  Ha- 
waiian language  by  foreigners  is  the  collocation,  or  the 
position  of  words  in  sentences  ;  for  the  Hawaiian  has 
its  own  rules  in  this  respect,  and  will  not  submit  to  the 
rules  of  foreign  languages.  The  syntax  of  most  Gram- 
mars is  divided  into  two  parts,  viz  ;  Concord  and  Govern- 
ment ;  but  in  this  grammar  a  third  will  be  introduced, 
viz.,  Position.  The  order  generally  followedwiIl.be  Posi- 
ftion,  Concord,  Government. 

Note.  —  By  position  is  not  meant  the  2)lace  oi'  every  part  of 
speech  in  a  sentence ;  but  the  place  wlieie  the  more  prominent 
parts  of  speech  are  generally  found. 

The  following  will  be  the  general  order  of  the  rules. 
Ge?ieraUy  1st.  The  syntax  of  each  part  of  speech  in  the 
'Order  of  the  Grammar. 

2.  The  syntax  of  some  of  the  parts  of  speech  may  be 
■embraced  in  a  single  rule ;  others  may  extend  to  several 
rules. 

3.  The  rules  will  be  numbered  continuously  from  first 
ito  last. 

Particularly.  1st.  The  general  position  of  the  part  of 
speech  under  consideration. 

2.  The  agreement,  if  any,  with  another  part  of  speech. 

3.  The  government,  if  any,  of  other  words. 

4.  Examples  and  illustrations  in  all  necessary  cases. 

5.  Exceptions  to  the  rules  noted  next  after  the  illustra- 
tions. 

6.  Notes,  observations,  remarks,  etc.,  inserted  in  their 
places. 

Note.  —  Sentences  may  commRnce  with  almost  any  part  of 
speech. 

17 


i$0  OF    SYNTAX. 

SYNTAX  OF  THE     O    EMPHATrC. 

I 

Rule  1st.  Position. 
The  0  emphatic  stands  next  immediately  before  a  pro- 
per noun  ov pronoun f  in  either  number;  as, 

Elua  wahi  e  noho  ai  ke  Alii,  a  Kau,  a  i  ole  ia,  o  Koliala. 
There  are  two   places    lor    the  King  to  live,  Kau,  if  not  there, 
Kohala. 

Kekahi  alii  o  Hawaii,  o  Hakau  kona  inoa. 

A  certain  chief  of  .Hawaii,  Hakau  by  name. 

Manao  iho  la   o  Hoapili  ma,  Hoapili  and  his  company  thought. 

O  oe  no  ka'u  i  kii  mai  nei. 

You  yourself  are  the  person  I  came  for. 

Manao  na  kanaka  e  make  io  no  o  ia. 

The  people  thought  he  will  surely  die. 

O  vvai  ko  laua  mea  i  hewa  ?  who  of  the  two  was  m  the  wrong  ? 

O  lakou  wale  no  ka  poe  i  kohoia. 

They  only  were  the  persons  chosen. 

RULE  2. 
In  the  case  oī  common  nouns,  the  definite  and  semi-defi- 
nite articles,  the  prefix  pronouns  and   the  si^ns  of  the 
dual  and  plural   may  come   between  the  o  emphatic  and 
the  noun. 

O  ke  pai  ae  la  no  ia  i  ka  aina. 

That  was  the  punishment  of  the  land. 

O  na  olelo  pono,  a  me  na  olelo  hewa,  malaila  na  kanaka. 

Good  ivords  and  bad  words,  men  followed  them. 

Eia  ke  kaumaha  o  ke  kane,  o  kona  pii  ana  i  ka  ai. 

Here  was  the  burden  of  tlie  husband,  his  going  up  for  food. 

RULE  3.     Agreement. 
The  0  emphatic  m.ay  be  said  to  agree  with,  and  render 
emphatic  the  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  it  belongs  ;  as,. 

O  ka  make  ka  mea  e  makau  ai,  death'is  the  thing  to  be  afraid  of, 
O  ka  huhu,  he  wahi  hehena  ia,  anger  is  a  certain  madness. 
O  ke  Kiaaina,  o  ia  ke  ku  paa,  the  Governor,  he  stands  fast. 
O  Hawaii  ka  mokupuni  nui,  Hawaii  is  tlie  large  island. 

NOTES. 

The  0  emphatic  may  be  found  in  the  following  positions, 
viz.,  1st.  0  emphatic  is  generally  prefixed  to  the  Aui 
kumu  when  that  case  stands  before  the  verb,  or  in  a 
phrase  or  sentence  that  has  no  verb  ;   as, 

Aole  ia  o  kona  malo  maoli.  that  was  not  his  real  malo. 


1 


or  THl  0  EMPHATIC.  1  31 

A  pela  no  o  Unix  e  pepehiia'i,  and  so  IJmi  was  to  be  beaten. 
I  mai  la  o  Liloa  o  kuu  malo  no  keia. 
Liloa  said,  this  indeed  is  my  malo. 

2.  0  emphatic  may  stand  before  proper  names  wlier- 
ever  they  may  stand,  and  is  generally  prefixed  the  first 
time  such  proper  name  is  introduced  ;   as, 

0  Umi,  o  ia  kekahi  keiki  a  Liloa,  Umi,  he  was  a  child  of  Liloa. 
Ua  kapaia  o  Hakau  he  alii  nui,   JIakau  was  called  a  high  chief. 

1  mai  o  Akahi,  ae,  e  hele  oe,  Akahi  said,  yes,  go  thou. 

3.  When  words  are  used  in  apposition,  the  last,  or  the 
one  used  to  explain  tiie  other,  takes  o  emphatic  ;   as, 

Ua  kapaia  kona  inoa  o  Puhi,  his  name  was  called  Puhi. 
Kena  ae  la  oia  i  kona  kaikaina,  o  Haiao. 
He  sent  his  younger  brother  Haiao. 
Holo  ae  la  kekahi  keiki,  o  Lanai  kona  inoa. 
There  ran  a  certain  child,  Lanai  by  name. 

Note. — If  the  first  of  two  noune  in  apposition  takes  o  emphatic, 
the  second  always  does. 

4.  After  the  interrogative  owai,  who  ;  the  answer  in- 
variably begins  with  o  emphatic  ;   as, 

O  wai  ka  inoa  o  ia  wahine  ? 

What  [who]  is  the  name  of  that  w^oman  ? 

O  Mala  kono  inoa,  Mala  is  her  name. 

O  wai  ka  inoa  o  keia  laau  ?  ivhat  is  the  name  of  this  wood  ? 

O  iliahi,  a  a  laauala  paha. 

Sandal  wood,  or  perhaps,  odoriferous  wood. 

5.  In  defining  words  or  terms,  or  in  giving  names  to 
persons  or  things  ;  the  names  so  given  are  usually  pre- 
ceded by  0  emphatic  ;  as, 

Ina  e  ninau  mai  oia  i  kou  inoa,  ea. 

If  he  shall  ask  your  name,  take  notice. 

Alaila,  e  hai  aku  oe,  o  Umi  oe. 

Then  thou  shall  tell  him,  thou  art  Umi. 

6.  0  emphatic  may  be  prefixed  to  pronouns  of  any  per- 
son or  number,  in  almost  any  part  of  a  sentence,  to  ren- 
der them  emphatic;  as, 

Hoi  aku  la  oia  i  Waipio,  he  returned  to  Waipio. 

O  oe  no  ke  alii  ;  aka,  o  kou  kanaka  keia. 

You  indeed  are  the  chief  ;  but  this  is  your  ma7i.  [servant] 

O  laua  kona  mau  hoa  i  hele  mua  mai  ai. 

Those  two  were  his  companions  who  first  came. 


132  OF    ARTICLES 

7.  In  many  cases  the  o  emphatic  seems  to  be  inserted 
merely  for  the  sake  of  euphony  ;  and  hence,  grammati- 
cally speaking,  it  may  be  either  inserted  or  omitted,  ac- 
cording to  the  taste  of  the  speaker  or  writer. 

Observation. — Of  the  foregoing  rules  for  the  use  of  o  emphatic,. 
the  first,  second,  third  and  sixlh  refer  to  it  as  it  may  be  used;  the 
fourth  and  fifth  are  of  very  general  application. 

SYNTAX  OF  ARTICLES. 

Rule  4.  Position  and  Agreement. 

The  Articles  may  stand  immediately   before,   and  agree' 
with  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong  ;   as, 
Eia  ke  kumu  nma,  here  is  the  first  reason. 
He  keiki  kana,  he  had  a  child. 
Ka  hoomaau,  the  persecution. 
Kekahi  moku  haole,  a  certain  foreign  ship. 
Ka  moku,  he  wahi  kiakahi,  the  vessel,  a  something  of  one  mast. 
Kuu  ivahi  kino  niai,  my  something  of  a  sick  body. 
Loaa  ia'u  kahi  pauku  wahie,  I  found  a  stick  of  firewood. 
I  hookahi  malama,  ,'if:5.  (dala.) 
For  one  month  ,^5,  i.e.  ^5  per  month. 

RULE  5. 

The  Articles  may  be  separated  from  the  nouns  to  which 
they  belong  by  the  signs  of  the  dual  or  plural  ;  as, 
Hele  mai  la  ka  poe  holo  moku,  the  sailors  came  here. 
He  poe  keiki  pono  ole  keia.  a  bad  set  of  children  these. 
He  mau  mea  akamai  oukou,  ye  are  wise  persons. 
Kekahi  mau  manu,  ua  lele,  some  (of  the)  birds  have  flown. 

RULE  G. 

The  indefinite  Article  he  is  generally,  if  not  always  con- 
fined in  its  use  to  the  Aui  kumu  ;   as, 

He  poe  kuhi  hewa  lakou,  they  are  a  mistaken  people. 

He  pono  anei  keia  walaau  ?  is  this  confusion  a  good  thing  ? 

O  ka  nui  o  lakou,  hehaneri  a  ken. 

The  number  of  them  was  a  hundred  and  more. 

Ina   he  oiaio  keia  olelo  a  [)au,  if  ail  this  description   be  a  truth. 

He  aihue  ke  kanaka,   the  man  was  a  thief. 

Observation. — Proper  nouns  or  names  applied  to  individuals, 
though  they  may  have  the  o  emphatic,  have  no  article  ;  as,  Oahu, 
Hawaii,  Kamehameha,  o  Kauai,  o  Lahaina. 

Note  I. — The  words  Haku,  lord,  yllii,  chief,  31oi,  majesty, 
Akua,  god,    &,c.,  are  not  real  excoplions.  as  the  Hawaiians  had 


OF    ARTICLE».  13$ 

toinls,  chiefs,  sovereigns,   and  gods  in  threat  numbers,  and  hence 
such  words  were  not  appropriated  to  individuals. 

Note  2. — The  articles  are  always  used  before  nouns,  unless 
there  is  some  reason  for  dropping  them. 

Note  3. — Tlie  Arlicle  ka  often  stands  as  a  representatlYC  of  it-, 
self  and  a  noun  ;  as, 

Owau  ka  (mea)  i  oleio  aku  ia  Bold. 

I  am  the  (person  who)  said  to  Bold. 

O  Keeaumoku  ka  (mea)  i  houka'ku. 

Keeaumoku  was  the  (person  who)  made  the  attack. 

K.ULE  7. — Articles  Dropped. 

The  Articles  are  dropped  from  before  nouns,  when  tho 
nouns  are  general  in  their  signification  ;   as, 

Nonoi  aku  la  i     laau,  he  asked  for      medicine. 

Note. — The  semi-definite  article  icahi  is  often  used  in  sucU 
cases. 

Aole  ma  ka  pall  wale  no  ia  emi  o      kanaka. 
Not  on  the  hills  only  is  that  diminishing  of        people. 
Ke  imi  nei  kakou  i       naauao  no  kakou. 
We  are  seeking      knowledge  for  ourselves. 
Ua  kohoia  maua  i      mau  luna  awa. 
We  two  were  chosen       directors  of  awa. 
He  kanaka  hou  e  manao  ana  e  lawe  i      wahine. 
A  young  man  thinking  to  take       wife. 

E  haawi  mai  oe  i       dala  na'u  i  uku  no  kuu  ee  ana  ma  ka  moku. 
Give  me      dollar  (money)  as      pay  for  my  coming  on  board  the 
vessel. 

Haawi  o  Kamehameha  i      aahu  hulu  manu. 
Kamehameha  gave      robe  of  birds'  feathers. 
Haawi  oia  i      mau  lole  maikai. 
He  gave  him      some  handsome  clothes. 

Note  1. — It  will  be  seen  that  in  the  above  examples  no  individ- 
ual things  are  specified. 

Note  2. — In  many  cases  the  oynission  of  the  definite  article  in 
Hawaiian  has  the  same  effect  as  the  insertion  of  the  indefinite  arti-^ 
cle  in  English. 

RULE  8. 
After  the  word  Ulo  or  other  words  signifying  to  change 
from  one  thing,  office  or  business   to   another  ;  or  to  be- 
come a  different  person  or  thing  ;  or  to  establish  a  person 


134  OF    ARTICLIS. 

or  tiling  in  any  station  ;   the   person,  office  or  thino    into 
which  it  is  changed  or  becomes,  drops  the  article,  as, 

£  hlo  ia  ala  i      ala  maikai  ke  hanaia. 

That  road  will  become  a     good  road  if  it  be  worked. 

Kahaha  makou  no  kona  lilo  ana  i     kahuna. 

We  were  astonished  at  his  becoming  a     priest. 

Kaumaha  lakou  i  ua  puaa  la  i  lilo  hoi  i      akua  mana. 

They  sacrificed  that  hog  that  it  might  become  a     powerful  god. 

Kohoia  o  Kauka  i     luna  holo  i  ka  aina  e. 

Doctor  (J;)  was  chosen     ambassador  to  foreign  lands. 

Eha  mau  haumana  e  Hlo  ana  i  mau     kumu. 

Four  scholars  were  about  becoming      teachers. 

Note  1. — Words  placed  in  apposition,  or  where  one  definei  the 
■  other  ;  the  latter  generally  drops  the  article  ;  as, 

Ua  koho  au  ia  Wm.  L.  Lee  i     Luna  kanawai. 

I  have  chosen  Wm.  L.  Lee  a  judge. 

Note.  2. — In  all  cases  of  this  kind,  the  last  noun  is  preceded 
iby  i. 

RULE  9. 

The  noun  inea  signifying  possessor  of  something,  or 
<when  it  signifies  the  cause  or  purpose  of  action,  drops  the 
article  ;   as, 

Ke  imi  nei  na  luna  i     mea  e  waiwai  ai  na  'Hi. 

The  lunas  seek  a     thing  (means)  to  enrich  the  chiefs. 

Aole     mea  e  ae  e  nalowale  ai  kcia  hewa. 

There  is  no  other  thing  (person)  to  cause  this  wickedness  to  be 
.concealed. 

Aole  o  lakou  kuhikuhi  mai  i     mea  e  malu  ai. 

They  do  not  point  out  a     thing  (way)  to  make  peace. 

Hoonoho  oia  i  kekahi  keiki  i       mea  e  hooino  mai  ia  makou. 

He  appointed  a  certain  boy  a     thing  (instrument)  to  reproach  us. 

0  na  kanaka  a  pau     mea  waiwai  ia'u. 

All  persons  who  have  property  with  me  (i.e.  to  whom  Ī  am 
indebted.) 

1  ka  hana  ana  i  ka  pa  i     mea  e  kaawale  ai. 
In  making  the  fence  a      thing  to  be  separate. 

Akamai  na  wahine  i  ka  imi  hana  i     mea  e  pono  ai  ka  lakou. 

The  women  were  skilful  in  seeking  work  a  thing  to  benefit  tlicir 
^families. 

Oukou,  e  na  makua     mea  keiki. 

Ye  parents,     things  of  children,  (i.  e.  who  have  children.) 

]v^oTE. — The  phrases  mea  aincr,  mea  pa,  mea  loi,  mea  ke\k\,  &,(•,., 
.sif^nifying  posessors  of  land,  fence,  kalo  patch,  children,  Szc,  arc 
,often  used. 


Of    PRf POSITIONS.  1^5 

RULE  10. 
A  noun  following  the  Aui  pili  drops  the  article  ;  as, 

Ko  Hawaii  pae      aina,  Hawaii's  islands  i.  e.  islands  of  Hawaii. 
Ko  ke  alii     hale,   the  kings'    house. 
Ka  kc  kuniu    palapala,   the  teacher's     book. 
Ko  Hoa{)ili     waa,   Hoapili's     canoe. 
Ka  ke   keiki    waiwai,  the  child's  property. 

Note. — The  Aui  pili  seems  in  this  case  to  have  the  force  of  a' 
prefix  pronoun  which  excludes  the  article. 

SYNTAX  OF  SIMPLE  PREPOSITIONS. 
RULE   11. 

In  the  case  of  proper  names,  simple  prepositions  gener-- 
ally  stand  immediately  before  the  cases  they  help  to  form, . 
and  govern  them  ;   as, 

I  ka  make  ana  o  Kahikiea,  on  the  death  of  Kahikiea. 

Mai  Kauai  aku  nei  lakou,  they  were /ro?n  Kauai  here. 

E  hoi  ana  lakou  i  Niihau,  they  were  reluming  to  Niihau. 

He  wi  nui  o  Kona  i  Hawaii,  a  great  famine  of  Kona  on  Hawaii. 

Ua  lohe  iho  nei  au  ia  Kinimaka. 

Lhave  lately  heard  through  Kinimaka. 

RULE   12. 

In  the  Cuse  of  commoji  nouns,  simple  prepositions  are  ^ 
generally  separated  from  the  cases  which  they  help  to  ■ 
form,  and  which  they  govern,  by  other  words  intervening. 

The  words  intervening  are  generally  the  articles,  the 
ptrefix  pronouns,  the  signs  of  the  dual  and  plural,  and  a  = 
noun  in  the  Aui  pili ;  as, 

Ka  inoa  o  ka  icahine,  the  name  of  the  luoman. 

/ka  /a  14  o  Augate,  on  the  14th  day  of  August. 

Ua  kohoia  mai  au  e  ke  Kiaaina,    I  am  chosen  by  the  Goverfior  - 

iVo  na  mea  i  liia,  concerning  the  persons  who  were  iianged. 

Ke  kanawai  o  keia  Aupuni,  the  law  o/ this  kingdom. 

3/a  na  kanawai  he  umi,  in  the  ten  commandments. 

Noho  iho  oia  me  kela  pilikia,  he  lived  with  that  difficulty. 

I  ko'u  manao  he  pono,  in  my  opinion  it  was  proper. 

Moe  oia  me  ko  Hawaii  poc.  he  slept  ivith  Hawaii's  people.  ■ 

Mai  ko  niakou  mau  la  aku.  from  our  days. 

OF  DUAL   AND    PLURAL    SIGNS. 
RULE   13. 
The  signs  of  the  Dual    and  Plural  stand   immediateljr 
before  the  nouns  rendered  dual  or  plural  ;   as, 
Sa  'lii  a  me  na  puili,  the  chiefs  and  the  forces. 


!|.36  'OF    KOUKS. 

Maluna  o  na  waa  kupapau.  on  the  canoes  bearing  ihe  corpse. 

He  mau  aina  pohaku,  some  rocky  lands, 

Maona  keia  poe  kuke,  these  cooks  are  full  of  food. 

Nui  ka  pae  moku,  great  is  the  collection  of  ships. 

He  puu  wahie  pokopoko,  a  collection  of  s\\oxi  firewood. 

Noho  lakou  ihko  o  na  heiva  a  pau. 

They  lived  in  all  (  kinds  of  )  wickedness. 

SYNTAX   OF   NOUNS. 
RULE    14. 

A  noun  rarely  ever  stands  the  first  word  in  a  sentence^ 
'though  it  often  stands  the  last.  A  noun,  however,  may 
-stand  in  almost  any  place  in  the  sentence,  except  the 
•first ;  reference  being  had  to  the  position  of  other  words 
-and  the  structure  of  the  sentence. 

RULE   15. 

The  Āui  Kumu  is  the  subject  of  an  affirmation,  which 
•affirmation  is  expressed  either  by  a  verb,  pronoun  or  affir- 
mative particle  ;  or  it  may  contain  an  affirmation  wkhin 
fitseif ;  [see  Rule  24,]  as, 

Ke  uive  nku  net  o  Melelina  ia  olua. 

Melelina  sends  love  to  you  two. 

Ka  uku  o  na  kumu,  oia  ka  hewa. 

The  pay  of  the  teachers,  that  was  the  error. 

■He  kipi  oe,  aole  au  he  kipi,  you  are  a  rebel,  lam  not  a  a  rebdl. 

He  mau  haumana  kana,  he  has  some  scholars. 

"O  ka  he;wa  no  ia,  that  was  the  wrong. 

'He  poe  anaana  lakou,  they  were  a  company  of  sorcerers. 

*0  Kehahaule  ke  kahuna,  Kehahaule  was  the  priest. 

Eia  ka  makana  a  Namai,  he  koi. 

'Here  is  the  gift  of  Namai,  an  adz. 

^I  ka  po  ka  lakou  hana,  in  the  night  was  thoir  work. 

'He  kino  puaa  no,  the  body  was  that  of  a  hog. 

■I^ani  ke  kuhihewa  nui,  ivonderfid  was  the  great  mistake. 

RULE   16. 

'In  īīūWū'nīin,  propositions  often  have  two  different  words 
<as  subjects  ;  one  however,  may  illustrate  or  explain  the 
mother ;  as, 

'O  ka  honua  nei,  he  mea  poe  poe  ia. 
The  earth,  it  is  a  round  substance. 

'O  kekaiii  mau  keiki  kane,  ua  kahikoia  lakou. 

"Certain  boys,  they  were  splendidly  clothed. 


OF    NOUNS.  137 

O  ka  pono  no  ia,  o  ka  noho  naauao. 
It  is  a  good  thing,  the  living  wisely, 
O  kona  niai  ana,  o  koiia  make  no  ia. 
Her  sickness,  that  was  her  death. 
O  ka  Ahakuka  nialu,  oia  no  ke  Ahi. 
The  Privy  Council,  that  is  the  king. 

Remakk. — There  are  many  sentences  in  Hawaiian  without  a 
Verb,  where  it  is  difficult  to  determine  upon  which  word  the  affirm- 
lition   falls  ;  as, 

He  ahaaina  na  na  kula  kamalii. 

(There  was)  a  feast  for  the  childrens'  schools. 

He  poe  hihihila  ole  lakou,  they  (are)    a  shameless  company^ 

O  ka  baka  ka  enemi  nui,  tobacco  (is)  the  great  enemy. 

He  ano  okoa  ka  hae  o  na  kula. 

The  flag  of  the  schools  (was)  diflerent. 

Eia  ka  mea  maikai,  o  ka  mahe. 

Here  (was)  an  excellent  thing,  the  stillness. 

Alaila,  he  mea  e  ko'u  kauniaha,  then,  wonderful  (was)  niy  griei. 

Oia  ka'u  pule  i  ko'u  wa  pihkia. 

That  (was)  my  prayer  in  my  distress. 

RULE  17. 
In  sentences  containing  both  an  Aui  Kumu  and  a  Verby 
i.he  Aui  kumu  may  stand  before  or  nfkr  the  verb. 

SENTENCES    WITH   THE    VERB   FIRST. 

A  hala  kekahi  mau  la,  and  when  had  passed  certain  days. 

lilki  mai  la  ka  hoowaleiuale.  there  came  temptation. 

Make  kekahi  ivahine  i  ka  baka. 

There  died  a  certain  woman  by  tobacco. 

A  lilo  aku  ka  aina  i  na  kanaka  €. 

And  passed  the  land  to  strangers. 

Manao  iho  la  makou  c  kuai  me  oe. 

JVe  thought  to  trade  with  yon, 

SENTENCES    WITH   THE  AUI  KUMU  FIRST, 

O  ke  kuahiwi  i  hookapuia  e  ka  alii. 
The  mountain  teas  tabued  by  the  king. 
Aia  ua  kanaka  la  ke  hana  nei  la. 
There  that  man  is  now  working. 
Aole  lakou  e  inu  ajia  i  na  mea  ona. 
They  are  not  drinking  intoxicating  drinks. 
Nolaila  oe  i  manao  ai  e  lawe  i  wahine  nau. 
Therefore  thou  hast  thought  to  take  a  wife  for  thyself. 
Ina  oe  i  makcmake  e  pepelii.  e  kii  mai  oe. 
If  you  wish  to  kill  mc,  come  and  do  it. 
1» 


13B  <ii<  Notii^s. 

RULE    IS. 

Nouns  in  apposition  or  referring  to  the  same  thing,  gen- 
erally have  the  same  case,  and  tlius  agree  together  ;  as, 

Paipai  o  TVaimalu  ka  luna  haioielo. 

JVaimalu  the  2^'"ecfc/<C)' exhorted. 

Me  ka  Mai  ka  inea  kiekic,  with  the  King  the  high  personage. 

Na'u  iia  P.  TV.  Kepaa  kumu  kida. 

By  me  P.  W.  Kepaa  school  teacher. 

O  ku  inoa  o  keia  kanaka  o  /,  the  name  of  this  man  is  /. 

Note  1 . — In  the  oblique  cases,  the  preposition  is  often  repeated'' 
before  the  last  noun  ;  as,  me  ka  Moi  me  .  ka  mea  kiekie  ;  na'u  na 
f.  W.  Kepaa  na  ke  kunm  kula.  In  cases  like  this  last,  if  the  pre- 
position is  repeated,  the  article  must  be  inserted. 

Note  2. — It  is  a  question  whether  nouns  ctmnected  by  me,  a  me, 
<fcc.,  continue  to  be  in  the  same  case. 

RULE  19. 

One  noun  governs  another  through  the  medium  of  the 
simple  preposition  forming  the  case  of  the  latter  noun  ; 
asj 

Ke  kumu  o  ke  Kujanui,  the  teacher  o/ the  High  school.- 

Na  ia  o  ke  kai,  the  fish  oj  the  sea. 

Ka  ai  a  ka  wahine,  the  food  of  the  woman. 

Ke  kiaaina  o  Hawaii,  the  governor  of  Hawaii. 

Ka  eha  o  ka  make,  the  pain  of  death. 

Note  — The  expression,  through  its  oicn  preposition,  will' 
occur!  frequently  in  several  succeeding  rules.  [By  its 
own  preposition,  is  meant  some  one  of  ihe  simple  prepo- 
sitions mentioned  in  §>  68  and  which  are'  used  in  declining 
nouns  and  pronouns.]  It  seems  to  be  a  principle  of  the 
language  that  but  very  few  words  stand  in  such  relation 
to  each  other  as  that  one  may  be  said  directly  to  govern 
the  other  :  but  some  small  word,  (generally  the  simple 
prepositions,)  is  used  as  a  medium  of  transfer.  It  may  be 
said,  perhaps,  that  the  preposition  is  sufficient  of  itself  to 
govern  the  noun  after  which  it  stands  ;  but  the  real  rela- 
tion is  between  the  nouns.  Thus,  ke  kumu  o  ke  kula, 
the  words  related  to  each  other  are  kumu  and  kula,  like 
ludi  magister  in  Latin.  But  it  is  the  genius  of  the  Hawaii- 
an to  use  a  simple  preposition  as  a  medium  instead  of  a 
different  termination  of  a  case.  This  takes  place,  even 
where  a  transitive  verb   acts  most   directly  upon  an  Aus. 


OF    NOUNS.  139 

ālo  or  accusative  case.  It  will  be  seen  that  it  acts  gener- 
ally through  the  medium  of  a  preposition.  The  forego- 
ing principle  applies  more  or  less  to  all  the  simple  prepo- 
sitions except  Rule  32.  This  principle  is  found  also 
where  a  compound  preposition  is  used  ;  for  even  there,  a 
simple  preposition  is  the  medium  of  transfer;  as,  Noho 
lakou  maloko  o  kc  ana,  they  lived  in  a  cave,  literally  they 
lived  at  [the]  luithin  o/'the  cave,  or  they  lived  in  [the]  in- 
side of  the  cave.     See  Rule  36,  Note  4. 

RULE  20. 

When  two  nouns  come  together,  the  first  in  the  Aui 
iki  case,  this  case  is  governed  by  the  noun  following 
through  its  own  preposition  ;  as, 

Ko  Hawaii  pae  aina,  Hawii's  islands. 

Ma  ko  ka  AFoi  kaiiawai,  by  means  of  the  King's  law. 

Na  ko  ke  Konohiki  kanaka,  it  is  for  tiie  Konohiki' s  man. 

Ka  ka  ivahine  kane,  the  woman's  husband. 

Ko  ke  kumu  mau  hale,  the  teacher's  houses. 

Ka  na  haumana  palapala,  tlie  scholars  books. 

Note  1. — The  last  noun  in  such  cases  drops  the  article.  Rule 
10. 

Note  2. — The  meaning  of  this  form  of  expression  is  not  differ- 
<?nt  from  the  Aui  pili  form.  Thus,  the  forms  of  the  foregoing  rule 
may  be  written,  either  ;  as, 

Ko  Hawaii  pae  aina,  or  ka  pae  aina  o  Hawaii. 

Ma  ko  ka  Moi  kanawai,  or  make  kanawai  o  ka  Moi. 

Na  ko  ke  konohiki  kanaka,  or  na  ke  kanaka  o  ke  konohiki. 

Ka  ka  wahine  kane,  or  ke  kane  a  ka  wahine. 

RULE  21. 
The  several  oblique  cases  of  the  nouns  are  governed  by 
the  simple  prepositions  that  help  to  form  them  ;   as, 
Na  ka  Moi  i  hoonoho  ia  ia  i  kiaaina. 
It  was  the  king  who  appointed  him  governor. 
/  ka  hehthelu  palapala,  by  the  reading  (of)   books. 
/  ko'u  ike  an?  ma  Kaneohe  ne'i. 
In  my  observa  ion  at  Kaneohe  here. 
/  ka  nana  'ku  me  he  mau  holoholona. 
In  looking  at  them  as  brute  beasts. 
E  puka  mai  oe,  mai  loko  mai  o  ia  wahi. 
Come  thou  out  of  that  place. 
Me  he  mea  i  ao  ole  ia,  as  one  not  in  struct  ed. 
Ao  e  i  aoia  na  keiki  e  ko  lakou  mau  inakuo. 


140  OF    ADJCTIVES. 

The  children  were  not  instructed  hy  their  parents. 
E  hoomau  mamuli  o  ka  oukou  hana. 
Continue  on  afier  your  works. 

Note. — For  rules  respecting  the  government  of  the  Aui  alo  \n 
nouns,  see  the  corresponding  rule  under  pronouns.  Rules  32  and 
33. 

SYNTAX  OF  ADJECTIVES. 
RULE  22. 
Adjectives  generally  stand  immediately  after  their  nouns 
and  qualify  their  meaning  ;   as, 

Ka  palapala  hemalele,  the  holy  book. 

Ka  elele  Hawaii,  the  Hawaiian  messenger. 

Kona  kapa  eleele.  his  black  kapa. 

Me  na  huaolelo  maopopo,  with  distinct  words. 

la  la  hookahi  no,  on  that  one  (same)  day. 

Ke  ano  to  o  ke  kanaka,  the  7'eal  character  of  the  man, 

Ka  make  hike  ivawe  loa,  the  very  sudden  death. 

He  make  weliweli  loa,  a  most  fearful  death. 

Ilok3  o  ia  mai  loihi,  in  that  long  sickness. 

Exception  1. — Numeral  Adjectives  may  stand  imme- 
diately before  the  nouns  they  qualify  ;  as, 

Elua  kumu  i  hele  aku.  tico  teacliers  have  gone. 
Ehiku  hale  kula  malaila,  seven  school  houses  are  there. 
Umi  dala  ke  kumu  kuai,  ten  dollars  was  the  price. 

But  the  general  rule  often  applies  even  in  these  cases, 
but  with  the  order  of  the  words  changed  ;  as, 
Ua  hiki  mai  na  haole  elua,  two  foreigners  have  arrived. 

Exception  2. — Some  Adjectives  stand  before  the  nouns 
they  qualify,  but  with  the  indefinite  article  or  some  equiv- 
alent before  the  adjective,  and  some  other  word  or  words 
between  the  adjective  and  the  noun ;   as, 

He    Umikumamalua  luina  o  ia  nioku. 

Twelve  sailors  belong  to  tiiat  ship. 

He  iioa  ka  nui  o  na  wailele,  nine  is  the  number  of  tlie  waterfalls. 

Ua  nui  na  moku  i  ili,  many  were  the  ships  stranded. 

He  lehulehu  na  kanaka  i  uwe,  numerous  the  people  who  wept. 

Note  1. — It  may  be  questioned  whether  such  words  as  nui  and 
lehulehu,  &,c.,  with  the  words  ua  and  he  slioidd  be  considered  as 
adjectives  or  verbs, 


OF    ADJFXTJVnS,  141 

Not K  2. — Nouns  may  have  two  or  more  adjectives  lollowini;  and 
qualitying  them  ;  as, 

He  poe  liilii,  nawcdiwali,  naaupo  makon. 

We  are  a  small,  weak,  ignorant  con)pany, 

Ilaka  pono  mai  ia  me  ka  huhu  ino  maoli. 

He  looked  straight  at  me  with  real,  vicious  anger. 

Huli  ae  ua  ia  niho  oi  nei. 

Then  turned  aside  this  sharp  toothed  fish. 

Note  3. — Participles,  verbals  and  other  words  qualifying  nouns 
are  treated  as  adjectives. 

IVoTe  4. — One  noun  following  another  without  any  sign  of  regi- 
men, the  one  following  is  to  be  considered  an  adjective  ;  as, 

He  hana  kamalii  no  ia,  that  is  child^s  work,  or  childish  work. 
He  humuhumupea  kana,  his  business  was  sail  making. 

Exception. — One  noun  following  another  without  any 
sign  of  regimen  may  be  rendered  as  in  regimen  witli  the 
preceding  noun  ;  as, 

I  kela  wa  wi  make  ia  i  ka  pololi. 

In  that  time  (of)  famine  he  died  with  hunger. 

SYNTAX  OF  PERSONAL  PROxNOUNS. 

RULE  23. 

The  Aui  kumu  is  the  subject  of  a  verb,  when  there  is 
a  verb  in  the  sentence  to  which  it  belongs  ;  as, 

Olelo  oia,  elua  mea  e  pono  ai,  he  said,  two  things  are  necessary. 

Hoopil  makou  i  ka  lunaauhau. 

tVe  complained  of  the  tax  gatherer. 

Olelo  lava,  a  hoi  mai  Kanoa. 

They  two  said,  wait  till  Kanoa  returns. 

Elaice  au  i  kuu  alii,  [will  carry  away  my  chief. 

Mai  aua  oukou  i  na  keiki,  be  not  stingy  towards  the  children. 

E  hele  maua  me  kuu  alii,  /and  my  chief  will  go. 

Aloha  iho  la  laua  ia  Kaahumanu. 

They  two  had  compassion  on  Kaahumanu. 

Oivau  ka  i  olelo  akii  ia  Boki,  /  myself  said  to  Boki. 

RULE  24. 

When  a  sentence  has  no  verb,  the  Aui  himu  of  the 
pronoun  may  contain  the  property  of  aflirmation  or  dec- 
laration within  itself;   Rule  15,  as, 

Oia  ka  mea  i  loaa'i  ka  waiwai. 

That  15  the  thing  to  obtain  wealth. 

Jjukou  no  ka  poe  kauwa,  they  are  the  servants. 


"•142  OF    TERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 

Oia  ko'u  walii  manao  ia  oukou,  that  is  my  thought  to  you, 

Owai  ke  alli  ?  o  wau  no  ke  ahi. 

JVho  is  the  chief?  I  am  the  chief. 

O  oe  ka  wahine  kaulana,  thou  art  the  celebrated  woman. 

Makou  ka  poe  hewa,  aole  oukou,  we  are  in  the  wrong,  not  you. 

RULE  25. 

The  Aui  pili  of  the  pronouns  when  it  stands  absolutely, 
lis  governed  by  the  preceding  noun  or  other  words  through 
ats  own  simple  preposition.  By  standing  absolutely  is 
jneant  an  independance  of  any  word  following  it. 

Note. — This  rule  contains  the  same  general  principle  as  that  where 
<one  noun  governs  another  ;  (Rule  19,)  as, 

0  keia  hale,  he  hale  o\c,  this  house  is  a  house  of  mine. 
He  wahi  palapala  au  keia,  a  book  of  thiyie  is  this. 
Maluna  ana  ia  hewa,  upon  him  is  that  fault. 

He  mau  luna  malalo  iho  o  laua. 
There  were  officers  under  them  two. 

1  laweia'ku  imua  o  lakou,  he  was  brought  before  them. 

A  hiki  i  ka  nui  o  lakou,  till  he  came  to  the  greater  part  of  them. 

Ka  ukana  e  hooili  aku  maluna  ou. 

The  baggage  to  be  put  upoīi  you. 

Ka  hoike  a  na  keiki  a  kakou. 

The  exhibition  of  the  children  of  us. 

Na  keiki  a  oukou,  the  children  of  you. 

Ke  kula  pa-ko-li  a  laua,  the  singing  school  of  tliem  live. 

Ka  make  ana  o  ke  keiki  ahi,  the  dying  of  the  child  of  me. 

0  Naone  a  me  kekahi  poe  o  na. 

Naone  and  certain*  others  of  him.  [youl 

Heaha  keia  ou  ?    what  is  the  matter  of  you  7  lit.  what  is  this  of 

RULE  26. 

The  Alii  pili  often  stands  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence, 
or  connected  with  some  idea  following,  in  which  case  the 
Aui  pili  is  governed  by  its  own  preposition,  and  then  it 
becomes  the  subject  of  the  following  verb  or  proposition, 
«or  governs  a  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood;  as, 

Aole  a'w  lohe  i  kona  ano. 

1  have  not  heard  respecting  his  character. 
Aole  ona  lohe  mamua,  he  did  not  hear  before. 
iHe  wahi  ukana  au  e  laws  aku  ai. 

.A  bundle  which  you  are  to  take  along. 
No  kekahi  mau  mea  au  i  hoike  ai. 
«Of  certain  things  which  you  exhibited. 


or  puo.sui'.ws.  14 3« 

0  ka  niim  kahi  a  maua  e  helc  oi. 

The  country  wlieie  ive  two  are  to  go. 

Na  mca  kujiadalia  au  i  iki  ai. 

The  wonderful  things  which  f  satv. 

Aka,  ao'e  o'u  manao  e  hoi  aku,  but,  I  have  no  icish  to  declare. 

Oia  ka  niea  ana  i  olelo  aku  ai. 

That  was  the  thing  o/  which  he  spake. 

Eia  na  kanavvai  a  kaua  e  manao  ai. 

Here  are  the  laws  which  we  two  are  to  think  of. 

Note. — This  form  of  the  Aui  pili  may  often  be  rendered  into- 
English  by  which,  \\'\ih  the  person  and  number  of  the  pronoun 
which  the  following  verb  requires  ;  as,  He  walii  ukana  au  e  lawe 
aku  ai,  a  bundle  which  you  are  to  take  along,  &c.  The  au  con- 
tains the  ideas  equivalent ;  1st,  to  the  relative  ichith  :■  2nd,  to  the 
pronoun  you  ;  and  dd,  the  aflirmative  are  or  niuat ;  and  this  com- 
plex idea  expressed  by  au  evidently  acts  upon  aud  governs  the  in- 
fimtive,  to  take  ;  and  so  of  most  of  the  examples  of  this  class. 

REMARKS. 

The  Syntax  of  Pronouns  is  unique  in  its  structure  ;  es- 
pecially when  we  consider  to  what  extent  its  forms,  to  us- 
anomalous,  are  carried.  That  a  pronoun  should  be  gov- 
erned in  an  oblique  case  by  a  part  of  itself,  and  then,  in 
this  oblique  state  assume  the  office  of  subject  of  a  verb  or 
affirmation  and  govern  some  object,  either  noun,  pronoun 
or  infinitive  mood,  is  not  according  to  the  analogy  of 
European  languages,  and  hence  we  should  be  inclined  to 
class  it  amon^  anomalies.  But  the  foregoing  rule  and 
several  succeeding  ones  will  show  such  to  be  the  case. — • 
fn  English,  there  is  one  word,  viz.,  the  compound  rela- 
tiveyivhat,  which,  in  some  degree,  resembles  the  words- 
referred  to,  as  it  often  includes  the  subject  and  the  object. 

There  is  a  class  of  phrases  in  English  somewhat  simi- 
iBr  to  those  now  under  consideration  in  Hawaiian  ;    thus. 

This  is  a  kinsman  of  mine. 
That  is  a  friend  of  yours. 
Ft  was  a  fault  of  theirs,  &c. 

The  question  is,  what  governs  ?nine,  his  and  theirs  in  the- 
above  sentences  ?  The  preposition  of,  governs  the  object- 
ive case  ;  but  mine,  his  and  theirs  are  clearly  in  the  possess-- 
ive  case.  It  may  be  said,  ])erhaj)s,  that  these  sentences- 
are  eliptical.      But  what  word  or  words  can   be   supplied 


144  OF  rRo.NotJNS. 

without  altering  the  whole  phriiseology  of  the  sentence 
and  constructing  it  de  novo?  But  .such  sentences  are  not 
elipticcil,  ;)t  least  in  the  present  state  of  the  English  lan- 
guage. They  are  full,  explicit  in  their  meaning,  classi- 
c>l  in  their  structure,  and  of  every  day  use  by  the  best 
writers  and  speakers.  What  then  is  the  syntax  of  these 
possessive  cases  ? 

Again,  take  another  sentence. 

This  hook  is  mine,  that  hook  is  yours. 

It  is  a  principle  of  the  English  language  that  "  the 
verb  to  he  has  the  same  case  after  it  as  that  which  next 
precedes  it."  In  the  first  part  of  the  above  sentence  the 
word  book  is  evidently  in  the  nominative  case,  and  the 
word  mine  is  as  evidently  in  the  possessive  case,  contrary 
to  the  above  rule  ;  and  so  of  the  other  phrase,  that  book 
is  yours.  It  may  be  said  again,  these  are  eliptical  phrases; 
but  no  words  can  be  supplied  without  altering  the  words, 
mine  and  yours.  It  is  the  business  of  the  grammarian,  if 
he  can,  to  account  for  words  as  he  finds  them,  provided 
they  are  put  into  sentences  according  to  the  laws  of  lan- 
guage. 

Again,  another  sentence. 

It  is  yours  to  command,  it  is  mine  to  obey. 

Here,  the  phrases,  it  is  yours  and  it  is  mine  are  simi- 
lar to  those  noticed  before  ; — a  verb  to  be,  however,  with 
a  nominative  before  it  and  a  possessive  after  it,  is  not  ac- 
cording to  rule  ; — but  what  governs  the  infinitives  to  com- 
mand and  to  obey  1  Does  the  verb  is  govern  the  two  in- 
finitives ?  or  do  the  possessives  yours  and  mine  govern  the 
infinitive?  If  so,  what  is  the  rule  for  it  in  the  grammars? 
or  do  the  phrases  it  is  yours  and  it  is  mine  govern  the  in- 
finitive? If  so,  is  not  the  possessive  case  in  both  phrases 
an  essential  part  of  such  government  ?  Do  not  the  ideas 
of  duty  or  obligation  implied  in  the  words  yours  and  miīie 
constitute  the  main  power  that  governs  the  infinitives  ?— - 
l(  so  what  is  the  rule  ? 

It  is  not  at  all  the  object  of  these  remarks  to  explain 
the  grammatical  construction  of  these  double  genitives 
of  the  foregoing  sentences;  but  to  call  the  attention  of 


Oh     I'KONOLNS.  115 

the  reader  to  tlie  fact  of  their  existence,  and  tlius  pre- 
pare his  mind  to  understand,  that  in  Hawaiian  there  are 
not  only  a  great  many  suchy  but  they  are  in  great  varietij. 
One  English  author,  speaking  of  similar  phrases,  says, — 
"  They  are  anomalous  and  we  are  not  bound  to  account 
for  anomalies."  But  if  the  above  phrases  are  anomalous 
In  English  ;  then  a  great  portion  of  the  most  plain,  most 
significant,  most  forcible,  and  it  may  be  added  most  classi- 
cal, phrases  in  Hawaiian,  are  anomalous;  as  the  several 
succeeding  rules  and  examples  will  show.  But  it  is  the  bu- 
siness of  the  gi-ammarian,  to  exhibit,  as  far  as  he  can,  the 
laws  and  analogies  of  the  language  he  has  in  hand,  whether 
such  laws  follow  those  of  other  languages  or  not. 

Several  of  the  succeeding  rules  might,  possibly,  have 
been  condensed  into  one  ;  but  there  is  such  a  variety  of 
meaning  and  such  a  variety  of  form  also,  it  was  thought 
best  to  explain  each  case  of  the  pronoun  by  itself  It  is 
hoped  that  the  number  of  examples  brought  forward  as 
illustrations  will  be  of  benefit  in  explaining  some  of  the 
principles  of  the  pronouns. 

It  will  appear,  then,  that  some  of  the  oblique  cases  of 
the   pronouns  perform    the   several   offices  of  governing 
and  being  governed — of  subject  and  object — of  affirma- 
tion and  existence,  at  the  same  time. 

RULE  27, 

The  Aui  iki  of  the  Pronouns,  when  it  stands  absolutely, 
is  governed  by  the  precedins  noun  or  oth^r  word,  through 
its  own  preposition  ;  and  this  Aui  iki  expresses  the  ex- 
istence, or  possession  of  some  property  or  quality  of  the 
preceding  word  :  as, 

He  wahi  inanao  ko'u  ia  oe,  lit.  there  is  a  thoug]it  of  mine  to  you, 

Eiig.  id.  I  have  a  thout>lit  for  you. 

He  wahi  lole  ula  ko  lakou,  there  is  some  red  cloth  of  them. 

Some  red  cloth  is  theirs,  they  have  some  red  cloth. 

E  na  hoaluhi,  ua  pau  ko\i. 

Fellow  laborers,  mine  [my  thought]  is  done. 

Fellow  laborers,  I  have  done  [speaUuig  ] 

\  kuu  lohe.  he  mai  make  koit. 

i  heard  a  deadly  sickness  was  yours^ 

Ī  heard  that  you  were  deadly  sick. 

He  aina  oluolu  ko  oukou. 

A  pleasant  land  is  ^oitrs,  yov  have  a  pleasant  land, 
19 


146  OF    PRONOUNS. 

He  palapala  inaikai  ka  makou.  a  beautiful  book  is  our\i. 
We  have  a  beautiful  book. 

He  ai  momona  ka  olua,  there  is  sweet  food  of  you  two. 
^ou' two  have  sweet  food. 

Lohe  au,  he  vvalii  lealea  ho  ovkou. 

I  heard,  some  pleasure  was  yours. 

I  heard,  that  you  eajoijed  pleasure. 

Ir  will  be  seen  that  in  trap.>)l;iting  literally  the  above 
sentences,  we  have  been  obliged  to  use  the  phrase  re- 
marked upon  in  the  note  to  the  preceding  rule.  Thus, 
here  is  a  thought  of  mine  to  you,  Slc.  This  form  of  the 
pronoun  requires  to  be  Englished  mostly  by  some  part  of  the 
verbs  to  have  or  possess,  but  sometimes  ofexistence  merely. 

RULE   28. 

"^he  Aui  iki  like  the  Aiii  pili  often  stands  in  the  middle 

of  a  sentence  ;   in  which   case,   the  pronoun  is  governed 

by  it's  own  preposition,  and  also  becomes  i\\Q  szibject  oī  ihe 

following  verb  or  affirmation,  or  governs  an  infimtive  ;  as. 

He  wahi  ukana  ka^u  e  kaikai,  a  burden  is  mim  to  carry. 

I  have  a  burden  to  carry. 

Oia  no  ka\i  e  hoopuka'ku  nei,  that  is  mine  to  publish  here. 

That  is  what  I  have  to  publish  here. 

Eia  ka  olua  e  hana  mai  nei,  here  is  your  iwos^  to  do  here. 

Here  is  whal  you  two  ha^e  to  do  here. 

Oia  ka  maua  i  olelo  aku  ai,  that  loas  of  us  two,  we  said  it. 

'That  ivas  what  we  two  said. 

O  ka  pilikia  ka  oukou'i  hai  mai  ai. 

The  difficulty  of  you,  you  spoke  of  it. 

The  difficulty  of  which  you  s^poke. 

He  wahi  mea  kanaenae  ka  makou  e  haawi  ia  oe. 

A  thing  observed  by  us,  we  give  to  you. 

We  have  a  thing  observed  which  we  give  to  you. 

He  hale  Jio'u  e  wawahi'ra  ae,  a  house  of  mine  to  be  torn  down, 

fhave  a  house  to  be  torn  down. 

N'ol'lE. — This  form  of  the  Aui  iki  may  in  general  be  rendered 
ititb  English  by  some  part  of  the  verb  to  he ;  also,  by  tcha^  or 
ttjkich,  with  the  proper  pronoun  as  nominative  to  the  following 
Verb.  But  there  is  more  or  less  of  obligation  or  duty  implied  ; 
thus,  he  wahi  ukana  kaue  kaikai,  lit.  a  burden  is  what  I  have  to 
carry,  or  must  carry,  d.c.  This  form  is  also  in  use  where  me  stands 
lieford  the  Aui  pili  ;  as. 

Me  kau  i  olelo  rnai  ai,  pela  oe  e  hana'i,  as  ihou  hast  said,  so  do. 

RULE  29. 

The  Aui paewa  of  the  Pronouns  may  .stand  absolutely- 


OF    PRONOUNS.  147 

and  then  it  is  governed  b}'  the  preceding  word,  through 
its  own  preposition  ;  as, 

Hoolilo  ka  i\roi  ia  lakoii  i  man  knhina  no)ia. 

His  Majesty  appointed  them  ministers  for  him<iplf. 

E  manao  ana  oe  e  la  we  i  vvahine  nan. 

You  arc  tiiinking  to  take  a  wife /or  yourself. 

Pono  no  an  kc  lavve  i  wahine  nu'u. 

It  is  proper  that  I  should  take  a  wife /or  myself. 

Ku  e  laua  i  ka  pono  no  laua  iho. 

They  refused  what  was  proper /or  themselves. 

Ke  kulu  nei  ka  waiinaka  nou  n  me  kou  aupuni. 

The  tears  are  now  falling/or  you  and  for  your  kingdom. 

E  kipulu  a  e  hana  i  hale  nona. 

To  manure  (the  land)  and  to  build  a  house /or  him. 

E  pule  i  ke  Akua  no  mana,  pray  to  God  for  us  two. 

E  lawe  mai  ana  i  ai  na  makou,  he  is  bringing  food /or  us. 

No  lakou  ka  nani  a  me  ka  pomaikai. 

For  them  be  the  glory  and  blessedness. 

Note. — The  preposition  in  connection  wiih  this  form  of  th« 
^ui  paeiva  seems  to  act  more  directly  upon  the  pronoun  than  any 
Hother,  although  it  is  dependant  on  the  preceding  phrase  for  its  force. 
The  pronoun  may  often  be  rendered  by  the  compound  pronoun, 
myself,  himself  &c.  Thus,  hoolilo  ka  Moi  ia  lakou  i  mau  kuhina 
nona,  His  Majesty  appointed  them  ministers /or  himself;  but  iho^ 
self,  is  often  added  in  such  phrases. 

RULE  30. 

The  Aui  paeioa  often  stands  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence, 
fin  which  case  the  pronoun  is  governed  by  its  own  preposi- 
:tion  and  also  becomes  the  subject  of  the  following  verb  or 
affirmation,  or  governs  a  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood  ;  as, 

Ka  elele,  ka  mea  nana  e  hai  mai  i  ka  olelo. 

The  messenger,  the  person  whose  duty  it  is  to  declare  the  sentence. 

Na  kumu  nana  e  ao  aku  i  na  kanaka. 

The  teachers  whose  business  it  is  to  teach  the  people. 

Ua  imi  lakou  i  mea   no'u  e  hewa  ai. 

They  sought  something  against  me  to  blame  me. 

Nolaila,  nau  no  e  olelo  aku  ia  lakou  e  hoi. 

Wherefore,  it  is  for  you  to  order  them  to  return. 

A  nau  no  e  i  aku  i  na  'lii. 

And  it  belongs  to  yoic  to  speak  to  the  chiefs. 

Oia  ka  mea  nana  i  hana  ka  lani  a  me  ka  honua. 

He  is  the  be\ngtoho  made  the  heaven  and   the  earth 

Na  ke  Kiaaina  e  kaohi  i  ka  waa. 

^t  belonged  to  the  2:overnor  to  detain  the  canoe 


148  OF    PRONOUNS. 

Note  1. — This  form  of  the  Aui  paewa  Implies  duty,  obliga- 
tion, office,  business,  iSlc,  to  do  a  thing  or  see  that  it  is  clone. — 
It  may  be  connected  with  the  past  or  future  tense  or  the  infinitive 
mood.  With  a  preterite  tense  it  may  be  rendered  simply  by  the 
relative  ivho  or  which.  Will)  nouns  both  proper  and  common,  it 
is  the  ordinary  way  of  assertini^  that  an  office,  duty  or  obligation 
belonged  to  a  certain  individual,  or  thai  he  was  bound  to  do  or  not 
to  do  a  certain  thing,  as  the  last  example  under  rule  30  shows. 

Note  2. — It  will  be  seen  from  several  of  the  foregoing  rules  and 
examples,  that  the  Aui  pili,  Aui  iki  and  Aui  paewa  have  each 
two  diflerent  methods  of  construction  in  a  sentence.  One  absolute, 
that  is,  when  these  cases  stand  in  the  latter  part  of  a  sentence  or 
phrase,  or  are  not  connected  with  what  follows  ;  the  other  found 
in  the  beginning  or  middle  of  sentences  and  have  an  influence  up- 
on the  succeeding  words.  They  may  be  the  same  words,  but  their 
construction  in  the  sentence  gives  them  a  diflerent  influence. 

RULE  31. 
The  Aui  alo  of  the  Pronouns  is  governed  in  three  dif- 
ferent Avays. 

1.  By  an  active  verb  through  its  own  preposition. 

2.  By  its  own  preposition  after  a  ne.utcr  ov  passive  verb. 

3.  By  its  own  preposition  alone. 

First.   By  an  active  verb  through  its  own  preposition  ;  as, 
Olelo  mai  la  oia  ia  makou,  he  said  to  us  i.  e.  he  addressed  us. 
Hele  au  e  ike  ia  lakou,  I  went  to  see  them. 
Hele  ae  la  kekahie  ninau  ia  ia.  a  certain  person  went  to  ask  him. 
Hookuke  mai  la  kola  ia  maua.  that  person  drove   ws  two  away. 
He  mea  ia  e  paipai  ai  ia  makou,  it  is  a  matter  to  stir  us  up. 
E  ao  mai  oe  ia  makou,  teach  thou  us. 

Second.  By  its  own  preposition  after  a  neuter  or  passive 
verb  or  noun  ;  as, 

I  akaka'i  ia  lakou  ka  pono. 

That  the  propriety  may  be  clear  to  them. 

Ke  hai  aku  nei  au  ia  oe,  I  declare  to  you. 

E  hiki  ia  laua  ke  hana  pu. 

It  is  fit/or  them  two  to  work  together. 

A  haawiia  mai  la  ia'u,  and  it  was  given  to  me. 

E  pono  ia  oukou  ke  malama,  it  is  proper  for  you  to  take  hoed. 

Me  ke  ano  huhu  ia  makou  \  helo  mai  ai. 

He  came  (to  us)  as  if  angry  icilh  us. 

Kokoke  mai  ka  hopcna  ia  oe.  the  end  is  near  to  you. 

NoTF., — When  an  Avi  alo  is  sjovernrd  by  an  active  verb  termi- 


OF    PRONOUNS.  149 

nating  with  the  letter  i  or  when  tlic  verbal  directive  mai  may  stand 
before  tiie  i  of  the  Aid  alo,  the  latter  is  sometimes  dropjjed  or 
assimilated  with  the  preceding  i  ;  as, 

I^ana  wiile  no  e  kuai  (i)  ka  vvahie  ala. 

It  belonged  to  him  alone  to  sell  sandal  wood. 

Third.  By  its  own  preposition  alone. 

Pela  mai  kekahi  o  lakou  ia'u,  thus  some  of  them  (said)  to  me. 
la  ia  ka  oihana  kiaaina, /or  hiin  (he  had)  the  otfice  of  governor. 
Pela  aku  la  au  ia  ia,  thus  I  (said)  to  him. 
Eia  ko'u  manao  ia  oukou,  here  is  my  thought  to  you. 

Note  1. — The  Aui  alo  is  often  used  for  the  Aui  paewa ;  as, 
He  malihini,  ia  ia  kekahi  manao. 
A  stranger,  to  him,  (he  had)  a  thought. 
He  malihini,  nana  kekahi  manao,  etc. 
I  ke  konohiki,  ia  ia  ka  olelo. 
To  the  head  man,  to  him  (he  has)  the  orders. 
I  ke  konohiki,  nana  ka  olelo,  &,c. 

Note  2. — The  Aui  alo  thus  used  for  the  Aui  paewa  mostly 
xm^We^  possession  of  something  or  obligation  to  do  something. 

RULE  32. 

When  the  Aui  alo  stands  next  before  a  verb  and  pre- 
ceded by  the  Aui  paeiva,  either  of  a  noun  or  pronoun,  the 
Aui  alo  drops  the  preposition,  the  sign  of  the  case  ;   as, 

0  ke  Akua  nana  m,vkou  e  kiai  nei. 
God  is  the  being  who  keeps  us. 
I>la  ke  aupuni  oukou  e  uku  mai. 

The  government  is  the  agent  who  will  reward  you. 

Pi  a  Laimana  wahine  lakou  i  ao. 

Mrs.  Lyman  was  the  person  ivho  taught  them. 

Nana  wale  no  kakou  i  hana,  he  only  it  was  who  made  us. 

Oia  ka  mea  nana  oe  e  hoomaikai  ai. 

He  is  the  being  loho  will  bless  you. 

JVa'w  OE  e  hai  aku  i  kona  ano. 

1  am  he  who  will  declare  to  you  his  character. 
Ina  e  hele  au,  na\i  no  ia  e  hoouna  mai. 

If  I  shall  go,  1  am  he  icho  will  send  him. 

O  Limaikaika  ka  oukou  kumu  nana  oukou  e  ao. 

Mr.  Armstrong  your  teacher  is  the  person  who  will  teach  you. 

Oia  ka  mea  nana  ia  i  hana,  he  is  the  being  who  made  him. 

Note  1. — It  will  be  perceived  that  in  most  cases  of  this  con- 
struction the  Aui  paewa  may  be  rendered  into  English  by  the 
phrase  "  is  or  was  the  being,  person  or  agent  who,"  etc.,  with  vari- 
ous modifications,  according  to  the  sfeneral  idea. 


3  50  OF    PREFIX    PRONOUNS. 

Note  2. — Ilawaiians  pretty  generally  agree  in  dropping  the  i, 
the  sign  of  the  Aui  alo,  in  the  following  sentence ;  viz  : 

O  lehova  ka  mea  nana  i  hana    ka  lani. 

Jehovah  is  the  being  loho  made  the  heaven. 

Note  3. — Many  of  the  principles  and  fornns  of  translation  ex- 
liibited  under  tlie  preceding  rules  apply  equally  to  nouns  as  to 
pronouns. 

RULE  33. 

The  Aui  moe.  Am  hea,  Aui  hele,  Aui  hui  and  Aid  ia 
are  each,  like  the  cases  of  nouns,  governed  by  the  pre- 
positions that  serve  to  make  them  ;   as, 

Mai  o  makou  aku  nei  ke  kauoha. 

From  us  (was  given)  the  charge. 

Ma  o  na  la  [  hanaia'i  ka  hana. 

Through  him  the  work  was  done. 

E  oukou  e.  e  hele  mai,    O  ye,  come  here. 

E  lalau  pu  oe  me  au  i  ka  ukana,  take  hold  with  me  the  bundle. 

Ua  haaleleia.  kela  poe  e  ia,  that  company  were  forsaken  by  him. 

Note. — See  corresponding  rule  for  nouns.     Rule  21. 

S¥NTAX  OF  t^REFIX   PRONOUNS. 

RULE  34. 

The  Prefix  Pronouns  stand  before  their  nouns  and  ex- 
■clude  or  take  the  place  of  the  Article.  The  same  applies 
to  Numeral  Adjectives  when  placed  before  the  noun.  See 
Rule  22,  ex.2. 

JJa  mahaloia  kela  poe  bipi,  those  cattle  were  admired. 
Ma  keia  pae  aina,  at  this  cluster  of  islands, — at  these  islands. 
Hailukuia  no  ia  poe  kanaka,  those  men  were  stoned  to  death. 
Maluna  o  kona  moku,  on  board  his  ship. 
Makemake  ke  alii  ia  mau  mea,  the  chief  desired  those  things. 
A  i  hiki  mai  ua  kahuna  la,  and  if  that  priest  come. 
Ma  ko  oukou  pae  aina,  at  your  islands. 
Ma  ke  kokua  kana  haawi  ana,  as  a  benefit  was  his  giving. 
Pela  i  pau  ai  kona  pilikia,  thus  his  difficulty  was  ended. 
O  ko  laua  make  no  ia,  that  v/as  the  death  of  them  two. 
Ke  noho  nei  ka  laua  mau  wahine,  their  two  wives  are  living  here. 
Elua  a  laua  mau   keiki,  there  are  of  them   both  children,   i.  e. 
both  of  thf/m  have  children. 

E  noalama  i  ka  oukou  mau  keiki,  take  heed  to  your  children. 
E  pale  aku  oe  i  ka  lakou  olelo,  do  thou  resist  their  words. 
E  hahai  kakou  i  ko  kakou  poo,  let  us  follow  our  head. 


Of    INTER  RUG  ATI  VJ:     I'llO-NOlNS.  151 

Mai  hoonoho  oe  i  ka  liaole  i  Hawaii  iiei,  elua  wale  no  liaole. 
Do  not.  settle  Ibreigners  on  Hawaii,  two  foreigners  only. 

SYNTAX  OF  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 
RULE  35. 

Interrogative  Pronouns  follow,  in  general,  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  the  foregoing  personal  pronouns  ;   as, 

O  loai  ka  mea  aina  o  nei  ?  ivho  is  the  owner  of  land  here  ? 

Ma  ka  moku  o  wai  i  holo  mai  nei  ? 

On  the  vessel  of  ichom  did  you  sail  here  ? 

Kg  wai  ia  wahi  lanii  hale  ?  whose  is  that  house  timber  ? 

Ka  wai  ia  owili  pepa  ?  whose  is  that  roll  of  paper  ? 

JVo  ivai  ka  waiwai  i  waihoia  ae  la  ? 

For  whom  is  the  property  lying  there  ? 

Lilo  ka  palapala  ia  wail  the  book  has  passed  to  lohomf 

Ma  o  wai  la  i  hoouna  aku  ai  ?  by  ivhom  did  he  send  ? 

Mai  wai  mai  la  kela  ia  ?  From  whom  is  that  fish  ? 

Me  ipai  oe  i  hana  pu  ai  ?  ivilh  whom  did  you  work  ? 

Ua  hopuia  ka  aihue  e  wai  ?  the  thief  was  caught  by  ivhom  1 

Note. — Interrogative  Pronouns  arc  generally  found  either  at  the 
l>eginning  of  a  sentence,,  or  at  the  end  ;  rarely  in  the  middle. 

SYNTAX  OF  COMPOUND  PREPOSITIONS. 
RULE  36. 
Compound  Prepositions  stand  immediately  before  the  sim- 
ple ones  and  govern  the  following  noun  or  pronoun  through- 
the  medium  of  the  simple  prepositions  ;   as, 

Na  haku  maliina  o  ka  aina,    the  lords  over     the  land. 
Elua  kanaka  malalo  o  ka  laau,  two  men  under    the  tree. 
Noho  o  Kinau  iloko  o  ka  hale,    Kinau  sat  in  the  house. 
Kau  a€  la  maua  maluna  o  na  lio,    we  two  mounted  on  the  horsesv 
Hoi  aku  la  ia  iliina  o  ka  moku,    he  returned  on  board  the  ship^ 
A  puka  mawaho  o  ka  papu,    then  he  came  out  of  the  fort. 
Hai  mai  la  ke  Kiaaina  mai  loko  mai  o  ka  hale. 
The  Governor  spake  out  of  the  house. 

Note  L — The  Compound  Prepositions  are  often  ff)llowed  by  ver- 
bal directives  to  show  the  motion  or  tendency  of  the  action  ;  in 
such  cases,  the  verbal  directives  stand  between  the  compound  and 
fhe  simple  preposition  ;  as 

Na  haku  maluna  ae  o  ka  aina  ;  the  lords  over  the  land.  ^ 

Haule  oia  malalo  iho  o  ka  laau  ;  he  fell  under  the  tree. 

Note  2. — Other  simple  prepositions  besides  o  may  follow  com-- 
pound  ones ;  as 

Pii  ae  la  iluna  i  ka  laau  ;  he  climbed  up  into  fhe  tree. 


152  OF    ADVERBS. 

Note  3. —  Words  having  the  form  of  compound  prepositions, 
and  not  followed  by  a  simple  preposition,  or  govern  some  case, 
may  be  considered  as  adverbs  of  place. 

Note  4. — The  Compound  Prepositions,  as  they  have  the  cases 
of  nouns,  may  be  considered  as  nouns  with  the  article  dropped  ;  as, 

Na  hal<u  ma  (ka)  luna  o  ka  aina. 

The  lords  at  (the)  over  of  the  land. 

Elua  kanaka  ma  (ka)  lalo  o  ka  laau. 

Two  men  at  (the)  under  of  the  tree. 

Noho  o  Kinau  i  (ka)  loko  o  ka  hale. 

Kinau  sat  in  (Hie)  ivUhin  of  the  house. 

i.  e.,  in  (the  inside  of)  the  house. 

SYNTAX  OF  ADVERBS. 
RULE  37. 

Adverbs  proper,  or  words  that  qualify  verbs  stand  im- 
mediately after  their  verbs  ;   as, 

Noho  ivale  mai  la  ia  no  ka  molowa. 

He  lives  idly  on  account  of  laziness. 

Ua  kuhi  hewa  paha  wau,  I  have  thought  erroneously  perhaps. 

E  uku  maikai  ia  ka  mea  nana  ka  waiwai. 

He  shall  be  properly  rewarded  who  owns  the  property. 

Kuhi  au,  ua  pau  ka  noho  naaupo  ana. 

I  thought  the  living  in  ignorance  was  done. 

Aole  i  loaa  iki  ka  mea  nona  ka  lio. 

The  person  who  owns  the  horse  has  not  found  him  at  all. 

Ua  ahaaina  olioli  makou,  we  feasted  joyfully. 

Hele  papalua  lakou  a  pau,  they  all  went  two  by  two. 

Note. — Tt  will  be  noticed  that  no  word  comes  between  the  verb 
and  the  adverb,  not  even  the  verbal  directives. 

RULE  38. 

Other  Adverbs^  such  as  Adverbs  of  place.  Particles,   Con- 
junctions and  Interjections  have  their  places  in  the  sentence 
where  they  will  be  most  expressive.     These  are  various 
-and  cannot  be  reduced  to  rule,  but  must  be  learned  by 
practice. 

SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 
RULE  39. 

Verbs  may  stand  in  any  part  of  a  sentence  according 
to  its  construction. 

RULE  40. 

One  Verb  governs  another  that  follows  it,  the  latter  be- 
ing in  the  infinitive  mood  ;  as, 


OF    VERBS»  153 

Makemake  au  c  hai  aku  ia  oc,    I  desired  to  speak  to  you. 

Hoomaka  na  haumana  e  hookani, 

Tlie  scliolars  began  to  make  music. 

Aole  paliac  hiki  ke  pai  ia  mau  huaolelo, 

It  ivill  not  be  possible  perhaps  to  print  those  words. 

Nau  no  e  kii  niai  e  pepehi  ia  lakou, 

It  is  your  office  to  come  to  kill  them. 

Alalia,  ku  ae  la  o  Karnika  e  hoopau  i  ka  hana, 

TJien  Kamika  stooil  up  to  dismiss  the  work. 

RULE  41. 

An  Active  Verb  governs  the  Atii  alo  through  its  own 
preposition. 

Note. — This  preposition  is  always  i  before  common  nouns  and 
proper  names  of  places.  Before  pronouns  and  names  of  persons,  it 
is  ia. 

E  hai  aku  au  i  ka  mooolelo  o  keia  make. 

I  will  tell  the  history  of  this  death. 

E  paio  aku  kakou  i  keia  enemi. 

Let  us  contend  against  tiiis  enemy, 

Ua  haalele  lakou  i  na  mea  ona. 

They  have  forsaken  the  things  making  drunk. 

E  hoomahui  oukou  i  ka  naauao,  follow  ye  after  intelligence. 

Ke  hana  nei  lakou  i  ka  lakou  hana,  they  are  doing  their  tvork. 

Hoowahaivaha  lakou  ia  ia,  they  mocked  him. 

Olelo  ae  la  o  Kimo  ia  Puhi,  Kimo  said  to  Puhi. 

RULE  42. 

Some  Active  Verbs  govern  two  Aui  alas  ;  as, 

E  haawi  mai  oe  i  ke  kala  ia\(,  give  thou  the  money  to  me. 

Na  Kekukiha  i  hai  mai  ia  makou  ia  mau  inoa. 

It  was  Kekukiha  who  told  us  those  names. 

Kauoha  ae  la  i  kona  waiwai  a  pau  i  kana  keiki. 

He  willed  all  his  property  to  his  child. 

E  ao  aku  ia  lakou  i  ka  heluhelu,  teach  them  reading. 

RULE  43. 

An  Active  Verb  often  governs  an  Aui  alo,  with  an  infini- 
tive mood  ;   as, 

Paipai  na  kumu  ia  lakou  e  ku  paa. 
The  teachers  urged  ihem  to  stand  fast. 
20 


154  OF    VERBS. 

Kauoha  ae  la  ke  alii  i  na  makaainana  e  pepehi  i  na  kumu. 
The  chief  commanded  the  common  people  to  kill  the  teachers. 
Ao  aku  la  kela  ia  lakou  e  pai  palapala. 
That  person  taught  them  to  print. 

RULE  44. 

The  Infinitive  Mood  is  often  governed  by  nouns  and  ad- 
jectives ;  as, 

He  pono  i  na  kamalii  a  pau  e  makaala 

It  is  proper  for  all  child  en  to  beware. 

Aole  pono  ke  haawi  i  ka  hana  ia  hai. 

It  is  not  right  to  give  the  work  to  another. 

Aole  o  makou  makemake  e  pepehi  i  ka  makou  kumu. 

We  have  no  desire  to  kill  our  teachers. 

No  na  wai  e  ona  ai,  concerning  the  liquid  to  make  drunk. 

RULE    45. 

The  Infinitive  mood  is  often  governed  by  nouns  and  pro- 
nouns in  the  Aui  iki  and  Aui  paewa  cases  ;  as, 

Na  Hoapili  e  kukulu  i  hale  pule. 

It  was  the  business  of  Hoapili  to  build  a  meeting  house. 

JVa  ka  lunakanawai  e  hookolokolo  i  kanaka. 

It  is  the  office  of  the  judge  to  try  men. 

Nau  e  halihali  aku  ma  kela  wahi. 

It  is  for  you  to  carry  it  to  that  place. 

He  wahi  pauku  hapuu  ka^u  e  haawai  ia  o6. 

I  have  a  piece  of  fern  root  to  give  yo-u. 
JSau  hoi  ia  e  wehe  aku  ma  ke  akea. 

It  is  thine  to  spread  it  abroad. 
JSa  oukou  e  noi  aku  a  loaa  mai. 

II  is  for  you  to  ask  and  obtain. 
JSana  no  e  hapai  ae  i  ka  poe  haahaa. 

//  is  his  province  to  raise  up  those  who  are  humble. 

Note.— See  Rules  26,  28,  and  30. 

R,ULE  46. 

Participles,  Adjectives,  and  Verbal  nouns  formed  from 
causative  verbs  govern  the  Aui  alo.  Causative  verbs  are 
those  having  the  prefix  hoo  or  haa. 

He  mea  hoo  oluolu  i  ko  lakou  manao. 
A  thing  causing  comfort  to  their  minds. 


OF    PARTICIPLES.  155 

O  ka  hoomanao  ana  i  ka  mea  pono. 
The  remembering  the  good  Ihing. 
E  hoopuni  ana  i  ka  mokiipuni  nui. 
The  i^oini^  round  the  great  idand, 

0  ka  hoonaauao  ana  i  ko  Hawaii  poe. 
The  giring  instruction  to  Hawaii's  people. 
He  wahi  mea  hoakaka  aku  ia  oe, 

A  something  /o  6e  explained  to  you. 

Oia  ka  hua  a  ka  hoopalaleha  i  ka  hana  maikai. 

Tliat  is  the  fruit  of  indisposition  to  good  work, 

RULE  47. 

The  Participle  in  rtn«  of  an  Active  verb  governs  the 
Aui  alo,  through  the  preposition  forming  the  Aui  (do  ;  as, 

1  ko'u  ike  ana  i  ka  lakou  hana.  on  my  seeing  their  ivork. 

0  na  )aau  e  hua  ana  i  ka  hua,  the  trees  bearing  fruit. 
Pela  ka  mea  e  imi  ana  i  ka  pono. 

So  is  the  person  seeking  righteousness. 

E  /ioiA'e  fl?ia  i  na  wiea  hou,  exhibiting  new  tilings. 

Nui  wale  kou  kokua  ana  ia  makou. 

Very  great  is  your  assisting  us. 

Pela  ko  ka  makai  ^at  ana  mai  ia'tt. 

So  was  the  constable's  telling  me. 

1  ka  oukou  hooino  ana  ia  ia,  in  your  reproaching  him. 

RULE  48. 

The  Participle  passive  agrees  with  a  noun  like  an  adject- 
ive ;  as, 

Malaila  ka  lua  i  eliia,  thefe  i's  the  ^lii  that  was  digged. 
Ma  kahi  i  hookaatcaleia  no  lakou. 
At  the  place  set  apart  for  them. 

RULE  49. 

Nouns  signifying  time,  place,  distance,  measure,  etc.,  may 
be  considered  as  in  the  Aui  kumu  without  a  verb,  or  in 
some  oblique  case  without  a  preposition^  as, 

Elua  īOahi  e  noho  ai  ke  kumU. 

Two  places  where  the  teacher  may  live. 

la.  to  a  make  o  Kalaniopuu,  at  that  time  Kalaniopuu  died. 

Elima  anana  ka  loa  o  ka  hale. 

IP'we  fathoms  was  the  length  of  the  house. 

Pakelu  paha  kona  holo  ana,  thee  times  perhaps  was  his  sailing. 


156  OF    VERBS. 

RULE  50. 

The  singular  is  often  used  for  the  plural;   particularly 
in  poetical  style;  as, 

Ua  hoonohoia  me  he  loaa  kaua  la. 

They  were  stationed  like  a  war  canoe,  (like  war  canoes.) 

Ua  jkc  au  i  ka  hale  o  na  kamaaina. 

Ī  have  seen  the  house  (houses)  of  the  residents. 

Ke  kulu  nei  ka  waimaka  nou. 

The  tear  is  (tears  are)  falling  for  you. 


i 


RETURN       CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 
TOhh^        202  Main  Library 


LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 


ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

1 -month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling  642-3405 

6-month  loons  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books  to  Circulation  Desk 

Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  mode  4  days  prior  to  due  dote 

DUE    AS   STAMPED   BELOW 


^Wf^^T977,-g 


(^p^    ^  1^77 


R2C.  CiR.Aj3  2  5 


JUL    91979 


^'^g.ci-,  JUL  a  4  \m 


FORM  NO.  DD  6, 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
BERKELEY,  CA   94720 


U  C,  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CDMblflflMbl 


1 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


-^" 


^4^^%^ 


^pm 


iw 


